Instructions 95-8533

Eagle Quantum™ Premier™

Fire and Gas Detection/Releasing System

Detector Electronics Corporation

6901 West 110th Street • Minneapolis, Minnesota 55438 USA
3.1 Tel: 952.941.5665 or 800.765.3473 • Fax: 952.829.8750
2/05 95-8533
 Table of Contents
Section 1 - Safety
ALERT MESSAGES .............................................................1-1
Section 2 - Introduction
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ......................................................2-1
Communications Loop ...................................................2-1
LON Communication Heartbeat.....................................2-2
Theory of Operation.......................................................2-2
Controller User Logic .....................................................2-4
Communication Network Fault Operation......................2-4
Multiple Wiring Faults ....................................................2-4
MAJOR COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS .............................2-5
System Controller ..........................................................2-5
Local Operating Network (LON) ....................................2-6
Network Extenders .................................................2-6
EQ21xxPS Series Power Supplies and EQ2100PSM
Power Supply Monitor ............................................2-7
EQ2110PS, EQ2130PS and EQ2175PS Power Supplies...2-7
EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor .......................................2-7
Field Devices .................................................................2-7
Flame Detectors .....................................................2-7
EQ3700 8 Channel DCIO Module ..........................2-8
EQ3720 8 Channel Relay Module..........................2-8
EQ3710AIM Analog Input Module..........................2-9
EQ3740IPM Intelligent Protection Module .............2-9
EQ25xxARM Agent Release Module .....................2-9
EQ25xxSAM Signal Audible Module ....................2-11
EQ22xxIDC Series Initiating Device Circuit .........2-11
EQ22xxDCU / EQ22xxDCUEX Digital
Communication Units....................................2-12
Section 3 - Installation
SAFETY SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS....................3-1
Identifying the Area of Protection...................................3-1
Identifying Wiring, Network (LON), and System Power
Requirements .........................................................3-1
General Wiring Requirements ................................3-1
Power Wiring ..........................................................3-1
Determining Power Requirements .........................3-3
EQ2110PS, EQ2130PS and EQ2175PS Power
Supplies ..........................................................3-5
Backup Battery .......................................................3-5
Battery Charger ......................................................3-5
Shield Grounding ...................................................3-6
Junction Box Grounding .........................................3-6
Response Time vs. System Size ...........................3-6
Moisture Damage Protection..................................3-7
Electrostatic Discharge ..........................................3-7
GROUND FAULT MONITOR (GFM) INSTALLATION ..........3-7
Mounting ................................................................3-7
Wiring .....................................................................3-7
NETWORK AND NETWORK EXTENDER INSTALLATION......3-8
Mounting ................................................................3-8
Wiring .....................................................................3-8
INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUIT (IDC) INSTALLATION .......3-10
EQ22xxIDC Series Initiating Device Circuit........................3-10
Mounting ..............................................................3-10
Wiring ...................................................................3-10
EQ22xxIDCGF Series Initiating Device Circuit Ground
Fault .....................................................................3-11
Mounting ..............................................................3-11
Wiring ...................................................................3-11
EQ22xxIDCSC Series Initiating Device Circuit Short
Circuit ...................................................................3-12
Mounting ..............................................................3-12
Wiring ...................................................................3-12
EQ300X CONTROLLER INSTALLATION ..........................3-13
Enclosure Requirements .............................................3-13
Mounting ......................................................................3-13
Serial Interface Board ..................................................3-13
Wiring...........................................................................3-14
Power Wiring ........................................................3-14
Electrical Connections..........................................3-14
Configuration ...............................................................3-19
Software Defined Addresses................................3-19
EQ300X REDUNDANT CONTROLLER INSTALLATION ...3-19
Enclosure Requirements..............................................3.19
Mounting ......................................................................3-19
Wiring...........................................................................3-19
LON Wiring ..................................................................3-19
High Speed Serial Link (HSSL) ...................................3-19
Configuration ...............................................................3-20
S3 Configuration ..................................................3-20
Software Defined Addresses................................3-20
Modbus ................................................................3-20
ControlNet ............................................................3-20
 Table of Contents – Continued
POWER SUPPLY AND POWER SUPPLY MONITOR
INSTALLATION...................................................................3-20
Mounting ......................................................................3-20
Wiring...........................................................................3-20
Startup .........................................................................3-22
Measuring Battery Voltage and Charging Current.......3-22
8 CHANNEL DCIO INSTALLATION ...................................3-23
Mounting ......................................................................3-23
Wiring...........................................................................3-23
Configuration ...............................................................3-27
Setting DCIO Network Address............................3-27
8 CHANNEL RELAY MODULE INSTALLATION ................3-27
Mounting ......................................................................3-27
Wiring...........................................................................3-27
Configuration ...............................................................3-28
ANALOG INPUT MODULE INSTALLATION ......................3-29
Mounting ......................................................................3-29
Wiring...........................................................................3-29
Configuration ...............................................................3-30
INTELLIGENT PROTECTION MODULE INSTALLATION ...3-30
Wiring ..............................................................................3-30
Configuration...................................................................3-33
GAS DETECTOR LOCATION AND INSTALLATION..................3-34
Environments and Substances that Affect Gas Detector
Performance.........................................................3-34
EQ22xxDCU Digital Communication Unit used with Det-
Tronics H2S/O2 Sensors or other Two-Wire 4 to 20
mA Devices ..........................................................3-35
Assembly and Wiring Procedure ..........................3-35
Sensor Separation for DCU with H2S and O2
Sensors.........................................................3-36
EQ22xxDCU Digital Communication Unit used with
PointWatch ...........................................................3-37
Assembly and Wiring Procedure ..........................3-37
Sensor Separation for DCU with PointWatch.......3-37
EQ22xxDCUEX Digital Communication Unit (used with
Det-Tronics Combustible Gas Sensors)...............3-38
Mounting ..............................................................3-38
Wiring ...................................................................3-38
Sensor Separation with DCUEX ..........................3-39
EQ25xxARM Series Agent Release Module ...............3-41
Mounting ..............................................................3-41
Wiring ...................................................................3-41
Jumpers ...............................................................3-43
Address Setting ....................................................3-43
EQ25xxSAM Series Signal Audible Module ...............3-43
Mounting ..............................................................3-43
Wiring ...................................................................3-43
Jumpers ...............................................................3-44
Address Setting ....................................................3-44
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ..............................................3-45
Setting Device Network addresses..............................3-45
Overview of Network Addresses ..........................3-45
Setting Field Device Addresses ...........................3-45
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS ..................................................3-45
Section 4 - Operation
SYSTEM CONTROLLER ......................................................4-1
Pushbuttons...................................................................4-1
Controller Status Indicators ...........................................4-2
Text Display ...................................................................4-2
Controller Menu Options................................................4-2
Controller Audible Alarm................................................4-6
ControlNet Status Indicators (Optional) .........................4-7
Sequence of Events During a Configuration Data
Download ...............................................................4-7
Controller Redundancy ..................................................4-9
8 CHANNEL DCIO MODULE..............................................4-11
Power-Up Sequence....................................................4-11
8 CHANNEL RELAY MODULE ...........................................4-11
Power-Up Sequence....................................................4-11
ANALOG INPUT MODULE .................................................4-12
Power-Up Sequence....................................................4-12
INTELLIGENT PROTECTION MODULE ............................4-13
Power-Up Sequence....................................................4-13
Embedded Logic - Purpose .........................................4-14
Embedded Logic - Control Transfer Sequence Description..4-14
Embedded Logic - S3 Configurable Options ...............4-14
Embedded Logic - Operation.......................................4-15
EQ21XXPS POWER SUPPLY MONITOR..........................4-16
EQ2220GFM GROUND FAULT MONITOR........................4-16
EQ22XXIDC SERIES INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUIT ........4-17
EQ22XXDCU AND EQ22XXDCUEX DIGITAL
COMMUNICATION UNITS .................................................4-17
EQ25xxARM AGENT RELEASE MODULE ........................4-17
 Table of Contents – Continued
EQ25xxSAM SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE.........................4-18 Section 6 - Specifications
EQ300X Controller ................................................................6-1
EQ24xxNE NETWORK EXTENDER ..................................4-18
LON Termination Module ......................................................6-2
SYSTEM STARTUP............................................................4-18 EQ3700 DCIO Module ..........................................................6-3
Pre-Operation Checks .................................................4-18 EQ3720 Relay Module ..........................................................6-4
General Start-up Procedures.......................................4-20 EQ3710AIM Analog Input Module.........................................6-5
Startup Procedure for Controller..................................4-20 HART Interface Module.........................................................6-5
Startup Procedure for DCIO Module............................4-21 EQ3740IPM Intelligent Protection Module ............................6-6
EQ21xxPS Power Supplies...................................................6-7
EQ21xxPSM Power Supply Monitor .....................................6-8
Section 5 - Maintenance
EQ22xxIDC Series Initiating Device Circuit ..........................6-8
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ...................................................5-1 EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor ......................................6-9
Batteries.........................................................................5-1 EQ22xxDCU Series Digital Communication Unit ................6-10
Manual Check of Output Devices ..................................5-1 EQ25xxARM Agent Release Module ..................................6-10
O-Ring Maintenance......................................................5-1 EQ25xxSAM Signal Audible Module ...................................6-11
GAS SENSOR MAINTENANCE ...........................................5-1 EQ24xxNE Network Extender .............................................6-11
Combustible Gas Sensor ....................................................6-12
CALIBRATION AND ADJUSTMENTS ..................................5-2 Electrochemical Sensors.....................................................6-12
Calibration Algorithm A For Manual Calibration of EQ21xxPS Power Supply ...................................................6-12
Universal DCU .......................................................5-2
Normal Calibration .................................................5-2
APPENDIX A — FM APPROVAL DESCRIPTION ...............A-1
Sensor Replacement..............................................5-3
Calibration Algorithm C For Combustible Gas DCUs and APPENDIX B — CSA CERTIFICATION DESCRIPTION .....B-1
Automatic Calibration of Universal DCUs ..............5-3
Routine Calibration.................................................5-3 APPENDIX C — CE MARK ..................................................C-1
Sensor Replacement — Combustible Gas ............5-4
APPENDIX D — ROCKER SWITCH TABLE .......................D-1
Sensor Replacement — Toxic Gas ........................5-4
Calibration Algorithm D For Universal DCUs with O2
Sensor ....................................................................5-5
Normal Calibration .................................................5-5
Sensor Replacement..............................................5-5
Calibration Algorithm G For DCUs with PointWatch......5-6
Routine Calibration.................................................5-6
Sensor Replacement..............................................5-6

DEVICE CALIBRATION LOGS AND RECORDS .................5-6

TROUBLESHOOTING ..........................................................5-7

REPLACEMENT PARTS ......................................................5-8

DEVICE REPAIR AND RETURN ..........................................5-8

ORDERING INFORMATION.................................................5-8
 DET-TRONICS
®
Section 1
Safety
ALERT MESSAGES
The following Alert Messages, DANGER, WARNING,
CAUTION, and IMPORTANT are used throughout
this manual and on the system to alert the reader and
operator to dangerous conditions and/or important
operational or maintenance information.
DANGER!
Identifies immediate hazards that WILL result in
severe personal injury or death.
WARNING!
Identifies hazards or unsafe practices that COULD
result in severe personal injury or death.
CAUTION!
Identifies hazards or unsafe practices that COULD
result in minor personal injury or damage to
equipment or property.
IMPORTANT!
A brief statement of fact, experience or importance
that is given as an aid or explanation.
WARNING!
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior to
removing a junction box cover or opening a
detector assembly with power applied.
*oi is Detector Electronics' Trademark for its patented Optical
Integrity Systems, U.S. Patent 3,952,196, United Kingdom Patent
1,534,969, Canada Patent 1,059,598.
3.1 ©Detector Electronics Corporation 2005
Instructions
Eagle Quantum™ Premier
Fire and Gas
Detection/Releasing System
CAUTION!
1. Be sure to read and understand the entire
instruction manual before installing or operating the
Eagle Quantum Premier system. Only qualified
personnel should install, maintain or operate the
system.
2. The wiring procedures in this manual are intended
to ensure proper functioning of the devices under
normal conditions. However, because of the many
variations in wiring codes and regulations, total
compliance with these ordinances cannot be
guaranteed. Be certain that all wiring complies
with the NEC as well as all local ordinances. If in
doubt, consult the authority having jurisdiction
before wiring the system.
3. Some Eagle Quantum Premier devices contain
semiconductor devices that are susceptible to
damage by electrostatic discharge. An
electrostatic charge can build up on the skin and
discharge when an object is touched. Always
observe the normal precautions for handling
electrostatic sensitive devices, i.e. use of a wrist
strap (if available) and proper grounding.
4. To prevent unwanted actuation, alarms and
extinguishing devices must be secured prior to
performing system tests.
NOTES
Wiring and equipment installation must meet or
exceed the latest revisions of the appropriate
NFPA Standards, National Electrical Code (NEC),
and Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
All wiring shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
2/05 95-8533
 Section 2
Introduction
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Eagle Quantum Premier (EQP) system combines
"fire detection and extinguishing agent release" and
"hazardous gas monitoring" in one complete package.
The system is intended for use in hazardous locations
and is designed to meet the requirements of approval
agencies from around the world.
The system consists of a Controller and a number of
addressable microprocessor based field devices.
The Controller coordinates system device
configuration, monitoring, annunciation, and control,
while the field devices communicate their status and
alarm conditions to the Controller.
The EQP controller can be arranged in a redundant
configuration, thereby increasing the availability of the
system. The controllers work in “Master” and “Hot
Standby” mode.
Various combinations of field devices can be
configured as part of the system. The actual
selection depends on the requirements of the
application and the regulations that cover the type of
protection required. See Figure 2-1 for a block
diagram of the Eagle Quantum Premier system.
All field devices are tied into a communication loop
that starts and ends at the Controller. Each device
connected to the communication loop is assigned a
unique identity by setting its address switches. All
other device operation parameters are configured
through Det-Tronics “Safety System Software”. These
selections define the type of device and how it is to
operate. This system configuration data is then
downloaded into the Controller.
A programmed Controller is configured to
automatically download the configuration data into the
individual devices when they first communicate with
the Controller.
In addition to Det-Tronics advanced flame and gas
detectors, Eagle Quantum Premier offers the
capability of incorporating third party fire and gas
protection equipment into the system. These can be
either input or output devices. Typical input devices
include manual fire alarm "call boxes", heat detectors,
and analog combustible or toxic gas measurement
instruments. Typical output equipment includes
solenoids, strobes, and horns. All equipment is
monitored for wiring fault conditions.
3.1
For complete system integration, the Controller has
the capability to communicate with other systems
such as PLCs and DCSs. Different communication
protocols are supported, allowing the Controller to
communicate with other systems either directly or
through communication gateways.
NOTE
Existing Eagle Quantum field devices such as
EQ22xxUV, EQ22xxUVIR and EQ22xxUVHT are
supported by the Eagle Quantum Premier
system (not FM Approved).
COMMUNICATIONS LOOP
Eagle Quantum Premier utilizes a Det-Tronics
Signaling Line Circuit (SLC), a version of Echelon’s
Local Operation Network (LON) customized
specifically for Eagle Quantum Premier. This network
provides several key advantages:
• ANSI/NFPA Class A, Style 7 performance of SLC
• Peer-to-peer communications
• Short message formats
• Expandability
The Controller utilizes several mechanisms to
continuously check the LON loop for fault conditions,
thereby providing the highest level of reliable
communication.
Every device on the LON loop has the ability to
communicate with the Controller at any time. This is
typically referred to as distributed peer-to-peer
communications. This design allows for immediate
alarm messages to be sent from the field devices to
the Controller.
All messages are kept short in order to maximize
network performance. This minimizes network
bottlenecks.
The Eagle Quantum Premier system is easily modified
to accommodate design changes or plant
expansions. This can involve adding LON sections,
repositioning LON sections, or removing LON
sections from the loop. There are LON
communication implementation details that affect and
limit how the LON loop is changed.
Only devices that have been approved for use with
Eagle Quantum Premier can be connected up to the
LON. All approved devices have been tested and
certified to operate properly on the LON.
2-1 95-8533
 GAS DETECTION FIRE DETECTION CONFIGURABLE INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

COMBUSTIBLE, TOXIC, CONTACT

POINTWATCH OR CLOSURE CONFIGURABLE
OTHER 4-20 MA INPUT DEVICES DRY CONTACT INPUTS OUTPUT POINTS

DIGITAL INITIATING
X3301 X3302 UVHT/C7050 UV UV/IR IR
COMMUNICATION DEVICE
DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR 8 CHANNEL DCIO MODULE
UNITS CIRCUIT
NOTE: CHANNELS CAN BE
CONFIGURED AS EITHER
ECLIPSE INPUTS OR OUTPUTS.
GAS
DETECTOR
ANALOG
INPUT 8 4-20 MA INPUTS
MODULE

INTELLIGENT 2 SMOKE DETECTOR LOOPS

PROTECTION PRECONFIGURED INPUTS
MODULE PRECONFIGURED OUTPUTS
UNSUPERVISED INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
RELAY 8 UNSUPERVISED
MODULE RELAY OUTPUT POINTS
8 RELAY
8 DRY CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT POINTS
AGENT FIRE
RELEASE SUPPRESSION
MODULES (SOL)
FAULT RELAY
POWER SIGNAL HORNS
NETWORK EQP CONTROLLER
SUPPLY AUDIBLE &
EXTENDER
MONITOR MODULES BEACONS

CONTROLNET OPTIONAL ONBOARD

AC (OPTIONAL SERIAL SERIAL
POWER BATTERY
INTERFACE) INTERFACE INTERFACE
INPUT CHARGER SYSTEM
POWER

– + – +

RS-232 CONFIGURATION
PC
RS-232
RS-232
RS-485
HSSL

SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT (SLC)

HARDWIRED I/O RS-485 MODBUS

INTERFACE E2114
SERIAL INTERFACE

Figure 2-1—Block Diagram of Eagle Quantum Premier System

LON COMMUNICATION HEARTBEAT LON fault isolation. In this situation, the device opens
one side of the LON and listens for a heartbeat on the
The Controller continuously broadcasts a heartbeat
other side. If the device doesn’t receive a heartbeat, it
signal over the LON loop. This heartbeat is used for
listens on the other side of the LON and opens the
verifying the integrity of the LON loop and for keeping
opposite LON connection.
the field devices from going into a fault isolation
mode. Once every second, the heartbeat contains the
current time and date, which are used by the field THEORY OF OPERATION
devices to log status events and calibrations.
During normal operation, the Controller continuously
checks the system for fault conditions and executes
The Controller continuously tests LON continuity by
user defined programmed logic that coordinates the
sending out a heartbeat on one LON port and then
control of the field devices. At the same time, the
listening for it on the other LON port. The Controller
field devices are continuously monitoring for device
also broadcasts the heartbeat signal in the opposite
based fault and alarm conditions.
direction around the loop. This ensures that all field
devices, the LON Network Extenders (NE), and
When a fault condition occurs, the Controller displays
communication wiring are correctly passing the digital
the fault condition on the Vacuum Fluorescent Text
information around the loop.
Display, activates the appropriate fault LED(s),
activates the Trouble signal using the Controller’s
The field devices use the heartbeat as a mechanism
internal enunciator, and de-energizes the Controller’s
to ensure that there is a communication path back to
Trouble relay.
the Controller. If the field device does not receive a
heartbeat for a period of time, the device will go into a

3.1 2-2 95-8533

 Table 2-1—Controller Based Faults Table 2-2—Field Device Based Faults

Controller Faults Trouble LON Fault Trouble

Field Device Faults Trouble Trouble
Shown on Text Display LED LED Relay
Shown on Text Display LED Relay
Device Offline X X
290 Volt Fault X X
Extra LON Device X X
AC Failed X X
Invalid Config X X
Battery Fault X X
Lon Fault X X X
Calibration Fault X X
LON Ground Fault X X
Channel Open X X
Power Fail 1 X X
Channel Short X X
Power Fail 2 X X
Dirty Optics X X
RTC Fault X X
Ground Fault Negative X X
Ground Fault Positive X X
IR Auto Oi Fault X X
Controller based fault conditions include the
Controller status and LON communications such as IR Fault X X
the heartbeat being sent around the loop and the field IR Manual Oi Fault X X
device loss of communications. Controller based Low Aux Power Fault X X
fault conditions are listed in Table 2-1. Missing IR Sensor Fault X X
Missing UV Sensor Fault X X
Field device based fault conditions are transmitted to
Power Supply Fault X X
the Controller, where they are then annunciated.
Refer to Table 2-2 for a listing of field device faults. Sensor Fault X X
Each field device transmits its status to the Controller Supply Voltage Fault X X
on a regular basis. Supply Voltage Fault X X
UV Auto Oi Fault X X
When an alarm condition occurs, the Controller UV Fault X X
displays the alarm condition on the text display,
UV Manual Oi Fault X X
activates the appropriate Alarm LED(s), and activates
the alarm signal using the Controller’s internal
annunciator.

Each field device must communicate alarm and fault

conditions to the Controller. The timing for
transmitting alarms and faults to the Controller is
displayed in Table 2-3.
Table 2-3—Eagle Quantum Premier Status Update Rates

Number of Devices Output Devices Old Input Devices Newer Input Devices

ARM IDC DCU*

SAM UV Detector DCIO*
UVIR Detector X3301*
X3302*
Eclipse*
X5200*
X2200*
X9800*
AIM
IPM*
PSM
1 to 100 1 Second 1 Second 1 Second
101 to 200 2 Seconds 2 Seconds 2 Seconds
201 to 246 5 Seconds 2 Seconds 3 Seconds

*Alarms are transmitted immediately. For Eclipse, the Status Update Rate is 1 second for all network sizes.

3.1 2-3 95-8533

 NOTE
All fault and alarm conditions are latched on the
Controller. To reset the Controller, conditions
indicated on the text display must currently be in
the OFF state. Pushing the reset button then
initiates a Controller reset. Active alarms will
remain through a Controller reset.
CONTROLLER USER LOGIC
The Controller continuously executes the user logic
programs that are programmed using S3 software.
The user logic programs are set up in the same
fashion as IEC 61131-3 programmable logic
programmed into Programmable Logic Controllers
(PLCs). Block diagram logic gates are tied together
with inputs, outputs, and other logic gates to perform
a specific task. A number of tasks can be tied
together to perform a system function.
Typical programmed functions include flame/gas
voting, timing delays, timing executions, latching
conditions, alarm and trouble notification,
suppression control, condition control, and process
shutdown notification.
The Controller executes program logic by starting
with the first logic page of the first program and then
progressing onto subsequent pages of the same
program. In turn, subsequent programs are then
executed.
Every one hundred milliseconds, the Controller will
start executing the user logic that is programmed into
the Controller. Within this logic execution cycle, the
Controller will execute as many of the logic pages as
possible. If all programmed logic is executed in a
cycle, the Controller will start executing program logic
with the next cycle. Otherwise, subsequence logic
execution cycles are used to finish executing the
remaining logic gates. Only when all the logic gates
have been executed will the Controller start over. The
Controller will start executing the first logic page of
the first program at the beginning of the next logic
Every field device except the network extender has
two LON fault isolation relays. Each relay is tied to a
communication port on the device. When a field
device fails to receive the heartbeat from the
Controller, the device initiates a LON fault isolation
routine. The isolation routine disconnects one of the
communication ports via one of the LON fault isolation
relays. The device listens for a heartbeat on the
communication port that is connected. If a heartbeat
is not found, the routine then disconnects the other
communication port and listens for a heartbeat on the
connected side. The process is repeated until either
a heartbeat is located or a LON fault timeout period of
two hours is reached. The LON fault isolation routine
is disabled and the LON fault isolation relays are
closed when the LON fault timeout period has
elapsed. The LON fault isolation routine will be
enabled when the device again receives a heartbeat.
For a single wiring fault, the field devices with the fault
will isolate the fault by opening LON fault isolation
relays. After the field devices isolate the wiring fault,
communications will be resumed between the
Controller and field devices. Refer to Figure 2-3.
MULTIPLE WIRING FAULTS
In the event of multiple wiring faults on the LON, the
devices between the faults will continue to function,
but the faults will prevent them from communicating
with the Controller. See Figure 2-4. In this example,
nodes 1 to 4 communicate using one Controller port
(path A) and nodes 7 and 8 use the other Controller
port (path B). Nodes 5 and 6 are unable to report to
the Controller because they are isolated by the two
wiring faults. If a device is prevented from
communicating with the Controller, the text display on
the Controller will show the message “Device Offline”.
NODE 4 NODE 5
NODE 3 NODE 6
NODE 2 NODE 7
EQP
CONTROLLER
DET-TRONICS
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
®

cycle. NODE 1
Safety System Controller

Cancel
Time & Date

16:38:55
JAN 11/2002

Enter Next Previous

Fire Alarm

High Gas

Low Gas

Reset
Trouble

Cntrl Flt

Lon Fault
Inhibit

Output Inhibit

Acknowledge Silence
Ack
Power

Supervisory

Silence
NODE 8
C1851

COMMUNICATION NETWORK FAULT OPERATION Figure 2-2—Normal Communication over the LON

During normal operation, the Controller is WIRING FAULT

NODE 4 NODE 5
continuously broadcasting a heartbeat around the
NODE 3 NODE 6
communication loop as shown in Figure 2-2. The
Controller broadcasts the heartbeat in both directions.
At the same time, the field devices are transmitting NODE 2 PATH A PATH B NODE 7

status information to the Controller over the EQP

CONTROLLER
communication loop. DET-TRONICS
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
Safety System Controller
®

NODE 1 NODE 8
Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

Time & Date

High Gas Cntrl Flt Output Inhibit Supervisory

16:38:55
Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence
JAN 11/2002

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

C1852

Figure 2-3—Communication over the LON with a Single Wiring

Fault
3.1 2-4 95-8533
 WIRING FAULTS
NODE 4 NODE 5

NODE 3 NODE 6

NODE 2 PATH A PATH B NODE 7

EQP
CONTROLLER
DET-TRONICS
®

EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER

Safety System Controller
Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

NODE 1 Cancel
Time & Date

16:38:55
JAN 11/2002

Enter Next
High Gas

Previous
Low Gas

Reset
Cntrl Flt

Lon Fault
Output Inhibit

Ack

Acknowledge Silence
Supervisory

Silence NODE 8
C1853

Figure 2-4—Communication over LON with Multiple Wiring Faults

Figure 2-5—System Controller

IMPORTANT!
Since it is impossible to predict where a network
fault might occur or exactly what effect it will Controller Redundancy
have on actual system operation, it is important
to diagnose and repair any fault as soon as The EQP controllers can be configured as a
possible after it is detected to ensure continuous, redundant pair. See Figure 2-6. The redundancy
uninterrupted system operation. scheme is a hot standby system that offers the
following primary features:

MAJOR COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS • Automatic configuration of the standby controller

• Bumpless transfer
The system has three (3) main component groups —
the System Controller, LON (Local Operating • Forced and automatic switchover
Network), and Intelligent Field Devices. • No downtime on controller replacement
• Automatic synchronization between controllers
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
• Increased system availability
The Controller (see Figure 2-5) performs all
communication, command, and control functions for
the system. The Controller supports both “Static” and During normal operation one controller acts as the
“Programmable” logic. Other features include: “Master” while the other acts as the “Hot Standby”.

• Redundant controller capability

LON
• User pushbutton controls (reset, acknowledge, etc.)
• “Real time” system clock RS-232
SERIAL LINK
MODBUS
RS-485
DCS/PLC/HMI
• Internal alarm sounder
• Vacuum fluorescent text based display that shows S3
CONTROLLER A
LON ADDRESS 1
current system status CONFIGURATION
SOFTWARE
• 8 programmable unsupervised inputs HIGH SPEED
RS-232
SERIAL LINK
• 8 programmable unsupervised relay outputs
ONE PROJECT FILE
CONTROLLER B
• RS-485 Modbus RTU communication interface that LOADED TO
LON ADDRESS 2
CONTROLLER A
supports coils, discrete inputs, and holding A2275

registers
• Optional ControlNet communication board that Figure 2-6— Block Diagram of EQP System
with Redundant Controllers
supports redundant communication channels.
• Optional Serial Interface Board

3.1 2-5 95-8533

Terminology used for redundancy:
Master controller This is the normal mode for
non-redundant and master
controllers. User logic is
executed, outputs are being
controlled and all serial ports
are active.
Standby controller This controller is receiving all
inputs but does not have any
control over the outputs and
user logic is not executed. The
standby controller receives
update information from the
master controller to ensure a
bumpless transfer should a
controller switchover occur.
Primary controller The controller assigned
address 1.
Secondary Controller The controller assigned
address 2.
LOCAL OPERATING NETWORK (LON)
The LON is a fault tolerant, two wire, digital
communication network. The circuit is arranged in a
loop starting and ending at the Controller. The circuit
supports up to 246 intelligent field devices spread
over a distance of up to 10,000 meters (32,500 feet).
NOTE
All LON devices support ANSI/NFPA 72 Class A,
Style 7 communication with the Controller.
Network Extenders
Transmitted signals can travel a maximum distance of
2,000 meters through LON communication wire. At
the end of this distance, a network extender (see
Figure 2-7) must be installed to rebroadcast the
communications into the next wire segment. For
every network extender added, the length of the
communications loop extends up to 2,000 meters.
Due to propagation delays around the loop, the
maximum loop length is limited to 10,000 meters.

Bumpless transfer During a controller switchover

no change in output will occur
due to the switchover.

Serial Interface Board

An optional serial board is available that supports up
to four additional serial ports. See Table 2-4. For a
redundant controller configuration, the board is
required in both controllers.

Table 2-4—Ports on Optional Serial Interface Board

Port Name Comm Function

Serial Port 2 RS485 ModBus (Master/Slave)

Ground Fault Monitored, Figure 2-7—Eagle Quantum Premier Network Extender
Isolated

Serial Port 3 RS232 ModBus (Master/Slave)

S3 Configuration

Serial Port 4 RS232 ModBus (Master/Slave)

HSSL Redundancy RS232 Redundant Controller to

Port Controller Only

3.1 2-6 95-8533

 NOTES EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor
Communication wire segment lengths are
The EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor (see Figure
dependant upon physical and electrical
2-8) provides ground fault monitoring in a system that
characteristics of the cable. Refer to the
includes a floating 24 Vdc power source. The device
installation section for LON cable wire
detects ground fault conditions on +/– power and all
information.
secondary I/O circuits. A positive or negative ground
fault condition is indicated immediately by local
No more than six network extenders may be
LEDs, and by a relay contact after a 10 second time
used on the communication loop.
delay. The ground fault monitor is intended to be
mounted in the same enclosure as the controller.
Only 40 field devices can be installed in a
network segment when a network extender is
installed in the communication loop. The
network segment is the wiring segment between
two network extenders or between a network
extender and a controller.

EQ21xxPS Series Power Supplies and

EQ2100PSM Power Supply Monitor
The Power Supply, Power Supply Monitor, and
backup batteries are used to provide power to the
system. The power supply monitor communicates
Figure 2-8—Ground Fault Monitor
trouble conditions to the Controller. Monitored status
conditions include: power supply failure, loss of AC
power, loss of battery power, power ground fault, AC
and DC voltage (hi/low level), and backup battery
current charge levels. FIELD DEVICES

Flame Detectors
EQ2110PS, EQ2130PS and EQ2175PS Power For flame detector installation, operation,
Supplies maintenance, specifications and ordering information,
refer to Table 2-5.
The Power Supply provides main and backup power
to the EQP System. The device includes many
features such as voltage regulation, high efficiency,
Table 2-5—Flame Detector Manuals
and high power factor.
Detector Manual Number
An equalize switch is located on the front panel of the
X3301 95-8527
charger for manual activation, or a multi-mode
electronic timer can be used for automatic activation. X3302 95-8576
Steady state output voltage remains within +/– 1/2% X5200 95-8546
of the setting from no load to full load for AC input X2200 95-8549
voltages within +/– 10% of the nominal input voltage. X9800 95-8554
The power supplies are internally filtered to be no
UVHT 95-8570
greater than 32dBrn (“C” message weighting) and 30
millivolts RMS for all conditions on input voltage and
output load, with or without batteries connected.

3.1 2-7 95-8533

EQ3700 8 Channel DCIO Module
The 8 Channel Direct Current Input/Output (DCIO)
Module (see Figure 2-9) consists of eight individually
configured channels. Each channel is configured as
either an input or output with the appropriate wiring
supervision. Wiring supervision includes none, open
circuits, and "open and short" circuits. In addition to
defining the type of supervision, an input channel is
also configured to generate the appropriate static
logic alarm message to the controller.
NOTE
NFPA 72 requires wire supervision selection for
fire detection and notification devices (IDC, NAC,
supervisory and releasing devices).
Heat, smoke, or unitized flame detectors can be wired
into channels defined as inputs. Horns,
strobes/beacons, and solenoids can be wired into
channels defined as outputs.
NOTE
The DCIO outputs only support equipment that
operates on 24 vdc (not to exceed 2 amperes
per channel).
EQ3720 8 Channel Relay Module
The 8 Channel Relay Module (see Figure 2-10)
consists of eight individually configured output
channels.
NOTE
The relay module only supports equipment that
operates on 24 vdc (not to exceed 2 amperes) at
each output channel.
The relay module has two LEDs for the device and
two LEDs for each channel. On the device level, one
green LED indicates power, while the other amber
LED indicates a LON communication fault. For each
channel, one red LED indicates channel activation
and the other amber LED indicates that the module
operating voltage is low or that the module has not
been configured (all eight channel LEDs blink).
Refer to the Relay Module Specification Data sheet
(form number 90-1181) for additional information.

The DCIO has two device status LEDs, as well as two

LEDs for each channel. On the device level, one
green LED indicates power, while the other amber
LED indicates a LON communication fault. For each
channel, one red LED indicates channel activation
and the other amber LED indicates a fault condition
when wiring supervision is defined for the channel.

Refer to the DCIO Specification Data sheet (form Figure 2-10—Eight Channel Relay Module
number 90-1149) for additional information.

Figure 2-9—DCIO Module

3.1 2-8 95-8533

EQ3710AIM Analog Input Module channels (zones) provide connections for “two-wire”
conventional (non-relay based) smoke and heat
The 8 Channel Analog Input Module (see Figure 2-11)
detectors.
provides a means of connecting devices with a
calibrated 4-20 mA output signal to the Eagle
On the output side, three supervised outputs provide
Quantum Premier System.
connections for a notification appliance such as a
bell, horn or lamp and two releasing circuits for a
The Analog Input Module (AIM) provides 8
main and reserve or secondary agent release.
configurable channels that can be set for either
combustible gas mode or universal mode. The
Each channel on the module is provided with
combustible gas mode provides a number of
individual indicators for active and fault conditions.
automatically programmed settings, and alarm
thresholds that are limited to approval body
Refer to the Intelligent Protection Module
requirements. The universal mode is used for generic
Specification Data sheet (form number 90-1184) for
devices where control over all configuration
additional information.
parameters is required. All devices must provided
their own calibration facilities.

Refer to the Analog Input Module Specification Data

sheet (form number 90-1183) for additional
information.

Figure 2-12—Intelligent Protection Module

EQ25xxARM Agent Release Module

Figure 2-11—Eight Channel Analog Input Module
EQ3740IPM Intelligent Protection Module
The IPM (see Figure 2-12) is designed to provide
continuous and automated local area fire protection,
while monitoring system operation through continuous
supervision of its Inputs/Outputs and Local Operating
Network/Signalling Line Circuit (LON/SLC) connection to
the EQP controller.
In addition the module contains a unique “embedded
logic program” that if enabled during configuration
allows the IPM to perform local area protection in a
“back-up mode” without controller interaction.
The IPM utilizes eight pre-configured Input/Output (I/O)
channels to perform its monitoring, supervison and
mitigation functions.
The EQ25xxARM Series Agent Release Module
(ARM) (see Figure 2-13) provides agent release or
deluge pre-action capability. The device is controlled
by programmable logic in the Controller. Time delay,
abort and manual release sequences allow the device
output to be programmed for use in unique
applications.
The device is field programmed to operate in one of
the following modes:
Squib– Output is activated for a factory-set
time period to set off the explosive
device.
Timed– Output is activated for a field
selectable duration from 1 to 65,000
seconds.
Continuous– Output latches until reset.
Non-latching– Output follows the input.

On the input side, three supervised channels provide

connections for an Abort station, a Manual Release
station and a Supervisory device. Two additional input

3.1 2-9 95-8533

The device can monitor and control two output
devices (24 vdc rated) that are programmed and
energized together. The release circuits are
compatible with a variety of solenoid or initiator
(squib) based suppression systems.

The release circuit is supervised for open circuit

conditions. If a trouble condition occurs (open circuit
or solenoid supply voltage less than 19 volts), it will
be indicated at the Controller. Each output is rated at
2 amperes and auxiliary input terminals are provided
for additional 24 vdc output power where needed.

NOTE
For deluge and pre-action applications, the input Figure 2-13—Agent Release Module
voltage to the ARM or DCIO must be 21 VDC
minimum with connection to any solenoid listed
in Table 2-6 or 2-7. Wiring must be in Refer to the EQ25xxARM Specification Data sheet
accordance with the listed maximum wiring (form number 90-1128) for additional information
lengths.

Table 2-6—Solenoid Compatibility with Agent Release Module

for Deluge and Pre-Action Applications

FM Group Device
B ASCO T8210A107
D ASCO 8210G207
E Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2
F Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2
G Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2
H Viking HV-274-0601

Table 2-7—Maximum Wiring Length for FM Approved Solenoids for Deluge and Pre-Action Applications

Solenoids Maximum Wire Length in Feet (Meters)

FM Solenoid Group Manufacturer Model 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG

B ASCO T8210A107 183 (56) 115 (35) 72 (22) 46 (14)

D ASCO 8210G207 314 (96) 198 (60) 124 (38) 78 (24)
E Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
F Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2 130 (40) 82 (25) 51 (16) 32 (10)
G Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
H Viking HV-274-0601 180 (55) 110 (34) 70 (21) 45(14)

3.1 2-10 95-8533

EQ25xxSAM Signal Audible Module
The EQ25xxSAM Series Signal Audible Module (SAM)
(see Figure 2-14) provides two indicating circuits for
controlling UL Listed 24 vdc polarized audible/visual
indicating appliances.
The device is located on the LON and is controlled by
programmable logic in the Controller.
Each output circuit is independently programmable to
allow notification of separate events. Each output can
be individually activated for any one of the following
pre-defined outputs:
1. Continuous
2. 60 beats per minute
3. 120 beats per minute
4. Temporal pattern.
Device outputs operate in the reverse polarity manner
when activated. Each output is rated at 2 amperes.
Auxiliary power input terminals are provided for
additional 24 vdc signaling power where required.
The output circuits are supervised for open and short
circuit conditions. If a wiring fault occurs, a trouble
condition will be indicated at the Controller.
Refer to the EQ25xxSAM Specification Data sheet
(form number 90-1129) for additional information
Figure 2-14—Signal Audible Module
3.1
EQ22xxIDC Series Initiating Device Circuit (IDC)
There are three IDC models available (see Figure 2-15):
The EQ22xxIDC allows discrete inputs from
smoke/heat detectors, manual call stations or other
contact devices.
The IDC accepts two dry contact inputs for use with
devices such as relays, pushbuttons, key switches,
etc. The IDC supports ANSI/NFPA 72 Class B, Style
B supervised input circuits
Each circuit requires its own end of line (EOL) resistor
for monitoring circuit continuity. Nominal resistance
of the resistor is 10 k ohms.
The EQ22xxIDCGF Initiating Device Circuit Ground
Fault Monitor (IDCGF) responds to the presence of a
ground fault within the power circuitry of the system.
It provides an unsupervised dry contact input and
ground fault monitoring circuitry for indicating a
power supply trouble condition. It is intended for use
with a third party power supply.
The EQ22xxIDCSC Initiating Device Circuit Short
Circuit (IDCSC) is similar to the IDC, but supports
ANSI/NFPA 72 Class B Style C supervised input
circuits. (Not FM Approved.)
Refer to the EQ22xxIDC Specification Data sheet
(form number 90-1121) for additional information.
Figure 2-15—Initiating Device Circuit
NOTE
Input types (e.g. fire alarm, trouble, and gas
alarms) are configurable through Det-Tronics
Safety System Software (S3).
2-11 95-8533
EQ22xxDCU and EQ22xxDCUEX NOTE
Digital Communication Units A catalytic sensor can be connected to a DCU
through a transmitter, which converts the millivolt
The EQ22xxDCU Digital Communication Unit (DCU) is
signal to a 4 to 20 milliampere signal.
an analog signal input device that accepts a 4 to 20
milliampere signal. The device is typically connected
The EQ22xxDCUEX is a specialized version of the
to gas detectors, where the analog signal represents
DCU that contains a transmitter for connection to a
the gas concentration.
Det-Tronics Model CGS catalytic combustible gas
sensor.
Calibration of the DCU involves a non-intrusive
procedure that can be performed by one person at
Refer to the EQ22xxDCU Specification Data sheet
the device without declassifying the area.
(form number 90-1118) for additional information
The device supports two alarm setpoints that are
defined as part of the device’s configuration setup. PIRECL PointWatch Eclipse
When detecting combustible gases, the alarm
For PIRECL installation, operation, maintenance,
setpoints represent low and high gas alarm levels.
specifications and ordering information, refer to form
When detecting oxygen, the alarms represent the
number 95-8526.
range for the acceptable oxygen level. If oxygen
drops below the alarm range, a low alarm is
generated by the device.

PIR9400 Pointwatch IR gas detector as well as

electrochemical sensors (hydrogen sulfide, carbon
monoxide, chlorine, sulfur dioxide, and nitrogen
dioxide) are two examples of devices that can be
connected to the DCU.

3.1 2-12 95-8533

 Section 3
Installation
SAFETY SYSTEM DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS
Many factors need to be considered when
determining proper EQP System design. The
following paragraphs will discuss these factors and
other issues useful in designing, installing and
configuring the Eagle Quantum Premier System.
IDENTIFYING THE AREA OF PROTECTION
In order for the system to provide optimum coverage
and protection, it is critical to properly define the
required “Area of Protection” (total area being
monitored by the system). The area of protection
should include all hazard sources requiring
monitoring, as well as suitable locations for mounting
detection, extinguishing, notification, and manual
devices. In order to accurately define the area of
protection and provide maximum protection, all
potential “Real” and “False” hazard sources must be
identified. The number and location of Real Hazards
determines the extent of the area of protection, and
impacts all subsequent design decisions.
WARNING!
When drilling through surfaces in the process of
mounting equipment, verify that the location is free
of electrical wiring and electrical components.
IDENTIFYING WIRING, NETWORK (LON), AND
SYSTEM POWER REQUIREMENTS
General Wiring Requirements
WARNING!
DO NOT open any junction box or device
enclosure when power is applied without first de-
classifying the hazardous area.
3.1
CAUTION!
Any deviation from the manufacturer’s
recommended wiring practices can compromise
system operation and effectiveness. ALWAYS
consult the factory if different wire types or
methods are being considered.
NOTE
All wiring must be marked per NFPA 70 Article
760.
NOTE
Specific installation requirements may differ
depending on local installation practices and
compliance with third party certifications. For
local installation practices, consult the local
authority having jurisdiction. For compliance with
third party certifications, consult the appropriate
appendix in this manual for additional installation
requirements.
Power Wiring
IMPORTANT!
For deluge and pre-action applications, input
voltage to the DCIO or ARM must be 21 vdc
minimum to ensure proper operation of the
connected output device.
IMPORTANT
To ensure proper operation of field devices, the
voltage input to the device (measured at the
device) must be within the range indicated for
that device in the “Specifications” section of this
manual (18 Vdc minimum).
3-1 95-8533
The Eagle Quantum Premier system utilizes a power
supply that provides an isolated 24 vdc battery
backed-up power to the fire protection devices as
described in NFPA 72. More than one power supply
may be used in a system to provide power to different
sets of equipment as part of the system.
In order to calculate the power supply voltage for the
end device, calculate the voltage drops that occur
due to each wire segment between the devices. This
involves determining the total current draw and the
two conductor wire resistance per each wire
segment.

The power supply wiring may consist of one or more Example:

daisy-chained wire segments providing power to the
devices. For each of the daisy-chained wire
segments, the installer must calculate the voltage
drops that occur across the devices in order to
determine the gauge of the wire that will be installed.
A power supply wiring diagram should contain
information describing wire distances and current
draws associated with all devices connected to the
wire segment. A typical power supply wiring
recommendation is that the voltage drop from the
power source to the end device should not exceed
ten percent. Using 24 vdc as a reference, the
maximum voltage drop should not exceed 2.4 vdc. A
wire gauge must be selected to ensure that the end
device has at least 21.6 vdc or higher.
Can 18 AWG wire be used to power three devices
from the 24 vdc power supply? Refer to the figure
below for wiring and device current draw information
along with voltage drop calculations.
Answer: If the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
requires a voltage loss of 10% or less, only 16 AWG
wire could be used, since the end device would
require 21.4 vdc. If there is no local requirement,
then 18 AWG wire could be used to provide power to
the devices.

24 vdc Power 18 AWG Single Wire Resistance: R = 0.6385 Ohms per 100 ft
Supply 2 Conductor Resistance: CR = 2 • R

Total Current
695 mA Device 1
50 ft Device 1 Voltage = Supply Voltage – (Voltage Drop)
0.6385 Ohms = 24 – (I • CR)
65 mA
Current Draw = 24 – (0.695 • 0.6385)
= 23.55 vdc

Total Current
630 mA
150 ft =
1.9155 Ohms Device 2
+
Device 3 Device 2
Device 2 Voltage = Device 1 Voltage – (Voltage Drop)
65 mA = 23.55 – (I • CR)
Current Draw = 23.55 – (0.630 • 1.9155)
= 22.35 vdc

Total Current
565 mA
150 ft =
1.9155 Ohms Device 3

Device 3
Device 3 Voltage = Device 2 Voltage – (Voltage Drop)
565 mA = 22.35 – (I • CR)
Current Draw = 22.35 – (0.565 • 1.9155)
= 21.27 vdc

3.1 3-2 95-8533

Determining Power Requirements
Tables 3-1 and 3-2 are provided for calculating the
total current requirements for those parts of the
system requiring battery backup.

Table 3–1—Standby Current Requirements at 24 vdc

Device Type
EQP Controller
DCIO Module
Power Supply. Monitor
IDC/IDCGF/IDCSC
X3301 - without heater
X3301 - with heater
X3302 - without heater
X3302 - with heater
X2200
X9800 - without heater
X9800 - with heater
X5200 - without heater
X5200 - with heater
DCUEX
DCU with EC Sensor
DCU with PointWatch
Relay Module
Analog Input Module
Intelligent Protection Module
EQ2220GFM
PointWatch Eclipse
ARM
SAM
Network Extender
EQ21xxPS Power Supply
Other
Number of Devices Standby Current Total Current for Device Type
X 0.360 =
X 0.075 =
X 0.060 =
X 0.055 =
X 0.160 =
X 0.565 =
X 0.160 =
X 0.565 =
X 0.135 =
X 0.085 =
X 0.420 =
X 0.155 =
X 0.490 =
X 0.145 =
X 0.060 =
X 0.300 =
X 0.120 =
X 0.160 =
X 0.075 =
X 0.018 =
X 0.270 =
X 0.075 =
X 0.060 =
X 0.090 =
X 0.350 =
X =
Total Standby Current for System (in amperes) =

Note: Standby current is the average current draw for the device in normal mode.
This table is for battery calculations only.

3.1 3-3 95-8533

 Table 3-2—Alarm Current Requirements at 24 vdc

Device Type
EQP Controller
DCIO 8 Inputs
DCIO 8 Outputs
Relay Module
Power Supply Monitor
IDC/IDCGF/IDCSC
X3301 - without heater
X3301 - with heater
X3302 - without heater
X3302 - with heater
X2200
X9800 - without heater
X9800 - with heater
X5200 - without heater
X5200 - with heater
DCUEX
DCU with EC Sensor
Number of Devices Alarm Current Total Current for Device Type
X 0.430 =
X 0.130 =
X 0.075 =
X 0.120 =
X 0.060 =
X 0.090 =
X 0.160 =
X 0.565 =
X 0.160 =
X 0.565 =
X 0.135 =
X 0.085 =
X 0.420 =
X 0.155 =
X 0.490 =
X 0.160 =
X 0.075 =

DCU with PointWatch X 0.320 =

Analog Input Module X 0.300 =
Intelligent Protection Module X 0.150 =
EQ2220GFM X 0.018 =
PointWatch Eclipse X 0.275 =
ARM X 0.120 =
SAM X 0.120 =
Network Extender X 0.090 =
EQ21xxPS Power Supply X 0.350 =
Other X =
Total Solenoid Load +
Total Signaling Load +
Total Alarm Current for System (in amperes) =

Note: This table is for battery calculations only.

3.1 3-4 95-8533

EQ2110PS, EQ2130PS and EQ2175PS Power Battery Charger
Supplies
Use the following formula to calculate the minimum
Refer to Table 3-3 for Power Supply ratings. battery charger size:

Minimum = Alarm Current + Total Amp Hours

Backup Battery
Charge Rate 48
Refer to Table 3-4 or 3-5 to calculate the minimum
size of the backup battery (in amp hours). Select a
sealed lead-acid battery with an adequate amp hour
rating. CAUTION!
Care should be taken when considering the final
NOTE
voltage at the device during AC power loss. With
Connect two batteries in series for 24 volts. Be
loss of AC power, the device voltage will drop
sure that the battery enclosure is adequately
over time as the batteries lose their charge. If
ventilated.
extended periods of AC power loss are to be
expected, either consider a heavier wire gauge
or specify batteries with higher amp-hour ratings.

Table 3-3—EQ21xxPS Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply
Characteristic
EQ2110PS EQ2130PS EQ2175PS

Input Voltage 120 vac 120/208/240 vac 120/208/240 vac

Input Current 4 Amps 11/6/6 Amps 24/15/12 Amps

Input Frequency 60 Hz 60 or 50 Hz 60 or 50 Hz

Supply Rating 10 Amps 30 Amps 75 Amps

Maximum Alarm Current 10 Amps 30 Amps 75 Amps

Maximum Standby Current 3.33 Amps 10 Amps 25 Amps

Recharge Current 6.67 Amps 20 Amps 50 Amps

Maximum Battery Capacity 100 AmpHours 300 AmpHours 750 AmpHours

Maximum Deluge Standby Current* 1 Amp 3 Amps 7.5 Amps

*Only applies to 90 hour back-up applications.

3.1 3-5 95-8533

 Table 3-4—Backup Battery Requirements for Automatic Release of Extinguishing Systems Except Deluge

Standby Current Standby Time* Standby Amp Hours

X =
24 Hours

Alarm Current 5 Minute Alarm Time* Alarm Amp Hours

X =
0.083 Hours

Sum of Standby and Alarm Amp Hours =

Multiply by 1.1 (10% Safety Factor) X
T0014A

Total Battery Amp Hour Requirement

* FM MINIMUM REQUIREMENT FOR EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS

IS 24 HOURS STANDBY TIME AND 5 MINUTES ALARM TIME.

Table 3-5—Backup Battery Requirements for Deluge and Pre-Action Applications

Standby Current Standby Time* Standby Amp Hours

X =
90 Hours

Alarm Current 10 Minute Alarm Time* Alarm Amp Hours

X =
0.166 Hours

Sum of Standby and Alarm Amp Hours =

Multiply by 1.1 (10% Safety Factor) X
T0040A

Total Battery Amp Hour Requirement

* FM MINIMUM REQUIREMENT FOR DELUGE SYSTEMS IS

90 HOURS STANDBY TIME AND 10 MINUTES ALARM TIME.

Shield Grounding the communication loop, the amount of time required

Two shield ground terminals are provided inside the
junction box of each device, and also at the System
Controller. Connect shield ends to the terminals
provided (not to each other) inside the junction box.
CAUTION!
Insulate the shields to prevent shorting to the
device housing or to any other conductor.
for a status change message from a detection device
to reach the System Controller also increases.
The System Controller requires a specific length of
time to process each bit of information that is
transferred along the communication loop. As the
number of nodes increases, so does the amount of
data being processed as well as the time required for
processing by the Controller.

If the fastest possible communication response time

Junction Box Grounding
is an important criteria for a large system, it is
All junction boxes must be electrically connected to recommended that the number of nodes on an
earth ground. individual loop be kept as small as possible. Consider
using multiple controllers with fewer nodes per loop.
Response Time vs. System Size
When designing a system, it is important to realize
that by increasing the number of nodes (devices) on

3.1 3-6 95-8533

Moisture Damage Protection GROUND FAULT MONITOR (GFM)
Moisture can adversely affect the performance of INSTALLATION
electronic devices. It is important to take proper
precautions during system installation to ensure that Mounting
moisture will not come in contact with electrical
The GFM is a DIN rail mountable device designed to
connections or components.
be mounted in the same enclosure as the EQP
controller.
In applications where the network wiring is installed in
conduit, the use of watertight conduit seals, drains,
breathers, or equivalent is recommended to prevent Wiring
damage caused by condensation within the conduit.
1. Connect power wiring from the EQP controller
power terminals 1 and 2 to the GFM terminals 1
Electrostatic Discharge and 2.
An electrostatic charge can build up on the skin and
2. Connect power wiring from the GFM terminals 3
discharge when an object is touched. ALWAYS use
and 4 to the EQP controller power terminals 3 and
caution when handling devices, taking care not to
4.
touch the terminals or electronic components.
3. Connect earth ground to terminal 5 or 10.
CAUTION!
ALWAYS discharge static charges from hands 4. Connect the relay contacts as required.
before handling electronic devices or touching
device terminals. Many devices contain Refer to Figure 3-1 for terminal block identification.
semiconductors that are susceptible to damage
by electrostatic discharge.
24 VDC
INPUT VOLTAGE
NOTE
For more information on proper handling, refer to EARTH
+ – + – GROUND
Det-Tronics Service Memo form 75-1005.
1 2 3 4 5
+ – + –

RELAY

SPARE

6 7 8 9 10

COMMON NO NC N/C EARTH

GROUND

NOTE: RELAY CONTACTS ARE SHOWN IN THE REST STATE,

NO POWER APPLIED. RELAY IS ENERGIZED WITH
POWER APPLIED AND NO GROUND FAULT
(TERMINALS 6 & 7 CLOSE, TERMINALS 6 & 8 OPEN).

Figure 3-1—Terminal Configuration for Ground Fault Monitor

3.1 3-7 95-8533

NETWORK AND NETWORK EXTENDER Table 3-7—LON Maximum Cable Lengths
INSTALLATION
LON Cable Maximum Length**
(Manufacturer and Part No.)* Feet Meters
Mounting
Belden 8719 6,500 2,000
The device should be securely mounted to a vibration
FSI 0050-000006-00-NPLFP 6,500 2,000
free surface. (See the “Specifications” section in this
Technor BFOU 4,900 1,500
manual for device dimensions.)
Level IV, 22 AWG 4,500 1,370

Wiring Note: *Use the same type of cable in each wiring segment between
network extenders.
All devices on the LON are wired in a loop that starts
**Maximum wire lengths represent the linear wire distance of
and ends at the System Controller. To ensure proper LON communications wiring between network extenders.
operation, the LON should be wired using high speed
Be sure that selected cable meets all job specifications.
communication grade cable. If necessary, consult factory for further suggested cable
types.
NOTE
Cable meeting the specifications listed in Table
3-6 is suitable for distances up to 2000 meters.

Any of the cable types listed in Table 3-7 can be used

for wiring the LON for the distances indicated.

NOTE
If no network extenders are used, the distances
listed are for the entire loop. If network
extenders are used, the distances listed are for
the wiring length between network extenders or
between a network extender and the System
Controller.

Table 3-6—Specifications for LON Wiring Cable

Minimum Typical Maximum Units Condition

DC Resistance, each conductor 14 14.7 15.5 ohm/km 20 C per ASTM D 4566

DC Resistance Unbalanced 5% 20 C per ASTM D 4566
Mutual Capacitance 55.9 nF/km per ASTM D 4566
Characteristic Impedance 92 100 108 ohm 64 kHz to 1 MHz, per ASTM D 4566
Attenuation 20 kHz 1.3 dB/km 20 C per ASTM D 4566
64 kHz 1.9
78 kHz 2.2
156 kHz 3
256 kHz 4.8
512 kHz 8.1
772 kHz 11.3
1000 kHz 13.7
Propagation Delay 5.6 nsec/m 78 kHz
T0049B
Length: 6,500 feet/2000 meters maximum (basic loop or between Network Extenders).
Type: Single twisted pair.
Wire Gauge: 16 AWG, stranded (19 x 29), tinned copper with overall shield.
Cables meeting these specifications are good for up to 2000 meters.

3.1 3-8 95-8533

 Table 3-8—Maximum Wiring Length from Nominal 24 vdc
Power Source to Network Extender (Maximum wire lengths are
IMPORTANT! based upon the cable’s physical and electrical characteristics.)
Det-Tronics recommends the use of shielded
cable (required by CENELEC) to prevent Maximum Wiring Distance
Wire Size
external electromagnetic interference from Feet Meters
affecting field devices. 18 AWG (1.0 mm2)* 2200 650
16 AWG (1.5 mm2)* 3500 750
IMPORTANT! 14 AWG (2.5 mm2)* 5600 1700
For best fault isolation performance, the
* Approximate Metric Equivalent.
maximum LON wiring length should not exceed
1600 feet (500 meters).

IMPORTANT!
Be sure that the selected cable meets the
specifications. The use of other cable types can
degrade system operation. If necessary, consult
factory for further suggested cable types.
1. Remove the cover from the Network Extender
enclosure.
2. Connect 24 vdc power lead wires and
communication network cable to the terminal
block. (See Figure 3-2 for terminal location and
Figure 3-3 for terminal identification).
3. Connect shields to the designated "shield"
terminals. The two shield terminals are connected
internally to ensure shield continuity.
CAUTION!
Do not ground either shield at the network
extender enclosure. Insulate the shields to
prevent shorting to the device housing or to any
other conductor.
4. Check ALL wiring to ensure that proper
connections have been made.

See Table 3-8 to determine maximum wiring 5. Inspect the junction box O-ring to be sure that it is
length. in good condition.

COM 1 - Communication network connections:
Connect to COM 2 terminals of the next
device on the loop, A to A and B to B.
COM 2 - Communication network connections:
Connect to COM 1 terminals of the
previous device on the loop, A to A and
B to B.
6. Lubricate the O-ring and the threads of the
junction box cover with a thin coat of grease to
ease installation and ensure a watertight
enclosure.
NOTE
The recommended lubricant is a silicone free
grease, available from Det-Tronics.

24 VDC - Connect the "+" terminal to the positive 7. Place the cover on the enclosure. Tighten only
side of the 24 vdc power source. (Both until snug. Do not over tighten.
"+" terminals are connected internally.)
TERMINAL NO. 1

Connect the "–" terminal to the negative

side of the 24 vdc power source. (Both
"–" terminals are connected internally.)
1 12

A2021

Figure 3-2—Network Extender Wiring Terminal Location

3.1 3-9 95-8533

 1 SHIELD

2 A COM 1
GND

3 B

11
12
13

10
4 SHIELD

14

9
8
7
+

6
5

5
4
3
–

2
6

1
24 VDC

7 –

8 +

9 SHIELD
A1870

10 A Figure 3-4—IDC Terminal Wiring Board Mounted in Six-Port

Junction Box

11 B COM 2
Wiring
12 SHIELD 1. Remove the cover from the device junction box.
A1947
2. Connect external system wiring to the appropriate
Figure 3-3—Network Extender Wiring Terminal Identification terminals on the terminal block. (See Figure 3-4
for terminal block location and Figure 3-5 for
terminal identification). The input to the IDC
consists of one or more normally open switches
(momentary pushbuttons are not recommended),
INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUIT (IDC) with a 10K ohm, 1/4 watt EOL resistor in parallel
INSTALLATION across the furthest switch from the input.

EQ22xxIDC SERIES INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUIT IMPORTANT!

(IDC)
The following paragraphs describe how to properly
install the EQ22xxIDC Initiating Device Circuit.
Mounting
The device should be securely mounted to a vibration
free surface. (See “Specifications” in this manual for
device dimensions.)
WARNING!
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior
to removing a junction box cover with power
applied.
An EOL resistor must be installed on both IDC
inputs (including unused inputs). Wiring
impedance must not exceed 500 ohms.
3. Check wiring to ensure that ALL connections
have been properly made.
IMPORTANT!
Be sure that the keyed ribbon cable is properly
connected to the terminal board.
4. Inspect the junction box O-ring to be sure that it is
in good condition.
5. Lubricate the O-ring and the threads of the
junction box cover with a thin coat of grease to
ease installation and ensure a watertight
enclosure.

3.1 3-10 95-8533

 NOTE Mounting
The recommended lubricant is a silicone free
The device should be securely mounted to a vibration
grease, available from Det-Tronics.
free surface. (See “Specifications” in this manual for
device dimensions.)
6. Set the node address for the device. (See “Setting
Device Network Addresses” in this section.) Wiring

7. Place the cover on the junction box and tighten

WARNING!
only until snug. DO NOT over tighten.
The enclosure must be electrically connected to
earth ground.
IDC MANUAL PULL STATION
OR OTHER CONTACT DEVICE
1. Remove the enclosure cover from the device.
+ 1

CIRCUIT 1 EOL (10K)

2. Remove the communication module from the
– 2
junction box. Connect external wiring to the
appropriate points on the device terminal block.
+ 3
(See Figure 3-4 for terminal block location and
CIRCUIT 2 EOL (10K)
Figure 3-6 for terminal identification)
– 4

3. Check wiring to ensure that ALL connections

A 5
have been properly made.
COM 2
B 6
4. Inspect the enclosure O-ring to be sure that it is in
good condition. Lubricate the O-ring and the
7 14 –
threads of the enclosure cover to ease both
COM SHIELD
installation and future removal of the cover.
8 13 –
24 VDC
NOTE
A 9 12 +
The recommended lubricant is a silicone free
COM 1
grease available from Detector Electronics.
B 10 11 +
A1871

Figure 3-5—Terminal Configuration for IDC

RELAY CONTACT
FOR MONITORING BATTERY.
CONTACT OPENS
WITH BATTERY TROUBLE CONDITION.
+ 3
68K OHM
INPUT RESISTOR
EQ22xxIDCGF SERIES INITIATING DEVICE – 4
CIRCUIT GROUND FAULT
RELAY CONTACT
A 5 FOR MONITORING AC POWER.
CONTACT CLOSES
COM 2 ON LOSS OF AC POWER.
The following paragraphs describe how to properly B 6
install and configure the EQ22xxIDCGF Initiating
Device Circuit Ground Fault. 7 14 –
COM SHIELD

8 13 –
24 VDC

A 9 12 +
COM 1
B 10 11 +

B1922

NOTE: ENCLOSURE AND/OR MOUNTING BRACKET

MUST BE CONNECTED TO EARTH GROUND.

Figure 3-6—Terminal Configuration for IDCGF

3.1 3-11 95-8533


WARNING!
If the installation uses catalytic type combustible
gas sensors, it is imperative that lubricants
containing silicone not be used, since they will
cause irreversible damage to the sensor.
5. Install the communication module in the device
enclosure.
NOTE
Be sure the ribbon cable is properly connected.
6. Set the node address for the device. (See “Setting
Device Network Addresses” in this section)
When configuring the EQ22xxIDCGF, its “device
type” should be configured as an initiating device
circuit (IDC).
Both inputs must be configured for a trouble
condition.
Circuit 1 – “Open” indicates a –24 VDC ground
fault condition. “Active” indicates a +24
VDC ground fault condition.
Circuit 2 – “Active” indicates a loss of AC input
power.
“Open” indicates a loss of battery
power.
7. Place the cover on the enclosure and tighten until
snug. DO NOT over tighten.
EQ22xxIDCSC SERIES INITIATING DEVICE
CIRCUIT SHORT CIRCUIT
(Not FM Approved)
The following paragraphs describe how to properly
install and configure the EQ22xxIDCSC Initiating
Device Circuit Short Circuit.
Mounting
The device should be securely mounted to a vibration
free surface. (See “Specifications” in this manual for
device dimensions.
3.1
Wiring
CAUTION!
The enclosure should be electrically connected
to earth ground.
1. Remove the cover from the device enclosure.
2. Remove the communication module from the
junction box. Connect external wiring to the
appropriate terminals on device terminal block.
(See Figure 3-4 for terminal block location and
Figure 3-7 for terminal identification.) The input to
the IDCSC consists of a normally open switch with
a 3.3k ohm series resistor, and a 10K ohm, 1/4
watt EOL resistor in parallel across the switch.
NOTE
An EOL resistor must be installed on both
IDCSC inputs (including unused inputs). Wiring
impedance must not exceed 500 ohms. A 3.3K
ohm resistor must be installed in series with the
switch. For correct operation, only one switch
per input can be connected.
3. Check wiring to ensure that ALL connections
have been properly made.
4. Install the communication module in the device
enclosure.
5. Inspect the enclosure O-ring to be sure that it is in
good condition. Lubricate the O-ring and the
threads of the enclosure cover to ease both
installation and future removal of the cover.
NOTE
The recommended lubricant is a silicone free
grease available from Detector Electronics.
NOTE
Be sure the ribbon cable is properly connected.
6. Set the node address for the device. (See “Setting
Device Network Addresses” in this section.)
7. Place the cover on the enclosure and tighten until
snug. Do not over tighten.
3-12 95-8533
 MANUAL PULL STATION
OR OTHER CONTACT DEVICE
NOTE
IDCSC For any selected enclosure, the enclosure must
conform to all applicable regulations and
+ 1
requirements.
CIRCUIT 1 EOL (10K)
– 2 3.3 K
NOTE
The Trouble signal must be located in an area
+ 3
where it is likely to be heard.
CIRCUIT 2
– 4
Classified locations require the appropriate
hazardous rated enclosure. It is recommended that
A 5
operators/switches be installed in the enclosure. This
COM 2
avoids the need to declassify the area in order to
B 6
operate the Controller. Regulations require that key
switches be installed for certain operations. An
7 14 –
appropriate window should be part of the enclosure in
COM SHIELDS
order to allow an operator to view the text display and
8 13 –
LED indicators.
24 VDC

A 9 12 +
NOTE
COM 1
If an enclosure does not have a keyed entry, a
B 10 11 +
B2076
special tool is required to gain entry into an
enclosure.

Figure 3-7—IDCSC Terminal Identification Det-Tronics offers several approved

EQ300X CONTROLLER INSTALLATION
The following paragraphs describe how to properly
install and configure the EQ300X Controller.
ENCLOSURE REQUIREMENTS
The Controller must be properly installed in a suitable
enclosure that is rated for the location. The enclosure
must provide space to install and wire the Controller
and must also provide for ground wire termination.
The enclosure must contain either a keyed lock or a
special tool to gain access into the enclosure. The
enclosure should be rated for the temperature range
of the location plus the temperature rise of all
equipment installed inside the enclosure. The
enclosure must be rated for electrical equipment that
is going to be installed.
(FM/CSA/CENELEC/CE) hazardous area enclosures
that have Eagle Quantum Premier equipment installed
in the enclosure. Contact Det-Tronics for further
information.
MOUNTING
The Controller is designed for direct panel mounting
or DIN rail (optional) mounting. See “Specifications”
section of this manual for mounting dimensions.
NOTE
Clips for DIN rail mounting are available, but
must be specified at the time of ordering.
NOTE
A minimum clearance of 4 inches between the
Controller and nearby equipment is required to
provide room for wiring and ventilation.

NOTE
The Controller and enclosure must be connected SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD
to earth ground.
An optional Serial Interface Board is available for the
EQP Controller. See Figures 3-8 and 3-9 for details
For ordinary locations when entry is required to
on the electrical connections.
operate the equipment, the cabinet should be a
dead-front construction and 16-gauge cold-rolled
steel. The door lock system shall accept different
keys for entry. An Authorized Persons key and a
Person-in-charge key will allow entry into the cabinet.
The cabinet should contain a window to view the
Controller’s text display and LED indicators.

3.1 3-13 95-8533

WIRING Electrical Connections
Figure 3-8 shows the location of wiring connectors on
Power Wiring
the Controller module. Figure 3-9 identifies individual
terminals.
CAUTION!
Input voltage at the Controller must be 18 vdc Connector P1, Terminals 1 to 4 —
minimum to ensure proper operation. 24 vdc Input Power
Connect the power supply to terminals 1 and 2 of the
It is important to consider both the wire gauge and Controller. Terminals 3 and 4 must also be
the distance from the Controller to the power supply. connected to power.
As the distance between the Controller and the power
supply increases, so must the diameter of the power Two power cables are recommended so that if one is
wiring in order to maintain a minimum of 18 vdc at the lost, the controller will continue to operate and signal
Controller. a trouble condition.

Shields on power cables must be connected to

IMPORTANT! chassis ground (earth).
To ensure proper operation of devices, the
voltage input to the device (measured at the
device) must be within the range indicated for
that device in the "Specifications" section of this
manual.

P12: TERMINALS 66 TO 68
RS-232

P11: TERMINALS 63 TO 65
P13: HIGH SPEED SERIAL LINK (HSSL)
RS-232
RS-232 (REDUNDANCY ONLY)

P10: TERMINALS 60 TO 62
RS-485
68 66 65 63 62 60

SERIAL COMMUNICATION BOARD

(OPTIONAL)

CONTROLNET
DET-TRONICS
®
59

BNC CONNECTOR B P9: TERMINALS 57 TO 59

56 57

RS-232
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
P8: TERMINALS 54 TO 56
CONTROLNET
54

BNC CONNECTOR A
Safety System Controller RS-485
Fire Alarm Inhibit Power Supervisory
53

Time & Date

High Gas Trouble Cntrl Flt Lon Fault

16:38:55
JAN 11/2002 Low Gas Acknowledge Silence Output Inhibit P7: TERMINALS 48 TO 53
LON CONNECTIONS
48

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

B2105
1 4 5 12 13 20 21 32 33 44 45 47

P6: TERMINALS 45 TO 47
FAULT RELAY

P5: TERMINALS 33 TO 44
RELAYS 5 TO 8

P4: TERMINALS 21 TO 32
RELAYS 1 TO 4

P3: TERMINALS 13 TO 20
DIGITAL INPUTS 5 TO 8

P2: TERMINALS 5 TO 12
DIGITAL INPUTS 1 TO 4

P1: TERMINALS 1 TO 4
24 VDC INPUT POWER

Figure 3-8—Location of Wiring Terminals on EQP Controller

3.1 3-14 95-8533

 + 1 48 SHIELD P2
P1
– 2 COM 1 49 1B
24 VDC INPUT POWER + 3 50 1A INPUT, + 5
P7
– 4 51 SHIELD LON

1+ 5 COM 2 52 2B
RESET*
1– 6 53 2A
COMMON, – 6
2+ 7 54 GND
ACKNOWLEDGE* P8
P2
2– 8 55 B RS-485
PORT 1
DIGITAL INPUTS 1 TO 4 3+ 9 56 A
A2117
SILENCE*
3– 10 57 GND
P9
4+ 11 58 RxD RS-232 Figure 3-10—Unsupervised Input Wiring
N / A* CONFIG
4– 12 59 TxD PORT

5+ 13
ENTER*
5– 14
6+ 15
CANCEL* P4
P3
6– 16
DIGITAL INPUTS 5 TO 8 17
7+ 60 A
NEXT* P10 COMMON 21 +
7– 18 61 B RS-485
PORT 2
8+ 19 62 GND
PREVIOUS*
8– 20 63 TxD N. O. 22
P11
1 C 21 64 RxD RS-232
PORT 3
1 NO 22 FIRE ALARM* 65 GND
N. C. 23
1 NC 23 66 TxD
P12
2 C 24 67 RxD RS-232 A2118
PORT 4
2 NO 25 SUPERVISORY* 68 GND
–
P4
2 NC 26
RELAYS 1 TO 4 3 C 27
Figure 3-11—Unsupervised Relay Output
3 NO 28 LOW GAS ALARM*
P13
3 NC 29 RS-232 - HSSL
4 C 30 (Custom Connector,
for Redundancy Only)
4 NO 31 HIGH GAS ALARM*

4 NC 32
5 C 33
5 NO 34 INHIBIT*

5 NC 35
6 C 36
6 NO 37 OUTPUT INHIBIT*

P5
6 NC 38
RELAYS 5 TO 8 7 C 39
7 NO 40 LON FAULT*

7 NC 41
8 C 42
8 NO 43 BEEPER*

8 NC 44
* DIGITAL INPUTS AND RELAY OUTPUTS CAN BE
C 45 CONFIGURED AS THE STATIC FUNCTION NAME (AS
P6 SHOWN) OR CAN BE USER DEFINED.
NO 46
TROUBLE RELAY
NC 47 NOTE: INPUTS CANNOT BE CONFIGURED TO REPORT A
E2104
TYPE ALARM (FIRE, GAS, SUPERVISORY, TROUBLE).

Figure 3-9—EQP Controller Terminal Identification

3.1 3-15 95-8533

Connector P2, Terminals 5 to12 — NOTE
Unsupervised Digital Input Channels 1 to 4 Refer to Figure 3-12 for location of termination
jumpers.
Connector P3, Terminals 13 to 20 —
Unsupervised Digital Input Channels 5 to 8
Jumper P25 – LON COM 1 Termination
See Figure 3-10 for example. Only channel 1 is shown
in Figure 3-10. The information is typical for channels 1-2 COM 1 Terminated (factory setting)
2-8. 2-3 COM 1 Unterminated (Redundancy)

Connector P4, Terminals 21 to 32 — Jumper P26 – LON COM 2 Termination

Unsupervised Relay Output Channels 1 to 4
1-2 COM 2 Terminated (factory setting)
Connector P5, Terminals 33 to 44 — 2-3 COM 2 Unterminated (Redundancy)
Unsupervised Relay Output Channels 5 to 8
See Figure 3-11 for example. Only channel 1 is shown Connector P8, Terminals 54, 55 & 56 —
in Figure 3-11. The information is typical for channels RS- 485 Serial Interface - Port 1
2-8.
Configuration data downloaded into the controller
configures the serial interface transmission baud rate,
NOTE
parity check for the serial port, and Modbus device
Channel software configurations include all panel
address. Software selectable baud rates are 2400,
indicator functions to automatically mimic the
4800, 9600,19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200.
controller front panel indicators.
Software selectable parity is None, Odd, and Even.
The controller uses 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
Connector P6, Terminals 45, 46 & 47 —
Port Pinout (3-position terminal block)
Trouble Relay
54 — GND
55 — B
The Trouble relay is not configurable. In the normal
56 — A
condition, the relay coil is energized, closing the N.O.
contact (terminals 45-46) and opening the N.C.
contact (terminals 45-47). The relay coil is de- Jumper P27 – RS-485 Termination Jumper
energized in the trouble condition.
1-2 Unterminated
2-3 Terminated (factory setting)
Connector P7, Terminals 48 to 53 —
LON Signaling Line Circuit Terminals
Connector P9, Terminals 57, 58 & 59 —
The LON loop is wired so that the controller’s LON RS-232 Serial Interface – Configuration Port
COM 1 is connected to the field device’s COM 2
Configuration data downloaded into the controller
connection. The field device’s COM 1 is wired to the
configures the serial interface transmission baud rate
next device’s COM 2 connection. This continues
and parity check for the serial port. Software
through the last field device on the loop. The last field
selectable baud rates are 2400, 4800, 9600,19200,
device’s COM 1 is then wired back to the Controller’s
38400, 57600, and 115200 (factory default is 9600).
COM 2 connection. LON A and B polarities must be
Software selectable parity is None, Odd, and Even.
maintained throughout the loop (i.e., always wire A to
The controller uses 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
A and B to B between the devices).
Port Pinout (3-position terminal block)
Port Pinout (6-position connection terminal block)
57 — GND
48 — COM 1 shield connection
58 — RXD
49 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
59 — TXD
50 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
51 — COM 2 shield connection
52 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 2 Connector P10, Terminals 60, 61 & 62 —
53 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 2 RS-485 Serial Interface – Port 2
Configuration data downloaded into the controller
configures the serial interface transmission baud rate,

3.1 3-16 95-8533

 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60

P12 P11 P10

3 3

P29 P28
1 1

RS-232 Transmit LED (Amber)

RS-232 Receive LED (Green)

P29: RS-485 Ground Fault

MonitorJumper

RS-485 Transmit LED (Amber)

RS-232 Transmit LED
(Amber)
RS-485 Receive LED (Green)

P28: RS-485 Termination Jumper

RS-232 Receive LED (Green)

1

P27
DET-TRONICS
® RS-485 Transmit LED (Amber)
3

EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER

A B
Safety System Controller
Channel Fire Alarm Inhibit Power Supervisory
RS-485 Termination Jumper
Indicators Time & Date
High Gas Trouble Cntrl Flt Lon Fault LON COM 2
16:38:55
RS-485 Receive LED (Green) P26 Termination Jumper
Low Gas Acknowledge Silence Output Inhibit
JAN 11/2002 1 3

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

1 3
P25
LON COM 1
Termination Jumper

Figure 3-12—Location of Termination Jumpers, Communication Indicator LEDs and Communication Ports

parity check for the serial port, and Modbus device Jumper P28 – RS-485 Termination Jumper
address. Software selectable baud rates are
1-2 Terminated (factory setting)
9600,19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 and 230400.
2-3 Unterminated
Software selectable parity is None, Odd, and Even.
The controller uses 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
Jumper P29 – RS-485 Ground Fault Monitor
Port Pinout (3-position terminal block)
1-2 Enabled
60 — A 2-3 Disabled (factory setting)
61 — B
62 — GND

3.1 3-17 95-8533

 TO
ADDITIONAL
CONTROLLER

68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60

GND B A GND B A

P12 P11 P10 P12 P11 P10

3 3 3 3

P29 P28 P29 P28

1 1 1 1

P29: RS-485 Ground Fault P29: RS-485 Ground Fault

Monitor Jumper, Position 1 & 2 Monitor Jumper, Position 1 & 2

P28: RS-485 Termination Jumper, P28: RS-485 Termination Jumper,

Position 1 & 2 Position 1 & 2

DET-TRONICS DET-TRONICS
® ®

EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER

A B
Safety System Controller A B
Safety System Controller
Fire Alarm Inhibit Power Supervisory Fire Alarm Inhibit Power Supervisory

Time & Date Time & Date

High Gas Trouble Cntrl Flt Lon Fault High Gas Trouble Cntrl Flt Lon Fault

16:38:55 16:38:55
Low Gas Acknowledge Silence Output Inhibit Low Gas Acknowledge Silence Output Inhibit
JAN 11/2002 JAN 11/2002

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

A2276

Figure 3-13—Controller to Controller Communication with Signaling Line Circuit Classification per NFPA 72

Use Port 2 to pass safety critical information between • The Termination jumper P28 must be set to
controllers. User logic can pass all alarm, trouble, Terminate (position 1-2) on all controllers.
and supervisory information between the controllers.
• The Ground Fault Monitor jumper P29 must be set to
Watchdog timers must be implemented in user logic
Enabled (position 1-2) on all controllers.
to verify the integrity of the SLC. Consult the local
authority having jurisdiction for annunciation • Connect terminals A (terminal number 60) and B
requirements. (terminal number 61) between the controllers. The
GND (terminal number 62) must not be connected.
Controller to Controller Communication with
See Figure 3-13 for wiring details.
Signaling Line Circuit Classification B4, Class B,
Style 4 per NFPA 72
Connector P11, Terminals 63, 64 & 65 —
To connect up to three controllers together and be
RS-232 Serial Interface – Port 3
able to transfer safety information between the
controllers, the communication link must be classified Configuration data downloaded into the controller
as a signaling line circuit per NFPA 72. With the serial configures the serial interface transmission baud rate,
board option, Port 2 (plug 10) is a RS-485 serial parity check and MODBUS device address for the
connection that is ground fault monitored. serial port. Software selectable baud rates are
9600,19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, and 230400.
To meet the signaling line circuit (Class B Style 4) Software selectable parity is None, Odd, and Even.
requirements, the following must be configured for The controller uses 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
correct operation:
Port Pinout (3-position terminal block)
• All controllers must have the optional serial board
installed. 63 — TXD
64 — RXD
65 — GND

3.1 3-18 95-8533

Connector P12, Terminals 66, 67 & 68 — WIRING
RS-232 Serial Interface – Port 4
The redundant controllers are wired the same as a
Configuration data downloaded into the controller simplex controller except for the LON wiring and the
configures the serial interface transmission baud rate, dedicated high-speed serial link, which are defined
parity check and MODBUS device address for the below. Refer to EQ300X Controller Installation for
serial port. Software selectable baud rates are general installation details.
9600,19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, and 230400.
Software selectable parity is None, Odd, and Even.
LON WIRING
The controller uses 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
The LON must be connected to both redundant
Port Pinout (3-position terminal block) controllers to ensure correct transfer of information.
Two LON Termination Modules are required for the
66 — TXD
installation as shown in Figure 3-14.
67 — RXD
68 — GND
HIGH SPEED SERIAL LINK (HSSL)
Connector P13 — The redundant controllers are connected together by
RS-232 High Speed Serial Port a dedicated high-speed serial link. This link is a pre-
fabricated cable that has a custom connector for
This port is dedicated to inter-controller connection
ease of use. Redundant controllers are automatically
required for redundancy, and is not available for any
addressed with the HSSL cable. One end of the
other use. This port is automatically configured.
cable is labeled Primary while the other end is labeled
Secondary. The primary controller takes address 1,
CONFIGURATION while the secondary controller is address 2. The
significance this has for the user is that the primary is
Software Defined Addresses the default master when both controllers are
powered-up at the same time.
Det-Tronics Safety System Software (S3) is
LON
programmed with the addresses that are assigned to TERMINATION
EQP MODULE
the controller when the configuration file is CONTROLLER
downloaded into the controller. Addresses define
A 53 A
and configure the Controller’s LON address, Modbus COM 2 TO
B FIELD
slave address, and the ControlNet option board COM 2 B 52
DEVICES
address. S 51 S

A 50

EQ300X REDUNDANT CONTROLLER COM 1 B 49

INSTALLATION S 48

The redundant controllers must be purchased with

the following options for correct installation:
• Serial board
• High-speed serial cable
EQP
• LON termination modules (2). CONTROLLER

A 53

ENCLOSURE REQUIREMENTS COM 2 B 52 LON

TERMINATION
S 51 MODULE
The redundant controllers must be located next to
each other in the same enclosure (4 ft. interconnecting A 50 A
cable). COM 1 TO
COM 1 B 49 B FIELD
DEVICES
S 48 S
MOUNTING
A2274

The controllers are designed for direct panel

NOTE: LON TERMINATION JUMPERS P25 AND P26 (SEE FIGURE 3-12)
mounting or DIN rail mounting. See “Specifications” MUST BE IN POSITION 2 AND 3 FOR REDUNDANT CONFIGURATION
(ON BOTH CONTROLLERS).
section of this manual for mounting dimensions.
Figure 3-14— LON Connection for Redundant EQP Controllers

3.1 3-19 95-8533

CONFIGURATION
S3 Configuration
The S3 configuration software is used to configure the
redundant controllers. A check box on the controller
configuration screen must be enabled and
downloaded to the controllers.
IMPORTANT
If the controllers have not been configured for
redundancy via the S3 configuration software,
redundancy will not function.
Software Defined Addresses
The LON addresses are pre-determined and cannot
be adjusted. Address 1 and 2 have been reserved for
a redundant controller configuration.
Modbus
Modbus ports on each controller share the serial
settings including baud rate and address. Controllers
in standby mode don’t respond to or issue Modbus
messages. This allows for transparent switching on a
multi-drop network. If RS-232 is used, a relay
switching mechanism can be used.
ControlNet
The ControlNet interface on each controller will have
different addresses. This allows both controllers to
reside on the same ControlNet network at the same
time. The primary controller uses the configured
address while the standby assumes an address 1
higher than the primary controller. Application logic
in the attached PLC must be used to determine which
controller has the correct output information.
Information coming from the PLC should be written to
both Premier Controllers.
POWER SUPPLY AND POWER SUPPLY
MONITOR INSTALLATION
WARNING!
ALWAYS follow all safety notes and instructions
when installing power supply or batteries!
WARNING!
Make sure a.c. power is OFF at main a.c.
breaker before beginning power supply
installation!
3.1
IMPORTANT!
Power supplies require unrestricted air flow for
proper cooling.
MOUNTING
Mount the power supply monitor in a Nationally
Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL) labeled
enclosure. Refer to the “Specifications” section for
mounting dimensions.
WIRING
CAUTION!
The power supply should be properly connected
to an earth ground! A ground wire MUST be
connected to the power supply units’s case
ground!
1. Verify that the input source is the same voltage
and frequency as that marked on the nameplate
of the power supply.
2. Verify that transformer taps are set for the correct
a.c. input. (Input tap setting is located inside the
power supply enclosure.)
3. Verify that the supply power wire size and fusing
are adequate for the current indicated on the
power supply nameplate.
NOTE
Consult the power supply manufacturer’s instruction
manual provided with the support documentation
received with the Eagle Quantum System.
NOTE
Required Overload Current is usually equal to
15% of the nominal rating.
4. Connect external wiring to the appropriate points
on Power Supply. Refer to Figure 3-15 for
terminal block locations and Figures 3-16 and 3-
17 for terminal identification. Connect the 24 vdc
power wires and the LON network cable to the
appropriate points on J1. (Redundant “+”, “–” and
shield terminals are connected internally.) Do not
ground any shield at the monitor / power distribution
cabinet. Insulate the shields to prevent shorting to
the device housing or to any other conductor.
5. Connect a two wire cable between the AC input of
the power supply and terminals 1 and 4 on J3, the
AC input terminal block on the power supply
monitor. See Figure 3-17.
3-20 95-8533
 J1: POWER AND LON WIRING LON ADDRESS SWITCHES J3: AC INPUT

+ +

1 TERMINAL NO. 1

+ + 1

SWITCH NO. 1
+

+ +
+
+
+ +
1

+ +
+
+

1
+ YELLOW LED

TERMINAL NO. 1 RED LED

GREEN LED

A1949

TERMINAL NO. 1
J2: CURRENT TEST POINTS
TERMINAL "C"

TERMINAL "B"

Figure 3-15—Power Supply Monitor Terminal and Switch Location

1 SHIELD

2 A COM 1

3 B

4 SHIELD

5 +

1 AC INPUT 120 / 240 VAC

6 –
24 VDC 2 NOT USED
7 –
3 NOT USED

8 +
4 AC INPUT 120 / 240 VAC
9 SHIELD A1950

10 A
Figure 3-17—J3: AC Input Terminal

11 B COM 2

12 SHIELD

A1947

Figure 3-16—J1: Power and LON Wiring Terminal

3.1 3-21 95-8533

 POWER SUPPLY MONITOR 12
11
10
1 9
AC MONITOR 8
4 7
See Note 4
6
5
4
C 3
2
B 1

AC POWER H – –
24 VDC
See Notes 1 & 3 N
OUTPUT
G + + + POWER DIST CKT #1 –

+ POWER DIST CKT #2 –

+ POWER DIST CKT #3 –

AC BREAKER DC BREAKER + POWER DIST CKT #4 –

BATTERY
CIRCUIT
BREAKER

POWER SUPPLY See Note 3

NRTL CABINET

See Note 2 NOTES

1. AC INPUT SELECTABLE (THROUGH THE OIS)
FOR 120 / 208 / 240 VAC.
– + – + 2. BATTERY SIZE CALCULATED BASED ON
SYSTEM LOAD.
12 VDC 12 VDC 3. CIRCUIT BREAKER RATINGS MUST BE BETWEEN
150% AND 250% OF FULL LOAD RATING.
4. REMOVAL OF TERMINAL PLUG WITH POWER
APPLIED TO TERMINALS B AND C WILL DAMAGE
D1951 BACKUP BATTERIES THE POWER SUPPLY MONITOR.

Figure 3-18— Wiring Connections for a Power Supply Monitor, Power Supply and Backup Batteries

6. Connect the “B” terminal on the power supply STARTUP

monitor to the negative (–) side of the backup
battery. Connect a correctly sized circuit breaker or
disconnect switch in the battery circuit as shown in
Figure 3-18. If a circuit breaker is used, it must be
rated between 150% and 250% of the total load.
7. Connect the “C” terminal on the power supply
monitor to the negative (–) side of the power supply.
8. Wire the power distribution circuit breakers to the
output of the power supply. Circuit breaker ratings
must be between 150% and 250% of the full load
rating.
9. Set the device network address for the power
supply monitor.
NOTE
For additional information, refer to the power
supply manufacturer’s instruction manual
provided with the support documentation
received with the Eagle Quantum Premier
system.
Turn on the power supply and allow the voltage to
stabilize at 27 volts before closing the circuit to the
battery.
MEASURING BATTERY VOLTAGE AND
CHARGING CURRENT
Measure the battery voltage at terminals 3 and 4 of
terminal block J2. See Figure 3-19.
To measure the battery charging current, connect a
digital voltmeter to terminals 1 and 2 of terminal block
J2. The voltmeter will read 1 millivolt (0.001 volt) for
each 2 amperes of current.
Current in Amperes = Meter reading in millivolts x 2
Example: A reading of 50 millivolts indicates a charging
current of 100 amperes.

3.1 3-22 95-8533

 module and must also provide for ground wire
1 CURRENT SENSE + termination. Access into the enclosure is gained by
using a special tool to open the enclosure. The
2 CURRENT SENSE – enclosure should be rated for the temperature range
of the location plus the temperature rise of all
BATTERY –
3
equipment installed inside the enclosure. The
enclosure must be rated for electrical equipment that
4 BATTERY + is going to be installed.
A1952

The DCIO can be panel or DIN rail mounted.

Figure 3-19—J2: Current Test Points
NOTE
It is recommended to maintain a minimum of 4
inches clearance between the module and other
equipment to provide adequate room for wiring
8 CHANNEL DCIO INSTALLATION and ventilation.

The following paragraphs describe how to properly

install and configure the 8 Channel DCIO Module. WIRING
All electrical connections are made to the field wiring
MOUNTING connectors furnished with the module. See Figure 3-
20 below for terminal identification.
The DCIO must be properly installed in a suitable
enclosure that is rated for the location. The enclosure
must provide space to install and wire the DCIO

EQ3700DCIO
COMMON C 24
IN–/OUT+ B 23 CHANNEL 8
SHLD 6 COM 2 SHLD + SUPPLY A 22
LON FROM
B 5 COM 2 B
PREVIOUS DEVICE
A 4 COM 2 A COMMON C 21

SHLD 3 COM 1 SHLD IN–/OUT+ B 20 CHANNEL 7

LON TO + SUPPLY A 19
B 2 COM 1 B
NEXT DEVICE
A 1 COM 1 A
COMMON C 18
COM
IN–/OUT+ B 17 CHANNEL 6
+ SUPPLY A 16

COMMON C 15
IN–/OUT+ B 14 CHANNEL 5
+ SUPPLY A 13
TO
EARTH
GROUND COMMON C 12
IN–/OUT+ B 11 CHANNEL 4
+ SUPPLY A 10

COMMON C 9
IN–/OUT+ B 8 CHANNEL 3
+ SUPPLY A 7
SHLD* 6 SHLD
24 VDC
– 5 – COMMON C 6
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 4 + IN–/OUT+ B 5 CHANNEL 2
SHLD* 3 SHLD + SUPPLY A 4
24 VDC
– 2 –
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 1 + COMMON C 3

POWER IN–/OUT+ B 2 CHANNEL 1

+ SUPPLY A 1
* SHIELDS ON POWER WIRES ARE OPTIONAL
UNLESS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. B2097

Figure 3-20—DCIO Module Wiring Terminal Configuration

3.1 3-23 95-8533

Power Connector, Terminals 1 to 6
24 Vdc Power Input
COMMON C 3
Power connections to the DCIO depend upon the
total current consumption of all the channels in the
device. Each output-configured channel can
IN– / OUT+ B 2
consume up to 2 Amps. The power-input connection
made through the terminal plug is rated to handle up + SUPPLY A 1
to 10 Amps. If the total current draw is more than 10
B2090
Amps, power must be provided into the device using
both power inputs. In this case, connect the power
supply to terminals 1 and 2, and also to 4 and 5.
Figure 3-21—Unsupervised Input Configuration
Otherwise connect the power supply to terminals 1
and 2. Power wire shielding should be connected to
terminals 3 and 6.
NOTE
1— + An EOL resistor is not required.
2— –
3— Shield* NOTE
4— + No connection should be made to the “+ Supply”
5— – terminal.
6— Shield*
NFPA - Class B, Style B
*Shields on power wires are optional unless required Supervised Input (IDC) Open Circuit Supervision
by local codes. Connect external system wiring to the appropriate
terminals on the DCIO terminal block. See Figure 3-
Connect the module power supply to terminals 1 and 22.
2. If additional terminals are required for powering
other devices, these devices should be connected to The input to the DCIO module consists of one or
terminals 4 and 5. Shields are to be connected to more normally open switches, with a 10K ohm, 1/4
terminals 3 and 6. watt EOL resistor in parallel across the last switch.

COM Connector, Terminals 1 to 6 NOTE

LON Terminals No connection should be made to the “+ Supply”
terminal.
Be sure to observe polarity when wiring the LON.
1 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
2 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
4 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
5 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
3 & 6 — shield connections.

Channel Connectors, Terminals 1 to 24

Terminals A, B & C
Channels 1 to 8 Input / Output Terminals
Refer to individual wiring configurations for terminal
descriptions. Only channel 1 is shown in each COMMON C 3
diagram. The information is typical for channels 2-8. EOL
RESISTOR
10 K Ω
Unsupervised Input
IN– / OUT+ B 2

Connect external system wiring to the appropriate

+ SUPPLY A 1
terminals. See Figure 3-21.
B2091

Input to the DCIO consists of one or more normally

open or normally closed switches.
Figure 3-22—Supervised Input Configuration

3.1 3-24 95-8533

 COMMON C 3 COMMON C 3
INLINE
RESISTOR EOL EOL
3.3 K Ω RESISTOR RESISTOR
10 K Ω 10 K Ω

IN– / OUT+ B 2 IN– / OUT+ B 2

+ SUPPLY A 1 + SUPPLY A 1

B2092

Figure 3-23—Supervised Input Configuration (Opens and Shorts) Figure 3-24—Supervised Output Configuration (Notification)

NFPA - Class B, Style C NFPA - Class B, Style Y

(Three state – open, switch closure, and short)
Supervised Input (IDCSC) Open and Short Circuit
Supervision
Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
on the DCIO terminal block. See Figure 3-23.
The input to the DCIO module consists of a normally
open switch, with a 10 K ohm, 1/4 watt EOL resistor in
parallel across the switch, and a 3.3 K ohm, 1/4 watt
resistor in series with the switch.
NOTE
No connection should be made to the “+ Supply”
terminal. For correct operation, only one input
switch can be used per channel.
Supervised Output Notification (Horns and Strobes)
Supervised Outputs for Open & Short Circuits
Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
on the DCIO terminal block. See Figure 3-24.
The output of the DCIO module supervises the
notification circuit by reversing the polarity of the
monitoring circuit.
NOTE
Polarity MUST be observed when connecting the
notification device.
It is critical to use a notification device approved for
fire alarm notification. These devices are polarized
and do not require the use of an external diode for the
supervision of the circuit. Wire one or more
notification devices to the output, with a 10 K ohm, 1/4
watt EOL resistor in parallel across the last device.

NOTE
No connection should be made to the “+ Supply”
terminal.

Each output channel is individually activated for

response pattern:
– continuous output
– 60 beats per minute
– 120 beats per minute
– temporal
– supervisory
– timed
– trouble.

3.1 3-25 95-8533

Supervised Output for Automatic Release
Supervised Output for Open Circuits
Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
on the DCIO terminal block. See Figure 3-25.
Supervised Output for Deluge and Pre-action
Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
on the DCIO terminal block. See Figure 3-25. Wire
one or more releasing devices to the module output.

Wire one or more releasing devices to the module The output of the DCIO module supervises the
output. releasing circuit via the coil of the releasing solenoid.
NOTE It is essential to use a releasing device approved for
Make no connection to the “+ Supply” terminal. use with this output module.

The output of the DCIO module supervises the
releasing circuit via the coil of the releasing solenoid.
It is essential to use a releasing device approved for
use with this output module.
NOTE
This type of output does not require the use of
EOL resistors or diodes to supervise the circuit.
The output can be configured for latching, continuous
or timed response.
To ensure proper operating voltage, the maximum
wiring length from the power source to the DCIO
module must not exceed the values shown in Table 3-
9 for automatic release applications.
NOTE
For solenoids, this wire length includes both the
wiring from the power supply to the DCIO
module and the wiring from the module to the
solenoid.
NOTE
This type of output does not require the use of
EOL resistors or diodes to supervise the circuit.
NOTE
For new or retrofit installations, any
manufacturer’s non-water based agent release
valves can be wired into the outputs of the ARM
or DCIO modules as long as the devices utilize
24 vdc and do not exceed 2 amperes current
draw.
NOTE
For FM system approval listing, pre-action and
deluge applications require that only FM
approved deluge valves can be wired into the
ARM or DCIO modules. Table 3-10 lists the
supported solenoid groups. Remember that the
valves must utilize 24 vdc and must not exceed 2
amperes current draw.
The output can be configured for latching, continuous
or timed response.

NOTE
Squibs are not compatible with this output.

Table 3-9—Maximum Wire Length for Automatic Releasing

Applications

Device Maximum Wire Length in Feet

COMMON C 3 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG

890181* 150 100 60
899175* 150 100 60
IN– / OUT+ B 2 895630-000* 150 100 60
897494* 190 120 75
+ SUPPLY A 1 NOTE: SHUNT/FLYBACK DIODES DO NOT NEED
TO BE INSTALLED ON THE FIELD DEVICE.
CIRCUIT PROTECTION IS PROVIDED
486500-001* 1500 1000 600 400
WITHIN THE IPM.
31-199932-004* 150 100 60
2 Amp Load 190 120 75

Figure 3-25—Supervised Output Configuration (Automatic Release) *Fenwal Solenoid

3.1 3-26 95-8533

 Table 3-10—Maximum Wire Length for FM Approved Solenoids for Deluge and Pre-Action Applications

Solenoids Maximum Wire Length in Feet (Meters)

FM Solenoid Group Manufacturer Model 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG

B ASCO T8210A107 183 (56) 115 (35) 72 (22) 46 (14)

D ASCO 8210G207 314 (96) 198 (60) 124 (38) 78 (24)
E Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
F Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2 130 (40) 82 (25) 51 (16) 32 (10)
G Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
H Viking HV-274-0601 180 (55) 110 (34) 70 (21) 45(14)

To ensure proper operating voltage, the input voltage
to the DCIO must be in the range from 21 to 30 vdc
and the maximum wiring length must not exceed the
values shown in Table 3-10 for deluge and pre-action
applications. Per FM Approval requirements, the
secondary power must provide capacity for a 90 hour
minimum standby operation followed by a minimum of
10 minutes of releasing and alarm operation. For
initiating device circuit(s) for use with the deluge
and pre-action system configuration, an Enhanced
Discrete Input/Output Module (EDIO) must be
used.
Unsupervised Output Ancillary Applications
(Unrelated to Fire Detection/Protection)
Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
on the DCIO terminal block. See Figure 3-26.
NOTE
No connection should be made to the “+ Supply”
terminal.
CONFIGURATION
Setting DCIO Network Address
One unique network address must be assigned to
each DCIO module. The address is set by the 8
switch DIP assembly on the DCIO module.
COMMON C 3
When using the switches located on the DCIO
module, the address is binary coded and is the sum
of all switches placed in the “closed” position.
Each discrete point of a DCIO module has a tag
number and a descriptor for unique identification.
8 CHANNEL RELAY MODULE
INSTALLATION
The following paragraphs describe how to properly
install and configure the 8 Channel Relay Module.
MOUNTING
The Relay Module must be properly installed in a
suitable enclosure that is rated for the location. The
enclosure must provide space to install and wire the
relay module and must also provide for ground wire
termination. Access into the enclosure is gained by
using a special tool to open the enclosure. The
enclosure should be rated for the temperature range
of the location plus the temperature rise of all
equipment installed inside the enclosure. The
enclosure must be rated for electrical equipment that
is going to be installed. The device can be panel or
DIN rail mounted.
NOTE
It is recommended to maintain a minimum of 4
inches clearance between the module and other
equipment to provide adequate room for wiring
and ventilation.

WIRING
IN– / OUT+ B 2
All electrical connections are made to the field wiring
+ SUPPLY A 1 NOTE: SHUNT/FLYBACK DIODES DO NOT NEED connectors furnished with the module. See Figure 3-
TO BE INSTALLED ON THE FIELD DEVICE.
CIRCUIT PROTECTION IS PROVIDED 27 below for terminal identification.
WITHIN THE IPM.

Figure 3-26—Unsupervised Output Configuration

3.1 3-27 95-8533

Power Connector, Terminals 1 to 6 Channel Connectors, Terminals 1 to 24
24 Vdc Power Input
Unsupervised Output Ancillary Applications
1— + (Unrelated to Fire Detection/Protection)
2— –
Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
3— Shield*
on the relay module terminal block. See Figure 3-27.
4— +
5— –
6— Shield* CONFIGURATION
*Shields on power wires are optional unless required
by local codes. Setting Relay Module Network Address
One unique network address must be assigned to
Connect the module power supply to terminals 1 and each relay module. The address is set by the 8
2. If additional terminals are required for powering switch DIP assembly on the relay module.
other devices, these devices should be connected to
terminals 4 and 5. Shields are to be connected to When using the switches located on the relay module,
terminals 3 and 6. the address is binary coded and is the sum of all
switches placed in the “closed” position.
COM Connector, Terminals 1 to 6
LON Terminals Each discrete point of a relay module has a tag
number and a descriptor for unique identification.
Be sure to observe polarity when wiring the LON.
Det-Tronics S3 Safety System Software is used for
1 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 1 device configuration. The following shows the
2 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 1 minimum software/firmware releases:
4 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
5 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 2 Controller Firmware S3
3 & 6 — shield connections. Version Rev. Version
2.01 A 2.8.0.0

EQ3720RM
NC C 24
NO B 23 CHANNEL 8
SHLD 6 COM 2 SHLD COMMON A 22
LON FROM
B 5 COM 2 B
PREVIOUS DEVICE
A 4 COM 2 A NC C 21

SHLD 3 COM 1 SHLD NO B 20 CHANNEL 7

LON TO COMMON A 19
B 2 COM 1 B
NEXT DEVICE
A 1 COM 1 A
NC C 18
COM
NO B 17 CHANNEL 6
COMMON A 16

NC C 15
NO B 14 CHANNEL 5
COMMON A 13
TO
EARTH
GROUND NC C 12
NO B 11 CHANNEL 4
COMMON A 10

NC C 9
NO B 8 CHANNEL 3
COMMON A 7
SHLD* 6 SHLD
24 VDC
– 5 – NC C 6
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 4 + NO B 5 CHANNEL 2
SHLD* 3 SHLD COMMON A 4
24 VDC
– 2 –
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 1 + NC C 3

POWER NO B 2 CHANNEL 1
COMMON A 1
* SHIELDS ON POWER WIRES ARE OPTIONAL
UNLESS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. C2206

NOTE: RELAY CONTACTS SHOWN IN REST (DE-ENERGIZED) STATE.

Figure 3-27— Relay Module Wiring Terminal Configuration

3.1 3-28 95-8533

ANALOG INPUT MODULE Power Connector — Terminals 1 to 6
INSTALLATION 24 Vdc Power Input
1— +
MOUNTING 2— –
3— Shield*
The Analog Input Module must be properly installed
4— +
in a suitable enclosure that is rated for the location.
5— –
The enclosure must provide space to install and wire
6— Shield*
the device and must also provide for ground wire
termination. Access into the enclosure must be
gained by using a special tool to open the enclosure. *Shields on power wires are optional unless required
The enclosure should be rated for the temperature by local codes.
range of the location plus the temperature rise of all
equipment installed inside the enclosure. The Connect the module power supply to terminals 1 and
enclosure must be rated for electrical equipment that 2. If additional terminals are required for powering
is going to be installed. other devices, these devices should be connected to
terminals 4 and 5. Shields are to be connected to
NOTE terminals 3 and 6.
It is recommended to maintain a minimum of 4
inches clearance between the module and other COM Connector — Terminals 1 to 6
equipment to provide adequate room for wiring LON Terminals
and ventilation.
Be sure to observe polarity when wiring the LON.
1 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
WIRING 2 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
All electrical connections are made to the field wiring 4 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
connectors furnished with the module. (Connectors 5 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
accept up to 12 AWG wire.) Refer to Figure 3-28 for 3 & 6 — shield connections (shields required).
identification of module wiring terminals.

EQ3730AIM
COMMON C 24
4-20 MA IN B 23 CHANNEL 8
SHLD 6 COM 2 SHLD + SUPPLY A 22
LON FROM
B 5 COM 2 B
PREVIOUS DEVICE
A 4 COM 2 A COMMON C 21

SHLD 3 COM 1 SHLD 4-20 MA IN B 20 CHANNEL 7

LON TO + SUPPLY A 19
B 2 COM 1 B
NEXT DEVICE
A 1 COM 1 A
COMMON C 18
COM
4-20 MA IN B 17 CHANNEL 6
+ SUPPLY A 16

COMMON C 15
4-20 MA IN B 14 CHANNEL 5
+ SUPPLY A 13
TO
EARTH
GROUND COMMON C 12
4-20 MA IN B 11 CHANNEL 4
+ SUPPLY A 10

COMMON C 9
4-20 MA IN B 8 CHANNEL 3
+ SUPPLY A 7
SHLD* 6 SHLD
24 VDC
– 5 – COMMON C 6
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 4 + 4-20 MA IN B 5 CHANNEL 2
SHLD* 3 SHLD + SUPPLY A 4
24 VDC
– 2 –
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 1 + COMMON C 3

POWER 4-20 MA IN B 2 CHANNEL 1

+ SUPPLY A 1
* SHIELDS ON POWER WIRES ARE OPTIONAL
UNLESS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. A2224

Figure 3-28—Analog Input Module Wiring Terminal Configuration

3.1 3-29 95-8533

 CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER
COMMON C 3 COMMON C 3 –

4-20 MA IN B 2 SIG 4-20 MA IN B 2 SIG

+ SUPPLY A 1 + + SUPPLY A 1 +
A2235 A2236

Figure 3-29—Two-Wire Transmitter — Non-Isolated 4 to 20 mA Figure 3-31—Three-Wire Transmitter — Non-Isolated 4 to 20 mA

Current Output (Sourcing) Current Output (Sourcing)

CHANNEL 1 HIM CHANNEL 1 HIM TRANSMITTER

COMMON C 3 6 COMMON 3 TRANSMITTER COMMON C 3 6 COMMON 3 –

4-20 MA IN B 2 5 4-20 MA IN 2 SIG 4-20 MA IN B 2 5 4-20 MA IN 2 SIG

+ SUPPLY A 1 4 + SUPPLY 1 + + SUPPLY A 1 4 + SUPPLY 1 +

A2238 A2239

Figure 3-30—Two-Wire Transmitter with HART Interface Module — Figure 3-32—Three-Wire Transmitter with HART Interface Module —
Non-Isolated 4 to 20 mA Current Output (Sourcing) Non-Isolated 4 to 20 mA Current Output (Sourcing)

Channel Connectors — Terminals 1 to 24 INTELLIGENT PROTECTION MODULE

4-20 mA Input Devices
Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
on the analog input module terminal block. See
Figure 3-29 for an example of a 2-wire input. See
Figure 3-30 for a 2-wire input with HART interface
module. See Figure 3-31 for a 3-wire input, where the
transmitter must source a 4-20 mA signal. See Figure
3-32 for a 3-wire input with HART interface module.
Only channel 1 is shown in each diagram. The
information is typical for channels 2-8.
CONFIGURATION
Setting Analog Input Module Network Address
One unique network address must be assigned to
each analog input module. The address is set by the
8 switch DIP assembly on the analog input module.
When using the switches located on the analog input
module, the address is binary coded and is the sum
of all switches placed in the “closed” position.
Each point of an analog input module has a tag
number and a descriptor for unique identification.
Det-Tronics S3 Safety System Software is used for
device configuration. The following shows the
minimum software/firmware releases:
INSTALLATION
WIRING
All electrical connections are made to the field wiring
connectors furnished with the module. Refer to Figure
3-33 for identification of module wiring terminals.
Power Connector, Terminals 1 to 6
24 Vdc Power Input
Connect the module power supply to terminals 1 and 2.
If additional terminals are required for powering other
devices, these devices should be connected to terminals
4 and 5. Shields are to be connected to terminals 3 and
6 — chassis (earth) ground terminals. Terminals are
rated for 10 amperes. Use both sets of input terminals
in parallel if total output current can exceed 10
amperes.
LON Connector, Terminals 1 to 6
LON/SLC Signaling Circuit Terminals
Be sure to observe polarity when wiring the LON/SLC.
shield connection — terminals 3 and 6.
1 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
2 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
4 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
5 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 2

Controller Firmware S3
Version Rev. Version
3.04 B 2.9.1.1

3.1 3-30 95-8533

 EQ3740IPM
COMMON C 24
CHANNEL 8
IN–/OUT+ B 23
RELEASE-2
SHLD 6 COM 2 SHLD + SUPPLY A 22
LON FROM
B 5 COM 2 B
PREVIOUS DEVICE
A 4 COM 2 A COMMON C 21
CHANNEL 7
SHLD 3 COM 1 SHLD IN–/OUT+ B 20
RELEASE-1
LON TO + SUPPLY A 19
B 2 COM 1 B
NEXT DEVICE
A 1 COM 1 A
COMMON C 18
COM CHANNEL 6
IN–/OUT+ B 17
BELL
+ SUPPLY A 16

COMMON C 15
CHANNEL 5
IN–/OUT+ B 14
ZONE-2
+ SUPPLY A 13
TO
EARTH
GROUND COMMON C 12
CHANNEL 4
IN–/OUT+ B 11
ZONE-1
+ SUPPLY A 10

COMMON C 9
CHANNEL 3
IN–/OUT+ B 8
SUPERVISORY
+ SUPPLY A 7
SHLD* 6 SHLD
24 VDC
– 5 – COMMON C 6
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 4 + CHANNEL 2
IN–/OUT+ B 5
MANUAL RELEASE
SHLD* 3 SHLD + SUPPLY A 4
24 VDC
– 2 –
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 1 + COMMON C 3
CHANNEL 1
POWER IN–/OUT+ B 2
ABORT
+ SUPPLY A 1
* SHIELDS ON POWER WIRES ARE OPTIONAL
UNLESS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. A2240

Figure 3-33—IPM Wiring Terminal Configuration

Channels 1 to 3, Terminals 1 to 9
Channels 1 to 3 Inputs
COMMON C 3
Refer to individual wiring configurations for terminal
descriptions. Only channel 1 is shown in each diagram.
The information is typical for channels 1-3.
IN– / OUT+ B 2
Unsupervised Input
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate + SUPPLY A 1

terminals on the terminal block. See Figure 3-34.

B2090

The input to the IPM consists of one or more normally

open switches. An EOL resistor is not required. Figure 3-34—Unsupervised Input Configuration

No connection should be made to “+ Supply” terminal. No connection should be made to “+ Supply” terminal.

NOTE
Unsupervised inputs are not recommended for
fire alarm applications.
COMMON C 3

EOL
NFPA - Class B, Style B RESISTOR
10 K Ω
(Two State – Open and Switch Closure) IN– / OUT+ B 2

Supervised Input (IDC) Open Circuit Supervision + SUPPLY A 1

Connect external system wiring to the appropriate
B2091
terminals on the terminal block. See Figure 3-35.
The input to the IPM consists of one or more normally
Figure 3-35—Supervised Input Configuration
open switches, with a 10 K ohm, 1/4 watt EOL resistor
in parallel across the last switch.

3.1 3-31 95-8533

NFPA - Class B Style C
(Three state – open, switch closure, and short) COMMON C 3
INLINE
Supervised Input (IDCSC) Open and Short Circuit RESISTOR EOL
3.3 K Ω RESISTOR
Supervision 10 K Ω

Connect external system wiring to the appropriate IN– / OUT+ B 2

terminals on the terminal block. See Figure 3-36. + SUPPLY A 1

The input to the IPM consists of a normally open switch, B2092

with a 10 K ohm, 1/4 watt EOL resistor in parallel across
the switch, and a 3.3 K ohm, 1/4 watt resistor in series Figure 3-36—Supervised Input Configuration (Opens and Shorts)
with the switch.
No connection should be made to “+ Supply” terminal.
COMMON C 18

BELL, HORN,
Channels 4 and 5, Terminals 10 to 15 STROBE, ETC.

ZONE-1 and ZONE-2 Inputs

IN– / OUT+ B 17
The IPM supports 2-wire devices from Kidde-Fenwal and
+ SUPPLY A 16 NOTE: SHUNT/FLYBACK DIODES DO NOT NEED
Apollo. Figure 3-37 shows the wiring for Apollo TO BE INSTALLED ON THE FIELD DEVICE.
CIRCUIT PROTECTION IS PROVIDED
detectors connected to IPM Channel 4 through B2093 WITHIN THE IPM.

terminals 10 and 11.

Figure 3-38 shows the typical wiring for Kidde-Fenwal
detectors connected to the IPM through Channel 5
using terminals 13 and 14.
IPM Channels 4 and 5, labeled “Zone-1” and “Zone-2”
on the modules wiring legend, support either brand of
detection products however mixing brands is not
supported on either a single channel or module.
Notes: 1.Contact devices such as Fenwal heat detectors
may be used on ZONE 1 and 2 inputs if NFPA
Class B, Style B supervision is selected.
Figure 3-39—CH-6: Unsupervised Output Configuration
2. The initiating device circuit(s) for use with the deluge
and pre-action system configuration must be wired
within 20 feet and in conduit from the IPM.
Channel 6, Terminals 16 to 18
Unsupervised Output
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate
terminals on the terminal block. See Figure 3-39. No
connection should be made to “+ Supply” terminal.

IN IN IN
+ SUPPLY A 10 L1 -R L1 -R L1 -R

L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2
OUT OUT OUT

IN–/OUT+ B 11 A2241

COMMON C 12 UNUSED Figure 3-37—CH-4 and/or 5: Apollo 2-wire devices

+ SUPPLY A 13

1 2 1 2 1 2

3 3 3

7 6 7 6 7 6

IN–/OUT+ B 14 A2242

COMMON C 15 UNUSED Figure 3-38—CH-4 and/or 5: Kidde-Fenwal 2-wire devices

3.1 3-32 95-8533

Supervised Output
Notification Supervised for Open & Short Circuits COMMON C 18

Connect external system wiring to the appropriate EOL

RESISTOR
terminals on the terminal block. See Figure 3-40. 10 K Ω

The output of the IPM supervises the notification circuit IN– / OUT+ B 17

by reversing the polarity of the monitoring circuit. Polarity + SUPPLY A 16

must be observed when connecting the notification
device. It is essential to utilize a notification device B2094

approved for fire alarm notification. These devices are Figure 3-40—CH-6: Supervised Output Configuration (Notification)
polarized and would not require the use of an external
diode for the supervision of the circuit. Wire one or more
notification devices to the output, with a 10 K ohm, 1/4 COMMON C 21
watt EOL resistor in parallel across the last device.
No connection should be made to “+ Supply” terminal.
Each output channel is individually activated for IN– / OUT+ B 20
response pattern:
– supervisory + SUPPLY A 19 NOTE: SHUNT/FLYBACK DIODES DO NOT NEED
TO BE INSTALLED ON THE FIELD DEVICE.
– continuous output CIRCUIT PROTECTION IS PROVIDED
WITHIN THE IPM.
– 60 beats per minute
– 120 beats per minute Figure 3-41—CH-7&8: Supervised Output Configuration (Agent Release)
– temporal
Table 3-11—Maximum Wire Length for Releasing Applications
– trouble.
Device Maximum Wire Length in Feet
Channels 7 and 8, Terminals 19 to 24
12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG
Supervised Output Agent Release
890181* 150 100 60
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate
899175* 150 100 60
terminals on the terminal block. See Figure 3-41.
895630-000* 150 100 60
Wire one or more releasing devices to the module output. 897494* 190 120 75
No connection should be made to “+ Supply” terminal. 486500-001* 1500 1000 600 400
31-199932-004* 150 100 60
The output of the IPM supervises the releasing circuit via
the coil of the releasing solenoid. It is essential to utilize 2 Amp Load 190 120 75
a releasing device approved for use with this output *Fenwal Solenoid
module. This type of output does not require the use of
EOL resistors or diodes to supervise the circuit.
CONFIGURATION
The output can be configured for continuous or timed response.
Setting Module Network Address
To ensure adequate operating voltage for the output
device, the maximum wiring length from the power source One unique network address must be assigned to
to the output device must not exceed the values shown in each intelligent protection module. The address is
Table 3-11 for automatic release applications or Table 3-12 set by the 8 switch DIP assembly on the module.
for deluge and pre-action applications.
When using the switches located on the module, the
For solenoids, this wire length includes both the wiring
address is binary coded and is the sum of all
from the power supply to the IPM and the wiring from the
switches placed in the “closed” position.
module to the solenoid.
NOTE Each discrete point of an intelligent protection module
For FM system approval listing, pre-action and has a tag number and a descriptor for identification.
deluge applications require that only FM approved
deluge valves can be wired into the IPM module. Det-Tronics S3 Safety System Software is used for
Remember that the valves must utilize 24 vdc and device configuration. The following shows the
must not exceed 2 amperes current draw. minimum software/firmware releases:
NOTE Controller Firmware S3
Squibs are not compatable with this output. If Version Rev. Version
squib actuation is required, use EQ2500ARM. 3.04 B 2.9.0.11

3.1 3-33 95-8533

 Table 3-12—Maximum Wiring Length for FM Approved Solenoids for Deluge and Pre-Action Applications

Solenoids Maximum Wire Length in Feet (Meters)

FM Solenoid Group Manufacturer Model 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG

B ASCO T8210A107 183 (56) 115 (35) 72 (22) 46 (14)

D ASCO 8210G207 314 (96) 198 (60) 124 (38) 78 (24)
E Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
F Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2 130 (40) 82 (25) 51 (16) 32 (10)
G Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
H Viking HV-274-0601 180 (55) 110 (34) 70 (21) 45(14)

GAS DETECTOR LOCATION AND NOTE

INSTALLATION The use of the Sensor Separation Kit will be
required in some installations.
Gas detection devices must be properly located to
provide maximum protection. Determining the proper
number of devices and placement varies depending ENVIRONMENTS AND SUBSTANCES THAT
on the specific requirements of the area of protection. AFFECT GAS DETECTOR PERFORMANCE
Catalytic sensors should be located where they are
The following should be considered when locating a
safe from potential sources of contamination that can
gas detection device:
cause a decrease in the sensitivity of the device
including:
1. Gas type. If it is lighter than air (acetylene,
hydrogen, methane, etc.), place the sensor above
A. Substances that can clog the pores of the flame
the potential source. Place the sensor close to
arrestor and reduce the gas diffusion rate to the
the floor for gases that are heavier than air
sensor including:
(benzene, butane, butylene, propane, hexane,
pentane, etc.) or for vapors resulting from
Dirt and oil, corrosive substances such as Cl2
flammable liquid spills.
(Chlorine) or HCl, paint overspray, or residue from
cleaning solutions that can clog the flame
NOTE
arrestor.
Air currents can cause a gas that is heavier than
air to rise. Also, if the gas is hotter than ambient
NOTE
air, it could also rise.
A dust cover should be installed to protect the
flame arrester whenever these conditions exist.
2. How rapidly will the gas diffuse into the air?
Select a location for the sensor as close as B. Substances that cover or tie up the active sites on
possible to the anticipated source of a gas leak. the catalytic surface of the active sensing element
such as volatile metal organics, gases, or vapors
3. Ventilation characteristics. Air movement will of hydrides, and volatile compounds containing
cause gas to accumulate more heavily in one phosphorous, boron, silicone, etc.
area than another. The devices should be placed
in areas where the most concentrated Examples:
accumulation of gas is anticipated. RTV silicone sealants
Silicone oils and greases
4. Devices should be pointed down to prevent the Tetraethyl lead
buildup of moisture or contaminants on the filter. Phosphine
Diborane
5. Devices must be accessible for testing and Silane
calibration. Trimethyl chlorsilane
Hydrogen fluoride
Boron trifluoride
Phosphate esters

3.1 3-34 95-8533

C. Materials that remove the catalytic metals from
the active element of the sensor. Some
substances react with the catalytic metal forming
a volatile compound that can erode the metal
from the surface of the sensor’s active element.
Halogens and compounds containing halogen
are materials of this nature and others include:
EQ22xxDCU DIGITAL COMMUNICATION UNIT
USED WITH DET-TRONICS H2S/O2 SENSORS OR
OTHER TWO-WIRE 4 TO 20 MA DEVICES
Determine the best mounting locations for the
detectors. Whenever practical, detectors should be
placed where they are easily accessible for
calibration.

Examples: WARNING!
Chlorine
Do not apply power to the system with the cover
Bromine
removed unless the area has been verified to be
Iodine
free of combustible gases or vapors.
Hydrogen Chloride, Bromide or Iodide
Organic halides:
The DCU utilizes the following:
Trichloroethylene
Dichlorobenzene
1. A terminal wiring board mounted at the bottom of
Vinyl chloride
the junction box.
Freons
Halon 1301
2. A communication module mounted above the
(Bromotrifluoromethane).
terminal wiring board using the standoffs
provided. See Figure 3-42.
NOTE
Brief exposure to these materials can temporarily
increase sensor sensitivity due to the surface of Assembly and Wiring Procedure
the active element being etched. Prolonged
Attach the sensor to the DCU enclosure. Do not over-
exposure continues this process until the
tighten. If a sensor separation kit is being used,
sensitivity of the sensor is degraded, resulting in
attach the sensor to the separation kit junction box
shortened sensor life.
and wire the device as described in the “Sensor
Separation” section.
D. Exposure to high concentrations of combustible
gases for extended periods of time can stress the
sensing element and seriously affect its
performance.

The degree of damage to the sensor is

determined by a combination of contaminant
type, contaminant concentration in the
atmosphere, and the length of time the sensor is COMMUNICATION MODULE

exposed.

NOTE
If a sensor has been exposed to a contaminant
or a high level of combustible gas, it should be
calibrated at the time of exposure. An additional
calibration a few days later should be performed
to determine whether a significant shift in
sensitivity has occurred. If necessary, sensor STANDOFFS (4)

should be replaced.
TERMINAL WIRING BOARD
NOTE
A combination of accessories such as rain
shields and dust covers is not recommended and
can result in slow response to a gas leak.
A1571

Figure 3-42—Printed Circuit Boards in Universal DCU

3.1 3-35 95-8533

 CAUTION! POINTWATCH CALIBRATE 1

The sensor threads can be coated with an 4 TO 20 MA IN 2

appropriate grease to ease installation. Also
lubricate the cover threads. (See “Ordering – 3
Information” for part number of recommended
SENSOR POWER
lubricant.) + 4

Connect the external wiring to the appropriate A 5

terminals on the DCU terminal wiring board. Refer to
COM 2
Figure 3-43 for terminal identification. See Figure 3- B 6
44 for an example of a Det-Tronics electrochemical
sensor connected to a DCU. 14 –
7

COM SHIELD
Attach the communication module to the standoffs as 13 –
8
shown in Figure 3-42. Connect the ribbon cable from 24 VDC
the terminal wiring board to the communication A 12 +
9
module.
COM 1
B 10 11 +
Set the address for the device. Refer to “Setting A1726

Device Network Addresses” for complete information

regarding the switch setting procedure.
Figure 3-43—Wiring Configuration for DCU
Check the wiring to ensure proper connections, then
pour the conduit seals and allow them to dry (if DCU H2S/TOXIC/O2

conduit is being used). POINTWATCH CALIBRATE 1

NOTE 4 TO 20 MA IN 2 BLACK
Before placing the cover back on the enclosure
following completion of assembly and wiring, – 3 RED
inspect the enclosure O-ring to be sure that it is
SENSOR POWER
in good condition and properly installed. + 4 GREEN
Lubricate the O-ring and the threads of the cover
with a thin coat of an appropriate grease to ease A 5
installation. Refer to the “Ordering Information”
COM 2
section for the part number of the recommended B 6
grease (available from Detector Electronics). If
the installation uses catalytic type combustible
7 14 –
gas sensors, it is imperative that lubricants
COM SHIELD
containing silicone not be used, since they will
8 13 –
cause irreversible damage to the sensor. Place 24 VDC
the cover on the enclosure. Tighten only until A 9 12 +
snug. Do not over tighten.
COM 1
B 10 11 +
Sensor Separation for DCU with H2S and O2 A1875

Sensors
Since the transmitter for the electrochemical sensor is Figure 3-44—Electrochemical Sensor Connected to DCU
already mounted within the sensor housing, simply
mount the entire sensor assembly to the sensor Table 3-13
separation kit junction box and wire it to terminals 2 Maximum Separation Distances — Electrochemical Sensor to DCU
and 4 inside the DCU, the same as a regular (without
sensor separation) installation. Connect the shield to Wire Size Maximum Wiring Distance
the ground terminal in the DCU junction box. (AWG) Feet Meters

Refer to Table 3-13 for separation distance limitations 18 5700 1750

for H2S and O2 sensors. 16 9000 2800
T0020A

3.1 3-36 95-8533

EQ22xxDCU DIGITAL COMMUNICATION UNIT DCU POINTWATCH

USED WITH POINTWATCH

POINTWATCH CALIBRATE 1 YELLOW

Determine the best mounting location for the detector.

Whenever practical, detectors should be placed 4 TO 20 MA IN 2 WHITE

where they are easily accessible for calibration.

– 3 BLACK

WARNING! SENSOR POWER

+ 4 RED

Do not apply power to the system with the cover

removed unless the area has been verified to be A 5 GREEN

free of combustible gases and vapors. COM 2

B 6

The DCU utilizes the following:

7 14 –
1. A terminal wiring board mounted at the bottom of COM SHIELD

the junction box. 8 13 –

24 VDC

2. A communication module mounted above the A 9 12 +

terminal wiring board using the standoffs COM 1

provided. See Figure 3-42. B 10 11 +

A1876

Assembly and Wiring Procedure

Figure 3-45—PointWatch Connected to DCU
Attach the PointWatch to the DCU enclosure. Do not
over-tighten. If a sensor separation kit is being used,
attach the sensor to the separation kit junction box
and wire the device as described in the “Sensor
Separation” section. Sensor Separation for DCU with PointWatch
Shielded four wire cable is recommended for
Refer to the PointWatch instruction manual (form connecting the detector junction box to the DCU.
number 95-8440) for complete installation and Cable with a foil shield is recommended. The shield
application information. of the cable should be open at the detector junction
box and connected to earth ground at the DCU
Refer to Figure 3-45 when wiring a PointWatch IR gas junction box.
detector and a DCU. The wiring code for PointWatch
is: NOTE
Red = + (24 vdc) To ensure proper operation, it is essential to
Black = – (common) maintain a minimum of 18 vdc (including ripple)
White = 4 to 20 ma signal at the PointWatch detector.
Yellow = Calibration input
Green = Chassis ground

Set the address for the device. Refer to “Setting

Device Network Addresses” for complete information
regarding the switch setting procedure.

3.1 3-37 95-8533

EQ22xxDCUEX DIGITAL COMMUNICATION UNIT
(USED WITH DET-TRONICS COMBUSTIBLE GAS
SENSORS)
MOUNTING
Determine the best mounting location for the device.
Whenever practical, the device should be placed
where it can easily be reached for calibration.
IMPORTANT!
Always orient the junction box with the sensor
pointing down.
7. Plug the sensor into P2 on the transmitter board.
8. Mount the transmitter board to the terminal wiring
board and attach with the standoffs.
NOTE
Be sure to note the correct orientation of the
transmitter board. If the transmitter board is
rotated 180° from proper orientation, the device
will not operate correctly — a LON
communication fault will result. See Figure 3-47.
9. Plug the ribbon cable into the communication
module and re-attach it to the transmitter board.

WARNING! 10. Set the device network address. (See “Setting

Device Network Addresses” in this section.)
Do not apply power to the system with the cover
removed unless the area has been verified to be
11. Inspect the junction box O-ring to be sure that it is
free of combustible gases or vapors.
in good condition. Lubricate the O-ring and the
threads of the junction box cover with a thin coat
WIRING of silicone-free grease (available from Det-
Tronics).
1. Remove the cover from the DCUEX.
12. Replace the device cover.
CAUTION!
ALWAYS discharge static from tools and hands
by touching the device body before touching the
communication module or transmitter board. DCU TERMINAL BOARD DCU TRANSMITTER BOARD1
(MIDDLE BOARD)

POINTWATCH CALIBRATE
2. Loosen the screws on the communication module 1

and remove it from the transmitter board 2

4 TO 20 MA IN
standoffs. 2 SIG

2
– –
3. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the 3

communication module. SENSOR POWER

2
+ 4 +

4. Remove the standoffs and detach the transmitter

A
board from the terminal wiring board. Do not 5

disconnect any wiring. COM 2

B 6

5. Connect all external wiring to the terminal wiring

board. (See Figure 3-46.) 7 14 –
COM SHIELD

NOTE 8 13 –
24 VDC
Make sure the ribbon cable is connected to the
terminal wiring board. A 9 12 +
COM 1

6. Attach the sensor to the device enclosure. DO B 10 11 +

B1877
NOT overtighten.
NOTES: 1 Catalytic Combustible Gas Sensor
Plugs into Connector Pins on the
NOTE Middle Board inside the Junction Box.

If a sensor separation kit is being used, attach 2 Connections Wired at the Factory.

the sensor to the separation kit junction box.

(See Sensor Separation with DCUEX below.)
Figure 3-46—DCU Transmitter Board Connected
to Terminal Wiring Board

3.1 3-38 95-8533

 COMMUNICATION MODULE Sensor Separation with DCUEX
If the installation requires mounting the sensor in a
SWITCHES ON SAME SIDE
different location than the DCUEX, observe the
(RIGHT) following guidelines.

There are two (2) methods that can be used to

TRANSMITTER BOARD separate the sensor from the DCUEX:

Preferred Method
TERMINAL WIRING BOARD
1. Disassemble the DCUEX and remove the
transmitter board. (Refer to “Wiring” for
disassembly procedure.) Do not re-assemble at
CORRECT ORIENTATION OF TRANSMITTER BOARD this time.

2. Mount the transmitter board inside the sensor

separation junction box.
COMMUNICATION MODULE

NOTE

N G
SWITCHES ON OPPOSITE SIDES
(WRONG)
This assembly can be separated from the
DCUEX by up to 1000 feet using three conductor
18 AWG shielded cable. (Regardless of

R O
TRANSMITTER BOARD
separation distance, operating voltage at the
transmitter MUST be at least 18 vdc for proper

W
TERMINAL WIRING BOARD
device operation.) (See Figure 3-48.)

3. Mount the sensor to the separation junction box.

DO NOT overtighten. Plug the sensor into P2 on
the transmitter board.
INCORRECT ORIENTATION OF TRANSMITTER BOARD
4. Use a three conductor 18 AWG shielded cable to
connect P1 on the transmitter board to terminals
2, 3 and 4 on the DCU terminal board (See Figure
3-48). Connect the shield to the ground terminal
in the DCUEX junction box.

5. Connect all external wiring to the terminal wiring

COMMUNICATION MODULE
board inside the DCU (if not already completed).
Re-assemble the DCUEX as described in the
“Wiring” section. When completed, it should look
similar to the DCU as shown in Figure 3-42.
TRANSMITTER BOARD

6. Inspect the O-ring on the DCU and separation

junction box to be sure that they are in good
STANDOFFS (4)
condition. Lubricate the O-ring and the threads of
the junction box cover with a thin coat of silicone-
TERMINAL WIRING BOARD
free grease (available from Det-Tronics).

7. Replace the cover on the DCU and separation

B1570 junction box.

Figure 3-47—Printed Circuit Boards in Combustible Gas DCU

3.1 3-39 95-8533

 Table 3-14—Maximum Separation Distances —
Combustible Gas Sensor to DCU (Alternate Method)
+ Maximum Separation Distance
Wire Size
Feet Meters

–
GR
18 AWG (1.0 mm2)* 40 12

N
+
16 AWG (1.5 mm2)* 60 18
14 AWG (2.5 mm2)*
–

100 30
GR

12 AWG (4.0 mm2)* 150 45

N

*Approximate Metric Equivalent.

ELECTROCHEMICAL SENSOR

Alternate Method
SPARE CHASSIS
CAL CAL If the transmitter board must be mounted separate
4-20
RET
4-20
RET
from the sensor (high temperature applications, etc.),
GND

+24 +24 separate the sensor only, leaving the transmitter PC

board inside the DCUEX enclosure. When using this
installation option, see Table 3-14 for maximum wiring
distances.

Mount the sensor directly to the separation kit junction

POINTWATCH
box. Use three conductor shielded cable for the
connection between the terminal block in the
separation kit junction box and P2 on the DCUEX
P1
transmitter board. A plug with screw terminals is
provided for connecting the cable to P2 on the
transmitter board. Observe the wiring color code.
Connect the shield to the ground terminal in the
DCUEX junction box.

+
–
4 TO 20 TRANSMITTER BOARD

P2

NOTE: ALWAYS ORIENT

JUNCTION BOX WITH
CATALYTIC SENSOR
POINTING DOWN.

SENSOR

B1878
CATALYTIC SENSOR

Figure 3-48—Sensor Separation Kits

3.1 3-40 95-8533

EQ25xxARM SERIES AGENT RELEASE MODULE Terminals 5 to 10 — LON signaling circuit
terminals
Mounting
NOTE
The device should be securely mounted to a vibration
Be sure to observe polarity when wiring the LON.
free surface. (See “Specifications” in this manual for
device dimensions.)
5— “A” side of signaling
circuit for COM 2
Wiring
To ensure proper operating voltage for the output 6— “B” side of signaling
device, the maximum wiring length from power circuit for COM 2
source to device must not exceed the values shown
in Table 3-15 for automatic release applications or 7 and 8 — s h i e l d
Table 3-16 for deluge and pre-action applications. connections

NOTE 9— “A” side of signaling

For solenoids, this wire length includes both the circuit for COM 1
wiring from power supply to device, and the
10 — “B” side of signaling
wiring from device to solenoid. For squibs, use
circuit for COM 1
only the wire length from power supply to
module, since the resistance of the wire from Terminals 11 to 14 — 24 vdc power input
module to squib is included when determining
the value of the compensating resistor. Connect module power
supply to terminals 12 and
See Figure 3-49 for identification of wiring terminals. 13.

Terminals 1 to 4 — Output terminals NOTE

If an auxiliary output supply is used for powering
Connect a single solenoid solenoids, it should be connected to terminals 11
between terminals 1 and 4. and 14.
Connect dual solenoids
between terminals 1 and 2,
and between terminals 3 and
4.

NOTE
Table 3-15—Maximum Wiring Length for Automatic Release
For testing purposes, a load resistor of 1200 to Applications
1500 ohms @ 1 watt can be placed across
terminals 1 and 4. Device Maximum Wire Length in Feet
12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG
When using an explosive 890181* 150 100 60
initiator, connect the resistor 899175* 150 100 60
between terminals 1 and 2
895630-000* 150 100 60
and the initiator between
terminals 3 and 4, as shown 897494* 190 120 75
in Figure 3-49. 486500-001* 1500 1000 600 400
31-199932-004* 150 100 60
CAUTION! Squib 190 120 75
DO NOT intermix different types of initiators in 2 Amp Load 190 120 75
release circuit.
*Fenwal Solenoid

3.1 3-41 95-8533

 Table 3-16—Maximum Wiring Length for FM Approved Solenoids for Deluge and Pre-Action Applications

Solenoids Maximum Wire Length in Feet (Meters)

FM Solenoid Group Manufacturer Model 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG

B ASCO T8210A107 183 (56) 115 (35) 72 (22) 46 (14)

D ASCO 8210G207 314 (96) 198 (60) 124 (38) 78 (24)
E Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
F Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2 130 (40) 82 (25) 51 (16) 32 (10)
G Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
H Viking HV-274-0601 180 (55) 110 (34) 70 (21) 45(14)

SINGLE DUAL
SOLENOID SOLENOIDS

+ 1

– 2

+ 3

– 4

A 5

COM 2
B 6

7 14 –
COM SHIELD

8 13 –
24 VDC

A 9 12 +
COM 1
B 10 11 +

NOTE:
TERMINALS 12 AND 13 ARE FOR MODULE POWER SUPPLY.
TERMINALS 11 AND 14 ARE FOR AUXILIARY OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY.
JUMPERS JP2 AND JP3 MUST BE REMOVED IF AN AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY IS USED.

EXPLOSIVE INITIATOR OPTION

SEE NOTE 2.

NOTES:
1. JUMPER JP1 MUST BE REMOVED IF EXPLOSIVE INITIATOR IS USED.

2. RESISTOR IS USED TO COMPENSATE FOR 10 OHMS CIRCUIT RESISTANCE.

RESISTOR MUST BE RATED 1 WATT MINIMUM (WIRE-WOUND RESISTOR PREFERRED).
WHEN MEASURING THE TOTAL RELEASE CIRCUIT RESISTANCE,
USE AN OHM METER WITH A CURRENT OUTPUT OF 10 MA MAXIMUM.

3. MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EXPLOSIVE INITIATORS PER CIRCUIT IS 12.

EACH CIRCUIT MUST NOT EXCEED 10 OHMS INCLUDING CABLE RESISTANCE. B1900

Figure 3-49—Wiring Configuration for Agent Release Module

3.1 3-42 95-8533

Supervised Output for Deluge and Pre-action
Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
on the terminal block. See Figure 3-49. Wire one or JP1
more releasing devices to the module output. JP2
11 12 13 14
JP3
The output of the Agent Release Module supervises
the releasing circuit via the coil of the releasing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
solenoid. It is essential to use a releasing device
approved for use with this output module.

NOTE
This type of output does not require the use of A1902

EOL resistors or diodes to supervise the circuit.

Figure 3-50—Agent Release Module Wiring Terminals and Jumpers

The output can be configured for latching, continuous
or timed response.

To ensure proper operating voltage, the input voltage

to the release module must be in the range from 21 to EQ25xxSAM SERIES SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE
30 vdc and the maximum wiring length must not
exceed the values shown in Table 3-16 for deluge Mounting
and pre-action applications. Per FM Approval The device should be securely mounted to a vibration
requirements, the secondary power must provide free surface. (See “Specifications” in this manual for
capacity for a 90 hour minimum standby operation device dimensions.)
followed by a minimum of 10 minutes of releasing and
alarm operation. The initiating device circuit(s) for
use with the deluge and pre-action system Wiring
configuration must be wired within 20 feet and in
conduit from an IDC or DCIO. In addition, power for IMPORTANT!
the device(s) must be per NFPA 72 Class A wiring
techniques. To ensure adequate operating voltage for the
signaling device, the maximum wiring length
from the power source to the output device must
Jumpers not exceed the values shown in Table 3-17.
Terminals 13 and 14 are connected by jumper JP2 (This wire length includes both the wiring from
and terminals 11 and 12 are connected by jumper the power supply to the signal audible module
JP3. These two jumpers (JP2 and JP3) must be cut if and the wiring from the module to the signaling
an auxiliary output power supply is being used. (See device.)
Figure 3-50 for jumper locations.)
See Figure 3-51 for identification of wiring terminals.
When an explosive initiator is being used, jumper JP1
must be cut. If a solenoid is used, the jumper must
remain in. Table 3-17—Maximum Wiring Length
from Nominal 24 VDC Power Source to Signaling Device
Address Setting
Set the device network address. (See “Setting Device Maximum Wire Length in Feet (Meters)
Network Addresses” in this section.) 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG
(4 mm2)* (2.5 mm2)* (1.5 mm2)*
One 2 Ampere Load 190 (58) 120 (37) 75 (23)
Two 2 Ampere Loads 95 (29) 60 (18) 35 (11)

* Approximate Metric Equivalent. T0029A

3.1 3-43 95-8533

Terminals 1 to 4 — Output terminals
+ 1

OUTPUT 1* 10K EOL

Connect the first output
–
device between terminals 1 2

and 2, and the second

+
between terminals 3 and 4. 3

OUTPUT 2* 10K EOL

–
NOTE 4

Polarity shown in Figure 3-51 is for monitoring

A
condition; polarity is reversed when activated. 5

COM 2
B
Each circuit must have a 10 6

kohm EOL resistor.

7 14 –
Terminals 5 to 10 — LON signaling circuit COM SHIELD

terminals 8 13 –
24 VDC

Be sure to observe polarity A 9 12 +

when wiring the LON. COM 1
B 10 11 +
5— “A” side of signaling B1901

circuit for COM 2 * POLARITY SHOWN IS FOR MONITORING CONDITION,

POLARITY IS REVERSED WHEN ACTIVATED.

6— “B” side of signaling NOTE:

TERMINALS 12 AND 13 ARE FOR MODULE POWER SUPPLY.
circuit for COM 2 TERMINALS 11 AND 14 ARE FOR AUXILIARY OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY.
JUMPERS JP1 AND JP2 MUST BE REMOVED IF AN AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY IS USED.

7 and 8 — s h i e l d
Figure 3-51—Wiring Configuration for Signal Audible Module
connections

9— “A” side of signaling

circuit for COM 1

10 — “B” side of signaling

circuit for COM 1

Terminals 11 to 14 — 24 vdc power input

Connect the module power

supply to terminals 12 and
13. If an auxiliary output
supply is used for powering
signaling devices, it should
be connected to terminals 11
and 14.

Jumpers
JP1
Terminals 13 and 14 are connected by jumper JP2 11 12 13 14
JP2
and terminals 11 and 12 are connected by jumper
JP1. These two jumpers (JP1 and JP2) must be cut if
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
an auxiliary output power supply is being used. (See
Figure 3-52) for jumper locations.

Address Setting
B1903
Set device network address. (See “Setting Device
Network Addresses” in this section.) Figure 3-52—Signal Audible Module Wiring Terminals and Jumpers

3.1 3-44 95-8533

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SETTING DEVICE NETWORK ADDRESSES BINARY
VALUE 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128

Overview of Network Addresses

NODE ADDRESS EQUALS THE ADDED VALUE OPEN = OFF
Each device on the LON must be assigned a unique OF ALL CLOSED ROCKER SWITCHES CLOSED = ON
A2190
address. Addresses 1 to 4 are reserved for the
controller. Valid addresses for field devices are from
Figure 3-54—Address Switch for DCIO and Relay Module
5 to 250.

IMPORTANT
If the address is set to zero or an address above
250, the communication module will ignore the
switch setting.
Duplicated addresses are not automatically detected.
Modules given the same address will use the number
given and report to the controller using that address.
The status word will show the latest update, which
could be from any of the reporting modules using that
address.
Setting Field Device Addresses
Selection of the node address for field devices is
done by setting rocker switches on an 8 switch “DIP
Switch” within each device’s housing.
NOTE
Only the first eight of the 12 switches are used
for selecting the device address.
The address number is binary encoded with each
switch having a specific binary value with switch 1
being the LSB (Least Significant Bit). (See Figure 3-
53) The device’s LON address is equal to the added
value of all closed rocker switches. All “Open”
switches are ignored.
Example: for node No. 5, close rocker switches 1
and 3 (binary values 1 + 4); for node No. 25, close
rocker switches 1, 4 and 5 (binary values 1 + 8 + 16).
NOTE
The field device sets the LON address only when
power is applied to the device. Therefore, it is
important to set the switches before applying
power. If an address is ever changed, system
power must be cycled before the new address
will take effect.
After setting address switches, record the address
number and device type on the “Address
Identification Chart” provided with this manual. Post
the chart in a convenient location near the Controller
for future reference.
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Figure 3-55 is a simplified drawing of a typical EQP
system. This system includes an EQP Controller,
DCIO and various LON field devices.

NOTE
The address switches in the DCIO module and
relay module appear slightly different than those
in other devices. Refer to Figure 3-54.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4

OPEN OPEN
BINARY
VALUE 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
LEAVE IN
OPEN POSITION
NODE ADDRESS EQUALS THE ADDED VALUE OPEN = OFF
OF ALL CLOSED ROCKER SWITCHES CLOSED = ON
A1557

Figure 3-53—Field Device Address Switches for

ARM, SAM, DCU and IDC

3.1 3-45 95-8533

3.1
+ +
– –
– POWER –
+ DISTRIBUTION + X3301 / X5200 / X2200 / X9800
+ Flame Detectors
–
+ – + –
CONTROLLER EQ3700DCIO* EQ2100PSM EQ2200IDC EQ3720RM
P1 P1 P1
6 SHIELD 3 4 SHIELD 9 13 SHIELD 3 13 SHIELD 3 3 SHIELD 6

4 24 VDC – 2 5 24 VDC – 2 6 24 VDC – 7 13 24 VDC – 14 11 24 VDC – 1 11 24 VDC – 1 2 24 VDC – 5

3 24 VDC + 1 4 24 VDC + 1 5 24 VDC + 8 11 24 VDC + 12 12 24 VDC + 2 12 24 VDC + 2 1 24 VDC + 4

P7 P2
P2
COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1

51 SHIELD 48 6 SHIELD 3 12 SHIELD 1 7 SHIELD 8 16 SHIELD 6 16 SHIELD 6 6 SHIELD 3

52 B 49 5 B 2 11 B 3 6 B 10 14 B 4 14 B 4 5 B 2

53 A 50 4 A 1 10 A 2 5 A 9 15 A 5 15 A 5 4 A 1
P6
SHUNT P3
C 45
C 1 N CIRCUIT 1 + 1
FAULT NO 46 P4 P3
B 2 CIRCUIT 1 – 2
NC 47 A + SUPPLY A AC LINE
P9 P8 3 CIRCUIT 2 + 3
B IN–/OUT+ B + –

CH 1

CH 5
GND 5 57 GND GND 54 24 VDC 4 H CIRCUIT 2 – 4
C COMMON C SUPPLY
RXD 2 58 RxD B 55
TXD 3 59 TxD A 56 A + SUPPLY A

3-46
DB-9 H N
P2 P3
CONNECTION B IN–/OUT+ B AC LINE

CH 6
CH 2
TO COM PORT 5 1+ 5+ 13
OF PC
6 1– 5– 14 C COMMON C
+ –
7 2+ 6+ 15
A + SUPPLY A 24 VDC
8 2– 6– 16 BATTERY
B IN–/OUT+ B

CH 3

CH 7
9 3+ 7+ 17 EQ24xxNE EQ22xxDCU PIRECL EQ25xxARM EQ25xxSAM
10 3– 7– 18 C COMMON C
4 SHIELD 9 6 SHIELD 3
11 4+ 8+ 19

DIGITAL INPUTS
A + SUPPLY A
12 4– 8– 20 6 24 VDC – 7 13 24 VDC – 14 4 24 VDC – 1 13 24 VDC – 14 13 24 VDC – 14
B IN–/OUT+ B

CH 4

CH 8
P4 P5 5 24 VDC + 8 11 24 VDC + 12 5 24 VDC + 2 11 24 VDC + 12 11 24 VDC + 12
21 C C 33 C COMMON C
COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1
22 NO NO 34

RELAY 1
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD

RELAY 5
12 1 7 8 12 9 7 8 7 8
23 NC NC 35
* LON AND POWER TERMINALS
24 C C 36 ALSO VALID FOR AIM, IPM, RM. 11 B 3 6 B 10 11 B 8 6 B 10 6 B 10
SEE INDIVIDUAL DEVICE FOR
25 NO NO 37 CHANNEL TERMINALS.
A A A A A

RELAY 2
10 2 5 9 10 7 5 9 5 9

RELAY 6
26 NC NC 38

27 C C 39 POINTWATCH
CALIBRATE 1 CALIBRATE 13 + 1 OUTPUT 1 + 1
28 NO NO 40

RELAY 3
4 TO 20 MA IN

RELAY 7
2 – 2 OUTPUT 1 – 2
29 NC NC 41
– 3 + 3 OUTPUT 2 + 3
30 C C 42 SENSOR
DUAL SOLENOIDS
SINGLE SOLENOID

POWER
31 NO NO 43 + 4 – 4 OUTPUT 2 – 4

RELAY 8

RELAY 4
B2100
32 NC NC 44

95-8533
Figure 3-55—A Typical System
 Section 4 Enter chooses the menu item selected, and
advances the menu to the next options list. (See
Operation “Controller Menu Options“ in this section for additional
information.)

SYSTEM CONTROLLER NOTE

Pressing Enter while alarms are actively scrolling
PUSHBUTTONS returns the display to the Main Menu.

The Controller has seven pushbuttons (located on the
front panel) for user interface. These pushbuttons
allow the operator to interact with the Controller to
respond to alarms and system status conditions,
access system status reports, and configure
Controller time and date settings.
The following paragraphs describe the function of
each pushbutton. Refer to Figure 4-1 for Controller
pushbutton locations.
Cancel cancels the selected command, and returns
the menu to the last option list displayed.
NOTE
Pressing and holding Cancel and Enter initiates
a lamp test.
Next allows the operator to scroll through options
listed within each menu. Each time the NEXT
pushbutton is pushed, the current options list indexes
up one list item. (See “Controller Menu Options” in
this section for additional information)
Previous allows the operator to scroll through options
listed within each menu. Each time the PREVIOUS
pushbutton is pushed, the current options list indexes
down one list item. (See “Controller Menu Options” in
this section for additional information)
Reset resets all controller latched outputs that are no
longer active.
Acknowledge silences the internal beeper.
Silence turns on the Silence LED and sets Silence
status in user logic.

DET-TRONICS
®

EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER

Safety System Controller
Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

Time & Date

High Gas Cntrl Flt Output Inhibit Supervisory

16:38:55
Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence
JAN 11/2002

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

Figure 4-1—EQP Controller Pushbutton Locations

3.1 4-1 95-8533

CONTROLLER STATUS INDICATORS CONTROLLER MENU OPTIONS
System status is visually displayed on the Controller The Controller is designed to display system status
in two ways — through the use of a Text Display and device related information. The following
(see Figure 4-2), and through colored LED’s (see paragraphs describe how to move around within the
Table 4-1). The following paragraphs describe these controller’s menu structure to access this information
indicators and the function of each. and perform minor system settings (see Figure 4-3).

NOTE
TEXT DISPLAY
During normal operation (no alarms or trouble
The Controller uses a text based display to show conditions occurring), the display scrolls current
current system status, active Alarms and Faults. system time and date.

When an alarm or trouble condition occurs, the
display scrolls a detailed message of the condition,
including tag number, condition (alarm, trouble,
supervisory etc.) and time/date. If multiple alarms or
trouble conditions exist, the display scrolls through all
active status conditions until they go inactive and are
reset using the controller pushbutton.
Main Menu displays a list of options to access
information types available for display through the
Controller. This list also includes access to options
used to set system date and time, and diagnostics
options.

DET-TRONICS
®

EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER

Safety System Controller
Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

Det-Tronics Eagle Quantum Premier High Gas Cntrl Flt Output Inhibit Supervisory
16:38:55 JAN 11/2002
Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

Det-Tronics Eagle Quantum Premier

High Gas Cntrl Flt Output Inhibit Supervisory
16:38:55 JAN 11/2002
Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence

Figure 4-2—EQP Controller Message Display and System Status Indicator Location

Table 4-1—EQP Controller LED System Status Indicators

LED Function Status
Green Power On when power is applied.
Red Fire Alarm On (latched) when any fire alarm is active (Fire detected).
Amber Trouble On (latched) when a fault is detected in the system. (Indicates "Trouble" relay state.)
Amber Ack On when the Acknowledge button is pressed.
Amber Silence On when Silence pushbutton is pressed.
Amber Inhibit On when any device or point is inhibited.
Amber Out Inhibit On when any output is inhibited.
Red High Gas On (latched) when any gas detector is at or above the High gas alarm value.
Red Low Gas On (latched) when any gas detector is at or above the Low gas alarm value.
Amber Supervisory On (latched) when any Supervisory input is active.
Amber LON Fault On when a LON fault is detected (open or short).
Amber Contrl Fault On when a processor fault occurs.

3.1 4-2 95-8533

 Marque Display Alarm
Auto Scrolling Alarm
Enter / Cancel
Display Current Time/Date Screen
(no active alarms)

Display Alarms
Enter
Display Alarms Screen
Next
Enter Prev
Alarm Types
Cancel Display Devices*
Next Fire
Reset
Prev Supervisory Pressing the ack
Device Tagname
Trouble switch acknowledges
Add: xxx Device Type
Low Gas the visible alarm.
Fault/ No Fault
High Gas
Device dependent info Current
Inhibit
Output Inhibit Input State

Main Menu
Device Tagnames*
Display Alarms Alarm Type Off/On Visible if the
Display Devices Tag Name for Device n
Previous
Next

Enter Tag Name alarm was

Device Tagnames Tag Name for Device n
Set Time & Date Cancel Alarm Description acknowledged
Tag Name for Device n
Serial Ports Time and Date ack
Diagnostics
Redundancy Info
Set Time and Date
Next and Previous buttons are used to scroll the lists.
Edit Time/Date The Enter button is used to navigate to the next level.
The Cancel button is used to back out a level.

Serial Ports*

Configuration Port
Serial Port 1
Serial Port 2
* Submenus with more detailed information are available.
Serial Port 3
Serial Port 4
Redundancy Port

Diagnostics

Redundancy Info

Fault:
Lst Flt:
Cntr Mode:
My Config:
Redun Mem:
HSSL Status:
Version Match:
Parser:
Comm Ack:
Lon Comm:
Msg Error:
--Master Errors--
Program Flow:
LON A Inf:
LON B Inf:
User Logic CS:
App CS:
User Logic:
Config:
--Standby Errors--
Program Flow:
LON A Inf:
LON B Inf:
User Logic CS:
App CS:
User Logic:
Config:
Power 1:
Power 2:
Option Bd:

Figure 4-3—EQP Controller Message Display Menu Outline

3.1 4-3 95-8533

 Pressing the NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbuttons allows
Main Menu cycling through devices. Pressing the CANCEL
pushbutton will return the display to the Main Menu.
>Display
Display Alarms
Display Devices DEVICE TAG NAMES displays device tag name
Device Tagnames information for all devices on the LON loop.

Moving within the Main Menu is done by using the Device Tagnames
NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbuttons located on the
controller’s front panel. The menu options will scroll
Controller
upward (NEXT Pushbutton) or downward (Previous Z398-80 X
Pushbutton) while the Main Menu name remains
stationary. When the desired menu option is selected
by the “>” indicator, the ENTER pushbutton is
pressed to advance the menu display to the desired Pressing the NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbutton allows
information set. cycling through devices. Pressing the CANCEL
pushbutton will return the display to the Main Menu.
NOTE
Pressing the CANCEL pushbutton from within SET TIME AND DATE provides access to
any sub-menu returns the display to the Main configuration controls for system clock and date
Menu. The display will also return to the Main settings.
Menu if left unattended for a period of 20
minutes. If an alarm or trouble condition is
present after 20 minutes, the display will change
to the existing Alarm or Trouble message. Set Time & Date
DISPLAY ALARMS displays a list of existing Alarms 11:20:52
and Trouble conditions. Moving within this menu is Jul 29 / 2002
done by using the NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbuttons.

NOTE
Alarm Type Off/On
Off On When the Set Time and Date menu opens, the
Tag Name current hour will flash.
Alarm Description
To move within this menu, press the ENTER
Time & Date ack pushbutton until the desired property is flashing. To
set the desired property value, press the NEXT
Pushbutton to increase or PREVIOUS Pushbutton to
NOTE decrease the value. When the desired value is
Multiple alarm information can be viewed by displayed, press the ENTER pushbutton. This will
pressing the NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbuttons. advance the menu to the next property and it will
Pressing CANCEL will return the menu to the flash. When all desired properties have been entered,
DISPLAY ALARMS menu. press the ENTER pushbutton until the message
“Press ENTER to Save” is displayed. When the
ENTER pushbutton is pressed, the settings are saved
DISPLAY DEVICES displays device information on all
and the menu changes back to the MAIN MENU.
devices on the LON loop. Device tag name, type, and
node address are displayed.

Z398-63 U / I
Add:63 UV / IR Detect
No Fault

3.1 4-4 95-8533

SERIAL PORTS displays port information on all
available ports.
Serial Ports
Configuration Port
Serial Port 1
Serial Port 2
Pressing the NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbutton allows
cycling through ports. Pressing the CANCEL
pushbutton will return the display to the Main Menu.
DIAGNOSTICS displays information for factory field
service.
Diagnostics
HW Version: 2
Mip Rst Cnt 0 0
RX Cnt XXXXXXX
REDUNDANCY INFO displays the current status of
all redundancy related faults. It can be used to
monitor the health of the master and standby
controllers. It can also be used for diagnostic
purposes.
Redundancy faults originate from three general areas:
• Self detected internal failures of the master
controller
• Inter-controller communications
• A failure in the standby controller.
Any redundancy fault is annunciated by the master
controller, and the redundancy fault code of the
highest priority fault is displayed. The controller also
provides a diagnostic menu for more detailed
information on the source of a redundancy problem.
All redundancy related faults must be cleared to
insure proper redundancy operation.
Fault
Displays the current redundancy fault.
Lst Flt
Displays the last redundancy fault that occurred.
3.1
Cntr Mode
Indicates whether the controller is in master or
standby mode.
My Config
Indicates whether the controller is the primary or
secondary controller.
Redun Mem
Displays how long it takes to transfer the local and
global memory between controllers.
HSSL Status
An error is generated when a problem is detected on
the high-speed communication link between
controllers. This fault is annunciated when the
standby controller is offline.
Version Match
To ensure proper redundant operation, the firmware
versions of redundant controllers must match. This
error is set when a mis-match is detected. Consult
the factory for firmware upgrades.
Parser
As the master controller configures a standby
controller, configuration information is extracted from
non-volatile memory and checked for errors.
Comm Ack
Critical information is exchanged between controllers
on the HSSL using acknowledged messages. The
master sends data packets that contain an
embedded CRC and a transaction number. The
standby validates the message by calculating and
comparing the CRC values. If the CRC is correct the
standby saves the data and returns an acknowledge
message with the transaction number. If an
acknowledge message with the proper transaction
number is not received by the master within the
allotted time the message is resent. When all retries
are used the acknowledge error is indicted and
acknowledged communication is terminated.
4-5 95-8533
Lon Comm
Redundant controllers exchange information across
the LON network. This is primarily done to prevent
both controllers from becoming the master in the
event that the HSSL fails. The fault is annunciated
when a controller fails to receive any information from
the other controller.
Msg Error
If the standby controller receives a message from the
master that has the correct CRC but invalid data an
error message is returned. This master will indicate
the error with this fault.
Program Flow
Program flow checking ensures that essential
functions execute in the correct sequence. If any
functions don’t execute properly, or execute in the
wrong order, the program flow error is set and control
is transferred to the standby controller.
LON A/B Inf
Controllers utilize neuron co-processors to interface
with the field device network. If an error is detected in
the operation of the co-processor, a LON interface
fault is annunciated.
Config
This fault is annunciated when a controller has not
been configured or the configuration information has
been corrupted.
Power 1
Displays the power 1 status on the standby controller.
Power 2
Displays the power 2 status on the standby controller.
Option Bd
Indicates whether there is a fault on the ControlNet
option board of the standby controller.
CONTROLLER AUDIBLE ALARM
The Controller features an internal audible alarm for
local system status notification (see Table 4-2 and
Figure 4-4). When the system is operating in the
normal mode (no Alarm or Fault conditions occurring),
the alarm is silent (off). If an event (any alarm or
trouble condition) occurs, the alarm will remain active
until it is acknowledged by pressing the Acknowledge
pushbutton or reset by pressing the Reset pushbutton
on the Controller front panel.

User Logic CS
Controllers continually conduct a checksum test of Table 4-2—EQP Controller Alarm Tone Patterns
the user logic program to ensure that the data
remains unchanged. A user checksum fault is Priority Controller Tone Tone Pattern
annunciated if the result is incorrect.
1 Fire Alarm Temporal

App CS 2 Supervisory Supervisory

When the controller firmware is generated a 3 Trouble Trouble

checksum of the program is calculated and saved in
4 High Gas Gas
memory. Each controller is continually conducting a
checksum test of the program to ensure that the data 5 Low Gas Gas
remains unchanged. The application checksum fault 6 Normal Off
is annunciated if the result is incorrect.

User Logic
Many checks are conducted while the controller
interprets and executes the user program. The user
logic error is generated if invalid or out of range data
is detected.

3.1 4-6 95-8533

 0.5 SEC 0.5 SEC 1.5 SEC SEQUENCE OF EVENTS DURING A
CONFIGURATION DATA DOWNLOAD
FIRE
ALARM During a configuration download, the controller
receives configuration data that is stored into flash
0.1 SEC 0.1 SEC
memory. During the download process, the controller
2.0 SEC halts normal operation and resets a number of
SUPERVISORY
controller functions. Items affected and displayed
during a configuration data download are listed in the
0.5 SEC following steps:
5.0 SEC
1. Halt the static logic and user logic programs.
TROUBLE

0.5 SEC 0.5 SEC 3.0 SEC 2. Ignore field device LON communications.
However, the controller continues to generate the
LON heartbeat.
GAS
B1855

3. Silence the Controller’s audible annunciator.

Figure 4-4—Tone Pattern for Controller Buzzer
4. Initiate a Trouble condition that is signaled by the
amber Trouble LED and relay.

5. Clear all Alarm and Fault events.

NOTE
6. De-energize all 8 Controller relays.
If multiple alarms are present, “Acknowledging”
will silence the audible alarms.
7. Ignore Modbus communication.

CONTROLNET STATUS INDICATORS

(Optional)
The optional ControlNet status indicator LEDs function
as follows: (see Table 4-3)
Steady - The indicator is on continuously in the
defined state.
Alternating - The two indicators alternate between the
two defined states at the same time (applies to both
indicators viewed together). The two indicators are
always in opposite states, out of phase.
Flashing - The indicator alternates between the two
defined states (applies to each indicator viewed
independent of the other). If both indicators are
flashing, they must flash together, in phase.

3.1 4-7 95-8533

 Table 4-3—Status of ControlNet LED Indicators

A and B Cause Action

Off No power None or power up.
Steady red Faulted unit Cycle power.
If fault persists, contact the factory.
Alternating red/green Self-test None
Alternating red/off Incorrect node configuration Check network address and other ControlNet configuration
parameters.

A or B Cause Action
Off Channel disabled Program network for redundant media, if required.
Steady green Normal operation None
Flashing green/off Temporary errors None; unit will self-correct.
Listen only Cycle power.
Flashing red/off Media fault Check media for broken cables, loose connectors,
missing terminators, etc.
No other nodes present on network Add other nodes to the network.
Flashing red/green Incorrect network configuration Cycle power or reset unit.
If fault persists, contact the factory.

8. ControlNet communication continues.
9. Text display’s first line indicates "*** Program
Mode ***"
10. Text display’s third line displays download status.
a) "Config Download" indicates the serial transfer
into memory from the PC to the Controller.
b) "Erasing Flash" indicates that the controller is
electronically erasing the entire contents of
the Flash memory.
c) "Writing to Flash" indicates that configuration
data stored in memory is being written down
into Flash memory.
12. Initialized the ControlNet option board with new
parameters.
13. Enable static logic and user logic programs to
operate. The first scan program is run first.
14. Accept field device LON communications.
15. Poll the device type variable from LON field
devices.
16. Configure LON field devices.
17. Clear the Trouble condition.
18. Text display shows a normal operation marquee
message.

d) "Flash Lock" indicates that the controller is
locking the configuration data into the Flash
memory.
CAUTION
The controller will be corrupted if power is
removed during a download. Contact the factory
if this occurs.
11. Initialize the RS-485 and configuration serial ports
with new parameters.
a) Text display’s first line indicates "Det-Tronics
Eagle Quantum Premier".
b) Text display’s third line displays time (24 hour
format) and date (month day/year).
NOTE
Depending on the condition of the LON devices,
faults may persist for a number of minutes.

3.1 4-8 95-8533

CONTROLLER REDUNDANCY 6. If there are no faults present, the primary
controller defaults to the master controller and the
Pushbuttons secondary controller defaults to the standby
controller.
The pushbuttons are active on the master controller
and inactive on the standby controller.
7. The master controller executes user logic and
communicates with the connected LON devices.
Controller Status Indicators
8. The standby controller indicates that it is in
The status indicators are active on the master
standby mode and monitors the master controller.
controller. All LEDs except the power LED are off and
the trouble relay is in the no trouble state.
9. The master and standby controller go through a
synchronization process.
Controller Relay Operation
10. The power-up sequence is complete.
The controller relays are fully functional on the master
controller and the standby controller.
Synchronization
Text Display When a master controller detects a standby controller
on the HSSL, it performs the following synchronization
The text display on the master controller is fully
process:
functional as explained in the previous section. The
text display on the standby controller reads **Standby
1. Compare controller firmware versions. If the
Mode**, Ready.
firmware versions are not an exact match, the
process stops and a fault is generated.
Controller Menu Options
2. Standby controller indicates the synchronization
The menu options are active on the master controller
steps.
and inactive on the standby controller.
3. Compare the user application programs. If there
ControlNet Status Indicators is a mis-match, the master will configure the
standby controller via the HSSL.
The ControlNet status indicators are active on the
master and standby controller. See Table 4-3 for
4. Initiate the data synchronization process.
details.
5. Transfer the status of device inhibits and device
Power-up Sequence removes.
The power-up sequence for a redundant controller
6. Transfer the complete alarm list, including alarm
pair is as follows:
history.
1. Make sure the LON and HSSL are connected
7. Transfer the real time clock (RTC) value.
correctly.
8. Copy the local and global memory to the standby
2. Apply power to both controllers.
controller.
3. Controllers go through their boot-up routine.
9. Synchronization is complete and the standby
controller indicates “Ready”.
4. The controller that is connected with the primary
end of the HSSL is identified as the primary
controller and is assigned address 1. Sequence of Events During a Configuration
Download
5. The controller that is connected with the
When downloading a new configuration to the master
secondary end of the HSSL is identified as the
controller, the following sequence is executed:
secondary controller and is assigned address 2.
1. The S3 software must be connected to the master
controller.

3.1 4-9 95-8533

2. Alter the configuration and execute the download Automatic Switchover
command from S3.
An automatic transfer will be initiated if the master
controller goes into an error (self detected internal
3. The master controller goes into ‘Program’ mode
controller failure, program flow error in the controller,
and passes mastership to the standby controller.
user logic checksum error or application checksum
error). An automatic switchover executes the following
4. The updated configuration file is loaded into the
sequence:
controller.
1. Check that the standby controller is online by
5. The controllers are automatically forced to switch
verifying that HSSL communication is good and
over.
there are no internal faults in the standby
controller.
6. The master controller puts the standby controller
into ‘Program’ mode and downloads the
2. Verify that the synchronization process is
configuration.
complete.
7. The controller indicates “Device Download
3. The master requests the standby to take control.
Active” until the LON devices have been
successfully updated.
4. The standby takes control and becomes the
master.
8. The configuration download is now complete.

WARNING Replacing a Faulty Controller

The system is not executing logic/alarm functions
If the master controller fails and the standby controller
during a program download.
is healthy, an automatic switchover will occur. To
replace the failed controller, perform the following
Manual Switchover steps:
The user can request a manual switchover from an
1. Remove power. Disconnect plugs and remove
externally wired switch. The request executes the
the failed controller.
following sequence:
2. Mount the new controller.
1. Verify that HSSL communication is good and
there are no internal faults in the standby
3. Connect the LON to the new controller.
controller.
4. Connect the HSSL.
2. Verify that the synchronization process is
complete.
5. Connect any other I/O used.
3. The master requests the standby to take control.
6. Apply power to the controller.
4. The standby takes control and becomes the
7. A controller synchronization occurs and the new
master.
controller is configured and indicates “Ready” as
the standby controller.
5. The controller indicates “Device Download
Active” until the LON devices have been
8. If preferred, perform a manual switchover to
successfully updated.
return the primary controller to the master status.

3.1 4-10 95-8533

8 CHANNEL DCIO MODULE
The DCIO Module (see Figure 4-5) has 18 LED status
indicators, two for the device and two for each
channel, located on the front panel. Refer to Tables
4-4 and 4-5 for a description of the LED indicators.
POWER-UP SEQUENCE
Set the module address switch prior to applying power.
DCIO module power-up sequence illuminates the
LEDs for the device and all of its channels. First the
power and fault LEDs are illuminated, indicating that
the device is in a power-up mode. Next the LEDs are
illuminated in the following sequences:
• Sequentially each channel active red LED is
illuminated, starting with channel 1 and continuing
through channel 8.
• When the red LED for channel 8 is illuminated,
sequentially each channel active red LED is turned
off, starting with channel 1 and contrinuing through
channel 8.
• Next, the channel fault amber LEDs are tested in the
same manner as the channel active red LEDs.
When all the LEDs have been illuminated, the DCIO
module displays the device’s LON address by
illuminating the channel active red LED. LON dip
switches 1 though 8 will be displayed on channels 1
through 8. When a dip switch is set to the ON
position, the channel active red LED will be
illuminated. The address is displayed for two
seconds.
Once the address has been displayed, the device’s
fault LED will turn off.
After the power-up sequence, the device will either
display an unconfigured state or normal operation
state. In the unconfigured state, the channel fault
amber LEDs flash ON and OFF at the same rate for all
channels.
STATUS INDICATOR LEDs
Figure 4-5—DCIO Module Status Indicator Location
3.1
Table 4-4—DCIO Module - Device Status Indicators
LED Device Status
Green On when power is present.
Amber When On steady indicates device is disabled or
must be replaced. Possible Watchdog Timer
problem.
Note
Blinks one time at power-up.
Table 4-5—DCIO Module - Channel Status Indicators
LED Channel Status
Red When On steady indicates the input circuit is
closed or the output circuit is active.
Amber When Blinking indicates a low power condition is
present or channel is not properly configured.
Steady indicates a channel fault.
8 CHANNEL RELAY MODULE
The Relay Module (see Figure 4-6) has 18 LED status
indicators, two for the device and two for each
channel, located on the front panel. Refer to Tables
4-6 and 4-7 for a description of the LED indicators.
POWER-UP SEQUENCE
Set the module address switch prior to applying power.
Relay module power-up sequence illuminates the
LEDs for the device and all of its channels. First the
power and fault LEDs are illuminated, indicating that
the device is in a power-up mode. Next the LEDs are
illuminated in the following sequences:
• Sequentially each channel active red LED is
illuminated, starting with channel 1 and continuing
through channel 8.
• When the red LED for channel 8 is illuminated,
sequentially each channel active red LED is turned
off, starting with channel 1 and continuing through
channel 8.
• Next, the channel fault amber LEDs are tested in the
same manner as the channel active red LEDs.
When all the LEDs have been illuminated, the relay
module displays the device’s LON address by
illuminating the channel active red LED. LON dip
switches 1 through 8 will be displayed on channels 1
through 8. When a dip switch is set to the ON
position, the channel active red LED will be
illuminated. The address is displayed for two
seconds.
4-11 95-8533
Once the address has been displayed, the device’s
fault LED will turn off.
After the power-up sequence, the device will either
display an unconfigured state or normal operation
state. In the unconfigured state, the channel fault
amber LEDs flash ON and OFF at the same rate for all
channels.
ANALOG INPUT MODULE
The Analog Input Module (see Figure 4-7) has 18 LED
status indicators, two for the device and two for each
channel, located on the front panel. Refer to Tables
4-8 and 4-9 for a description of the LED indicators.
POWER-UP SEQUENCE

Table 4-6—Relay Module - Device Status Indicators

Set the module address switch prior to applying power.

LED Device Status The Analog Input Module power-up sequence

Green On when power is present.
illuminates the LEDs for the device and all of its
channels. First the power and fault LEDs are
Amber When On steady indicates device is disabled or
must be replaced. Possible Watchdog Timer
illuminated, indicating that the device is in a power-up
problem. mode. Next the LEDs are illuminated in the following
Note sequences:
Blinks one time at power-up. • Sequentially each channel active red LED is
illuminated, starting with channel 1 and continuing
through channel 8.
• When the red LED for channel 8 is illuminated,
Table 4-7—Relay Module - Channel Status Indicators
sequentially each channel active red LED is turned
LED Channel Status off, starting with channel 1 and continuing through
channel 8.
Red When On steady indicates the output circuit is
active. • Next, the channel fault amber LEDs are tested in the
Amber When Blinking indicates a low power condition is same manner as the channel active red LEDs.
present or channel is not properly configured.
When all the LEDs have been illuminated, the analog
input module displays the device’s LON address by
illuminating the channel active red LED. LON dip
switches 1 through 8 will be displayed on channels 1
through 8. When a dip switch is set to the ON
STATUS INDICATOR LEDs
position, the channel active red LED will be
illuminated. The address is displayed for two
seconds.

Figure 4-6—Relay Module Status Indicator Location

3.1 4-12 95-8533

Once the address has been displayed, the device’s
fault LED will turn off.
After the power-up sequence, the device will either
display an unconfigured state or normal operation
state. In the unconfigured state, the channel fault
amber LEDs flash ON and OFF at the same rate for all
channels.
Table 4-8—Analog Input Module - Device Status Indicators
INTELLIGENT PROTECTION MODULE
The Intelligent Protection Module (see Figure 4-8) has
18 LED status indicators, two for the device and two
for each channel, located on the front panel. Refer to
Tables 4-10 and 4-11 for a description of the LED
indicators.
POWER-UP SEQUENCE
Set the module address switch prior to applying power.

LED Device Status The Intelligent Protection Module power-up sequence

illuminates the LEDs for the device and all of its
Green On when power is present. channels. First the power and fault LEDs are
Amber When On steady indicates device is disabled or illuminated, indicating that the device is in a power-up
must be replaced. Possible Watchdog Timer mode. Next the LEDs are illuminated in the following
problem. sequences:
Note
Blinks one time at power-up. • Sequentially each channel active red LED is
illuminated, starting with channel 1 and continuing
through channel 8.
• When the red LED for channel 8 is illuminated,
Table 4-9—Analog Input Module - Channel Status Indicators sequentially each channel active red LED is turned
LED Channel Status
off, starting with channel 1 and continuing through
channel 8.
Red When Blinking indicates a low alarm.
When On Steady indicates a high alarm. • Next, the channel fault amber LEDs are tested in the
Amber When Blinking indicates a low power condition is same manner as the channel active red LEDs.
present or channel is not properly configured.
On steady indicates out of range condition. When all the LEDs have been illuminated, the
intelligent protection module displays the device’s
LON address by illuminating the channel active red
LED. LON dip switches 1 through 8 will be displayed
on channels 1 through 8. When a dip switch is set to
the ON position, the channel active red LED will be
illuminated. The address is displayed for two
STATUS INDICATOR LEDs
seconds.

Once the address has been displayed, the device’s

fault LED will turn off.

After the power-up sequence, the device will either

display an unconfigured state or normal operation
state. In the unconfigured state, the channel fault
Figure 4-7—Analog Input Module Status Indicator Location amber LEDs flash ON and OFF at the same rate for all
channels.

STATUS INDICATOR LEDs

Figure 4-8—Intelligent Protection Module Status Indicator Location

3.1 4-13 95-8533

Table 4-10—Intelligent Protection Module - Device Status Indicators
LED Device Status
Green On when power is present.
Amber When On steady indicates device is disabled or
must be replaced. Possible Watchdog Timer
problem.
Note
Blinks one time at power-up.
Table 4-11—Intelligent Protection Module - Channel Status Indicators
LED Channel Status
Red When On steady indicates the input circuit is
closed or the output circuit is active.
Amber When Blinking indicates a low power condition is
present or channel is not properly configured.
Steady indicates a channel fault.
EMBEDDED LOGIC – PURPOSE
The IPM employs an “Embedded logic” feature that
when activated during module configuration can
ensure a local level of protection for the hazard during
times where communication with the EQP Controller is
lost or the EQP Controller is offline for repair or
replacement.
EMBEDDED LOGIC – CONTROL TRANSFER
SEQUENCE DESCRIPTION
A user configurable selection is provided to choose
the operational mode of the IPM. Three modes are
provided, two of which utilize the embedded logic
feature.
If enabled, the embedded logic is armed at all times
but control of the outputs depends on the selected
mode.
In the “back-up mode” control of the IPM outputs
transfers to the IPM’s embedded logic in the event of
an IPM diagnosed loss of communications between
itself and the EQP Controller.
An IPM diagnosed resumption of normal
communications with the Controller will cause control
of the IPM outputs to transfer back to the Controller
unless a release sequence has been initiated and is
not yet complete.
3.1
NOTE
Once a release sequence has been initiated
within the embedded logic, the sequence will
continue until it is complete.
When the embedded logic sequence is complete, a
“Manual Reset Required” status condition will be
reported by the IPM. User logic within the EQP
Controller must be utilized to send a “Reset”
command to the IPM that will reset all timers, latches,
etc. to their normal state.
If a Detector Electronics S3 Operator Interface Station
(OIS) is attached to the EQP Controller, the point
display for the IPM can be used to send a reset
command.
NOTE
The IPM will not accept a reset command if the
“Manual Release” input is in the “alarm” state.
EMBEDDED LOGIC – S3 CONFIGURABLE
OPTIONS
The IPM has various configurable options, selected
during node configuration in the S 3 software
package.
Embedded Logic Selection: The IPM has 3
operation modes, Controller Only, Back-up Mode,
Embedded Only.
Controller Only: In this mode the I/O of the IPM will
be controlled from the EQP Controller only and
embedded logic is inactive.
Back-up Mode: (The default selection) the IPM I/O is
normally controlled by the EQP Controller but utilizes
embedded logic in accordance with the “Control
Transfer Sequence Description” to control its I/O
under certain circumstances.
Embedded Only: In this mode the IPM continuously
operates from its embedded logic. The status of all
IPM I/O is available to the EQP Controller but control
of the outputs are not; however, controller and S3
reset commands are accepted.
Detection Style – Single or Cross Zoned: A
software selection allows either “1 zone release” or “2
zone release” (cross-zoned) operation.
4-14 95-8533
Manual Release Action – Delayed or Not Delayed:
A software selection allows the Manual Release input
of the module, channel 2, to be delayed or not
delayed. If not delayed, release is immediate. If
delayed, the signal will utilize the time delay selected
for the release circuits but with a 30-second
maximum.
Release Circuit Delay Selection: A time delay is
available from when the inputs (channels 2, 4 or 5) go
active until the releasing outputs (channels 7 and 8)
go active. The bell output (channel 6) is activated
immediately when an input becomes active. The time
delay selection choices are listed below:
0 Second
10 Seconds
20 Seconds
30 Seconds
40 Seconds
50 Seconds
60 Seconds
NOTE
Manual release is limited to 30 seconds, even if
40, 50 or 60 seconds time delay is selected.
Abort Mode Selection: The IPM abort input, channel
1, is software configurable to use any one of three
modes of operation. These three modes operate as
follows:
Mode 1: Upon activation, the delay timer will count
down to and hold at 10 seconds; upon release,
timer will continue to count down to zero. Only
this mode complies with UL 864.
Mode 2: Upon activation the delay timer will reset
to its initial value and on release will continue
counting down to zero.
IRI Mode: Functions similar to “Mode 1” except the
abort will only function if activated prior to a
second alarm.
EMBEDDED LOGIC – OPERATION
Supervisory Condition: The supervisory input on
channel 3 has no embedded logic function and is
passed on as information only to the EQP Controller
where it is displayed as a supervisory fault.
Alarm Condition - Single Zone Mode: Upon receipt
of an alarm from an activated detector on IPM
channel 4 or 5 OR activation of the manual station,
channel 2:
Signal circuit devices are activated per the
software selected signaling circuit configuration
described earlier – Bell Circuit Channel 6.
Programmed release time delay activated.
Release output(s) activated.
Operation of Abort: Discharge is aborted ONLY
when alarm is from a detector, and abort is
activated during programmed release time delay.
Abort sequence is dependent on the abort mode
selection as described earlier.
Alarm Condition – Two Zone Mode (cross zoned):
Upon receipt of an alarm from one activated detector
in one zone.
Signal circuit devices are activated per the
software selected signaling circuit configuration,
two zone mode, one zone in alarm, as described
earlier – Bell Circuit Channel 6.
Second Alarm Condition: Upon receipt of an alarm
from a second activated detector in the other zone.
Signal circuit devices are activated per the
software selected signaling circuit configuration,
two zone mode, two zones in alarm, as described
earlier – Bell Circuit Channel 6.
Programmed release time delay activated.

Signaling Circuit Configuration – Bell Circuit Release output(s) activated.

(SAM), Channel 6: This output channel can be
software selected to any standard EQP Signal
Audible Module (SAM) configuration. In a cross-
zoned mode, selections are as follows:

One Zone Mode: The signaling circuit can be

configured to any standard SAM selection.

Two Zone Mode: In this mode the user must make

two selections. A standard SAM selection for when a
single detection circuit is in alarm and another
selection for when both detection circuits are in alarm.

3.1 4-15 95-8533

Manual Alarm Condition – Two Zone Mode (cross EQ2220GFM GROUND FAULT MONITOR
zoned):
The ground fault monitor (see Figure 4-10) has three
Upon receipt of a manual alarm from Channel 2: LEDs used to provide a visual indication of device
status:
Signal circuit devices are activated per the
software selected signaling circuit configuration,
two zone mode, two zones in alarm, as described
earlier – Bell Circuit Channel 6.
+ GND FLT LED

Programmed release time delay activated.

– GND FLT LED

Release output(s) activated.

PWR LED

Module Reset: After completion of the release

output(s) timer, if no alarm condition is present on
channel 2 (Manual Release) then the module can be
reset via soft command on the S3 Module Point A2243

Display or if the EQP Controller is offline, by holding

the Abort input, Channel 1, active momentarily.
Figure 4-10—Ground Fault Monitor Status Indicator Location

When reset, the IPM will de-energize the two detector

circuits, channels 4 and 5, for two seconds to reset
the smoke detectors. Any latched outputs will also be Table 4-13—Ground Fault Monitor Status Indicators
reset.
LED Device Status
Release Outputs: When commanded to release, the + GND FLT LED Indicates Amber in the presence of a “+”
release output(s) will energize for the configured time ground fault.
and then de-energize.
– GND FLT LED Indicates Amber in the presence of a “–”
ground fault.
EQ21xxPSM POWER SUPPLY MONITOR POWER LED Indicates Green when the unit is
powered.
The power supply monitor (see Figure 4-9) has three
LEDs used to provide a visual indication of device
status:
NOTE
The Ground Fault Monitor LED will respond
+ +

1 immediately to a ground fault condition. The

+ + 1
relay contact requires the condition to exist for 10
+
+
+
+

1 + +
+

seconds before it activates.

+ +
+
+

1
+
AMBER LED
RED LED
GREEN LED

Figure 4-9—EQ21xxPSM Status Indicator Location

Table 4-12—Power Supply Monitor Status Indicators

LED Device Status

Green When On indicates power is supplied to device.

Red When Flashing indicates an alarm or fault

condition is present.
Amber When on indicates device is disabled. Module
must be replaced.

3.1 4-16 95-8533

EQ22xxIDC SERIES Table 4-15—DCU Status Indicators

INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUIT (IDC) Device Status LED Status

The IDC has three LEDs (located at the center of the Power-up Pulsed at a rate of 0.5 Hz
IDC communication module circuit board) to provide Calibration Pulsed at a rate of 1 Hz or on
a visual indication of device status. steady
Fault Pulsed at a rate of 4 Hz
Table 4-14—Initiating Device Circuit Status Indicators
Alarm On steady
LED Device status
Green When On indicates device has power.

Red When On indicates an Alarm or Fault condition is EQ25xxARM AGENT RELEASE MODULE
present.
The EQ25xxARM has three LEDs to indicate device
On steady = One of the inputs is active.
status. They are located at the center of the circuit
Blinking = Fault condition such as an open
board.
input circuit or not configured.
Amber When On indicates a device is disabled. Module must
be replaced.
Table 4-16—Agent Release Module Status Indicators

LED Device Status

NOTE
The Initiating Device Circuit Ground Fault
Monitor responds to the presence of a ground
fault within the power circuitry. It provides a
supervised dry contact input and ground fault
monitoring circuitry for indicating a power supply
trouble condition.
NOTE
A blinking red LED on an IDCSC indicates
trouble such as a wiring fault (open or short
circuit) or not configured.
Green When On indicates device has power.
Red When On steady indicates an output is
activated.
When Blinking at a 4 Hz rate with the LED on
50%, off 50% of the time indicates a local
trouble condition such as an open output
circuit or low solenoid supply voltage.
When Blinking at a 1 Hz rate with the LED on
5%, off 95% of the time indicates an isolate
condition.

When Blinking at a 1 Hz rate with the LED on

EQ22xxDCU AND EQ22xxDCUEX DIGITAL 95%, off 5% of the time indicates release and
COMMUNICATION UNITS isolate.
Amber When On indicates a malfunction in the
The DCUs have three LEDs to provide a visual electronic circuitry. Module replacement is
indication of device status. They are visible through required.
the window on the enclosure cover.

NOTE
If the communication module has not been
configured, the red LED blinks at a 4 Hz rate.

NOTE
The amber LED is provided for factory diagnostic
purposes and is not used in the system.
Illumination of the amber LED normally indicates
a failure in the communication chip.
Replacement of the communication module
circuit board is required.

3.1 4-17 95-8533

EQ25xxSAM SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE
The EQ25xxSAM has three LEDs to indicate device
status. They are located at the center of the circuit
board.
Table 4-17—Signal Audible Module Status Indicators
LED Device Status
Green When On indicates device has power.
Red When On steady indicates an Active condition
exists.
When Blinking indicates a Trouble condition exists.
Amber When On indicates a malfunction in the electronic
circuitry. Module replacement is required.
EQ24xxNE NETWORK EXTENDER
The EQ24xxNE has three LEDs (one green, two
amber) for indicating device status.
Table 4-18—Network Extender Status Indicators
LED Device Status
Green When On indicates device has power.
Flashes to indicate messages are being transferred
over the LON.
Amber When On indicates a malfunction in the electronic
circuitry. Module replacement is required.
Note
When a network extender has an internal
fault, the message display will only indicate
that there is a LON fault condition existing
somewhere on the LON.
3.1
SYSTEM STARTUP
PRE-OPERATION CHECKS
General
Insulate all shields to prevent shorts to device
housing or to any other conductor.
Place alarm/release output in “Bypass/Isolate” when
servicing devices.
Maintain a log book containing the type and serial
numbers of devices as well as the location and date
of installation.
Maintain a log of maintenance activities.
Observe normal precautions for handling electrostatic
sensitive devices.
LON
Rocker switches for each LON device must be set to
the desired address prior to power-up.
Test the loop with no power applied. DC resistance
should be equal on A and B.
Check polarity on A and B (no rolls). COM 1
connects to COM 2; COM 2 connects to COM 1. A
connects to A and B to B.
Measure voltage. A to chassis ground measures
approximately +7.5 vdc. B to ground measures
approximately –7.5 vdc.
Measure signal (400 mv P-P min.). (Use oscilloscope
if possible).
Check fault tolerance by introducing a short.
Controller
The I/O and LON wiring is correctly installed,
observing polarity. All cable shields are properly
terminated and insulated.
Power wiring is installed and power source is
operational.
Chassis ground stud must be connected to earth
ground.
4-18 95-8533
Redundant Controller Ground Fault Monitor

The I/O and LON wiring is correctly installed, Verify earth ground connections as specified in the
observing polarity. All cable shields are properly wiring instructions.
terminated and insulated.
Check power distribution to ensure that all devices
Power wiring is installed and power source is are receiving power.
operational.
Chassis ground stud must be connected to earth DCUs
ground.
Verify correct address setting.
The HSSL cable is connected between the two
controllers. Check modules for correct orientation.
Check for the presence of contaminants or poisoning
DCIO Module agents.
Device should be oriented with the sensor pointing
Verify correct address setting.
down.
Check signal circuits for correct polarity.
Check for correct installation of EOL resistors. IDCs

Verify correct address setting.

Relay Module
Check for correct installation of EOL resistors.
Verify correct address setting.
Check for correct output connections. ARMs

Verify correct address setting.

Analog Input Module
Check jumpers.
Verify correct address setting.
Check for correct input connections. SAMs
Check each channel with a loop current input.
Verify correct address setting.
Check signal circuits for correct polarity.
Intelligent Protection Module
Check for correct installation of EOL resistors.
Verify correct address setting.
Check jumpers.
Check for correct input/output connections.

Power Supplies and Power Monitors

Verify all earth ground connections as specified in the

wiring instructions.
Verify correct ac power to supply.
Check power distribution to ensure that all devices
are receiving power.
Check power trouble indicator by introducing an open
to the battery.

3.1 4-19 95-8533

GENERAL START-UP PROCEDURES
1. Output loads that are controlled by the system
should be secured (remove power from all output
devices) to prevent actuation.
2. Check all system wiring for proper connection.
3. Inspect all devices to verify that they have not
been physically damaged in shipment.
4. Apply power to the system.
NOTE
To prevent the network modules from going into
a fault isolation condition, apply power to the
EQP Controller prior to applying power to the
network devices.
5. Program the system for the desired operation
using Det-Tronics Safety System Software (S3).
Download configuration data to all devices.
NOTE
After system configuration has been completed,
the entire system should be tested for proper
operation to ensure that configuration was
performed properly.
6. Calibrate the sensors.
7. Ensure that all trouble and alarm conditions have
been cleared and the EQP Controller is reset,
then remove mechanical blocking devices (if
used) and restore power to the output loads.
3.1
START-UP PROCEDURE FOR CONTROLLER
The Controller is powered-up when the Power Supply
is turned on. When the Power Supply has been
powered-up, verify power at the Controller by
verifying that the Green LED indicator is on. This
indicator is located on the front of the Controller.
To verify that the Controller is powered-up and
operating properly, ensure that:
1. When power is first applied, all LEDs are on. The
ACK LED flashes while the memory test is
running. When initialization is complete, only the
green power LED remains lit.
2. The serial link indicators if active continuously
flash.
3. The Text display runs an initialization routine.
When initialization is complete and if all alarms
and trouble conditions are cleared, the text
display shows the current time and date. If the
controller has been unpowered for more than 12
hours, the time and date may have to be set. If
an alarm or trouble condition exists, it will be
displayed until the condition is corrected and the
Reset button is pressed.
If the controller has not been software configured,
unconfigured devices will be displayed.
Configuration must be done using S3 Safety
System Software before proceeding.
4. The LEDs on the front panel provide an indication
of the system status.
5. Ensure configuration was performed properly.
6. After any modifications have been made either to
the installation or to configuration software,
always check the entire system for proper
operation in order to ensure that the changes
were performed properly.
4-20 95-8533
STARTUP PROCEDURE FOR DCIO MODULE
Configuration
The DCIO Module is an eight-channel device. Each
channel is capable of being configured as an input or
output, independent of any other channel.
NOTE
The module is configured using Det-Tronics
Safety System Software.
Activation Time
Timers are made available for output circuits only.
Timers are used primarily to set the timing of output
release in a suppression system. Timers provide a
pulse timed output for the time period specified in the
configuration of the channel. The channel output
goes active when commanded by the system logic
and remains on until the timer expires.
Static Logic Mode
Each input channel can be configured as a Fire
Alarm, Trouble, Low Gas Alarm, High Gas Alarm,
Supervisory, or Other type of channel, independent of
any other channel configuration. The type selected
determines the logic the system uses to configure
Indicators, Alarms and Messages.
For example: When an input is selected as Fire type,
the Fire LED on the Controller and Audible alarm will
automatically actuate when that input channel is
active.
3.1
DCIO Startup
1. The Power-on LED should be illuminated. The
Fault LED should blink once on power up, then
remain off.
2. The input circuits should indicate the proper state
of the input device (channel active LED
illuminates when the circuit is closed). Check the
input power supply and associated wiring. Verify
proper voltage per the Troubleshooting matrix.
3. The output circuits should indicate the proper
state for the programmed device (channel active
LED illuminates when the circuit is active). Check
the power supply and associated wiring. Verify
proper voltage per the Troubleshooting matrix.
4. The circuits should not indicate a fault condition
(channel fault LED illuminates when the circuit is
in fault). Check the end-of-line devices and
associated wiring. Verify proper voltage per the
Troubleshooting matrix.
5. Test the entire system for proper operation to
ensure that the configuration was performed
properly.
Relay Module Startup
1. The Power-on LED should be illuminated. The
Fault LED should blink once on power up, then
remain off.
2. The output circuits should indicate the proper
state for the programmed device (channel active
LED illuminates when the circuit is active).
3. Test the entire system for proper operation to
ensure that the configuration was performed
properly.
4-21 95-8533
Analog Input Module Startup Intelligent Protection Module Startup
1. The Power-on LED should be illuminated. The 1. The Power-on LED should be illuminated. The
Fault LED should blink once on power up, then Fault LED should blink once on power up, then
remain off. remain off.

2. The input circuits should indicate the proper state 2. The output circuits should indicate the proper
for the programmed device (channel active LED state for the programmed device (channel active
illuminates when the circuit is active). LED illuminates when the circuit is active).

3. The circuits should not indicate a fault condition 3. The circuits should not indicate a fault condition
(channel fault LED illuminates when the circuit is (channel fault LED illuminates when the circuit is
in fault). in fault).

4. Test the entire system for proper operation to 4. Test the entire system for proper operation to
ensure that the configuration was performed ensure that the configuration was performed
properly. properly.

3.1 4-22 95-8533

 Section 5
Maintenance
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
To ensure reliable protection, it is important to check
and calibrate the system on a regularly scheduled
basis. The frequency of checks is determined by the
requirements of the particular installation.
BATTERIES
Batteries must be replaced every 48 months, or
sooner if required by local codes.
IMPORTANT!
Only sealed batteries are to be used.
MANUAL CHECK OF OUTPUT DEVICES
It is important that response devices be checked
initially when the system is installed, as well as
periodically during an on-going maintenance
program.
CAUTION!
Be sure to secure all output devices that are
actuated by the system to prevent unwanted
activation of equipment, and remember to place
these output devices back into service when the
checkout is complete.
O-RING MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior
to removing a junction box cover with power
applied.
A rubber O-ring is used to ensure that the junction
box cover will seal tightly and provide protection
against water entry. The enclosure should be opened
periodically, and the O-ring inspected for breaks,
cracks and dryness.
To test O-ring: remove it from the enclosure and
stretch it slightly. If cracks are visible, replace it. If it
feels dry, a thin coating of lubricant should be
applied. When re-installing the O-ring, be sure that it
is properly seated in the housing groove. It is
imperative that this O-ring be properly installed and in
3.1
good condition. Failure to properly maintain it can
allow water to enter the enclosure and cause
premature failure. A coating of lubricant should also
be applied to the threads on the cover before re-
assembling the enclosure. This will both lubricate the
cover threads and help prevent moisture from
entering the enclosure.
CAUTION!
The O-rings should be lubricated with a silicone
free grease. The use of other lubricants is not
recommended, since they can adversely affect
the performance of some sensors. Under no
circumstances should a lubricant or compound
containing silicone be used on systems using
catalytic type combustible gas sensors.
GAS SENSOR MAINTENANCE
All gas sensors must be calibrated on a regular basis.
Calibration should typically be performed every 90
days for catalytic and electrochemical sensors.
Catalytic sensors have a finite lifespan. If a
successful calibration cannot be performed, replace
the sensor and recalibrate following the procedure
described in the “Calibration” section below. Always
compare part numbers to be sure that the correct
replacement sensor is being used.
CAUTION!
Exposure of the sensor to high concentrations of
combustible gases for extended periods of time
can introduce stress to the sensing element and
seriously affect its performance. After exposure,
recalibration should immediately be performed,
and the sensor should be replaced if necessary.
NOTE
Electrochemical sensors have a finite lifespan. If
a successful calibration cannot be performed,
inspect the hydrophobic filter. If the filter is
plugged, replace it and recalibrate the sensor. If
the filter is in good condition, replace the sensor.
Recalibrate following the procedure described in
the “Calibration” section.
5-1 95-8533
CALIBRATION AND ADJUSTMENTS
To ensure optimum performance, calibration must be GND
performed on a regularly scheduled basis. Since
each application is different, the length of time

11
12
13
between regularly scheduled recalibrations can vary

10
14

9
8
from one installation to the next. In general, the more

7
SW1

6
5
frequently a system is checked, the greater the

4
3
MAGNETIC REED SWITCH *

2
reliability.

1
IMPORTANT!
4 to 20 ma devices not manufactured by Det-
Tronics must be pre-calibrated. To ensure A1881

adequate protection, calibration must be * TO ACTIVATE THE MAGNETIC REED SWITCH,

HOLD THE CALIBRATION MAGNET AGAINST THE SIDE OF THE ENCLOSURE
AT THE LOCATION OF THE REED SWITCH,
performed on a regularly scheduled basis. APPROXIMATELY ONE INCH ABOVE THE MOUNTING SURFACE.

Figure 5-1—DCU Terminal Wiring Board Mounted in Six-Port

NOTE Junction Box
If the calibration procedure is not completed
within 12 minutes, the detector will revert back to
the previous calibration values. The red LED will CALIBRATION ALGORITHM A
blink. The calibration will be logged as aborted. FOR MANUAL CALIBRATION OF UNIVERSAL DCU

NOTE Normal Calibration

The “Sensor Replacement” calibration procedure
1. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED blinks
must be used for the initial calibration of a new
while the reed switch is closed.)
sensor. The “Routine Calibration” procedure can
be used for all subsequent calibrations.
2. After the reed switch has been closed for 3
seconds, the calibrate LED blinks, indicating it is
NOTE
ready for the zero input.
Some calibration procedures require the operator
to activate the reed switch located on a circuit
3. Enter the zero input (4 ma).
board inside the junction box. See Figure 5-1 for
reed switch location. To activate the switch, hold
4. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED blinks
the calibration magnet against the side of the
while the switch is closed.)
junction box near the switch location
approximately one inch above the mounting
5. After the reed switch has been closed for 3
surface. (Do not open the junction box.) Hold
seconds, the communication module records the
the calibration magnet in place for approximately
uncalibrated value in the calibration log and
4 seconds to initiate the calibration procedure.
calibrates the zero value. (The calibrate LED
stays on steady.)

6. Apply the calibration gas.

7. The calibrate LED blinks as the input increases.

8. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED blinks

while the reed switch is closed.)

9. The communication module records the

uncalibrated value in the calibration log and
calibrates the span value after the reed switch is
on for 3 seconds.

10. The calibrate LED stays on steady.

3.1 5-2 95-8533

11. Remove the span gas, and return the analog
input to normal.
12. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED blinks for
3 seconds while the reed switch is closed)
13. The calibration is complete. The calibrate LED
turns off.
NOTE
If the calibration is not completed within 12
minutes, the previous calibration values are
restored and the calibration is logged as aborted.
The calibrate LED will flash.
Sensor Replacement
WARNING!
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior
to removing a junction box cover with power
applied.
1. Open the junction box cover and press the
Sensor Replacement Switch.
2. The calibrate LED on the communication module
will flash, indicating it is ready for the zero input.
3. Replace the sensor and apply the zero input (4
ma).
4. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED flashes for
3 seconds while the switch is closed.)
5. The communication module records the
uncalibrated value in position one of the
calibration log and calibrates the zero value. (The
calibrate LED stays on steady.)
6. Apply the calibration gas.
7. The calibrate LED flashes when the input
increases.
8. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED flashes for
3 seconds while the reed switch is closed.)
9. The communication module records the
uncalibrated value in the first register of the
calibration log and calibrates the span value.
10. The calibrate LED stays on steady.
11. Remove the span gas and return the analog input
to normal.
12. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED flashes for
3 seconds while the switch is closed.)
3.1
13. The calibration is complete. (The calibrate LED
turns off.)
NOTE
Pressing the Sensor Replacement Switch aborts
calibration and starts over.
NOTE
Resetting the communication module will abort
the sensor replacement.
CALIBRATION ALGORITHM C
FOR COMBUSTIBLE GAS DCUs AND
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION OF UNIVERSAL DCUs
CAUTION!
After exposing the H 2 S sensor to high
concentrations of gas, it should be exposed to
fresh air for at least 30 minutes, and re-
calibrated.
Routine Calibration
1. Apply the zero gas.
2. Activate the reed switch for at least 4 seconds.
(The red LED flashes for 3 seconds while the
switch is activated.)
3. The calibrate LED on the communication module
flashes, indicating it is ready for the zero input.
4. Wait until the calibrate LED stays on steady
(approximately 4 seconds).
NOTE
The communication module records the
uncalibrated value in the calibration log and
calibrates the zero value during this time.
5. Apply the calibration gas. (The calibrate LED
flashes when the sensor detects gas.)
6. When the sensor input has been stable for 30
seconds, the communication module records the
uncalibrated value in the calibration log, and
calibrates the span value.
7. The calibrate LED stays on steady.
8. Remove the calibration gas.
9. The communication module waits until the sensor
input drops below 4% full scale.
5-3 95-8533
10. The calibration is complete. (The calibrate LED
turns off.)
NOTE
If the calibration procedure is not completed
within 12 minutes, calibration will be aborted and
the detector will revert back to the previous
calibration values. The red LED will flash and
the calibration will be logged as aborted.
Sensor Replacement — Combustible Gas (CGS Sensor)
NOTE
When replacing a sensor, compare part numbers
to be sure that the correct replacement sensor is
being used.
WARNING!
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior
to removing a junction box cover with power
applied.
1. Remove the cover from the DCU enclosure.
2. Press the Sensor Replacement Switch on the
communication module for approxImately 1
second. (The calibrate LED on the communication
module flashes, indicating that it is ready for the
zero input.)
NOTE
Pressing the sensor replacement switch prevents
the communication module from generating a
fault signal when the input drops to zero due to
sensor removal. The calibration will not be
aborted if the calibration procedure is not
completed within 12 minutes.
3. Move the Calibration Switch to the “calibrate”
position.
4. Replace the sensor.
5. Connect a volt meter to the test points on the
transmitter board. Connect the “+” lead to TP1
(red). Connect the “–” lead to TP2 (black).
6. Wait at least 5 minutes for the sensor output to
stabilize, then adjust R2 for a reading of 0.40 vdc
(4 ma) on the meter.
NOTE
Do not make adjustments to R1 when calibrating
the sensor.
7. Move the Calibrate Switch to the “normal”
position.
3.1
8. Activate the reed switch for 4 seconds. (The red
LED flashes for 3 seconds while the switch is
activated.) The communication module records
the uncalibrated value in position one of the
calibration log and calibrates the zero value. The
calibrate LED goes on steady.
9. Move the Calibration Switch to the “calibrate”
position.
10. Apply the calibration gas and wait for the output
to stabilize.
11. With 50% LFL calibration gas applied to sensor,
adjust R3 for a reading of 1.2 vdc (12 ma) on the
volt meter.
12. Move the Calibrate Switch to the “normal”
position. (The red LED flashes.)
13. Activate the reed switch. The red LED flashes for
3 seconds while the switch is activated.
14. The communication module records the
uncalibrated value in the first register of the
calibration log and calibrates the span value. The
calibrate LED stays on steady.
15. Remove the calibration gas and replace the DCU
enclosure cover.
16. The communication module waits until the analog
value drops below 4% full scale. The calibration
is complete. (The calibrate LED turns off.)
NOTE
Pressing the Sensor Replacement Switch aborts
the current calibration.
Sensor Replacement — Toxic Gas
NOTE
When replacing a sensor, compare part numbers
to be sure the correct replacement sensor is
being used.
WARNING!
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior
to removing a junction box cover with power
applied.
1. Remove the cover from the DCU enclosure.
2. Press the Sensor Replacement Switch on the
communication module for approximately 1
second. (The calibrate LED flashes,
indicating it is ready for the zero input.)
5-4 95-8533
 NOTE
Pressing the Sensor Replacement Switch
prevents the communication module from
generating a fault signal when the input drops to
zero due to sensor removal. The calibration will
not be aborted if the calibration procedure is not
completed within 12 minutes.
3. Replace the sensor.
4. Wait at least 5 minutes for the sensor output to
stabilize.
5. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED flashes for
3 seconds while the switch is activated.) The
communication module records the uncalibrated
value in position one of the calibration log and
calibrates the zero value. (The calibrate LED
stays on steady.)
6. Apply the calibration gas. (The calibrate LED
flashes when the input increases.)
7. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED flashes for
3 seconds while the switch is activated.)
8. The communication module records the
uncalibrated value in the first register of the
calibration log and calibrates the span value. (The
calibrate LED stays on steady.)
9. Remove the calibration gas and replace the DCU
enclosure cover.
10. The communication module waits until the analog
value drops below 4% full scale. The calibration
is complete. (The calibrate LED turns off.)
NOTE
Pressing the Sensor Replacement Switch aborts
the calibration and starts over.
CALIBRATION ALGORITHM D
FOR UNIVERSAL DCUs WITH O2 SENSOR
Normal Calibration
1. Apply clean air (20.9% oxygen).
2. Activate the reed switch for at least 4 seconds.
(The red LED flashes for 3 seconds while the
switch is closed.)
3. The calibrate LED flashes, indicating calibration
has begun.
3.1
4. The communication module waits 3 seconds.
5. The communication module records the
uncalibrated value in the calibration log and
calibrates the span value.
6. The calibrate LED stays on steady.
7. The communication module waits 3 seconds.
8. Calibration is complete. (The calibrate LED turns
off.)
Sensor Replacement
WARNING!
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior
to removing a junction box cover with power
applied.
1. Open the junction box cover and press the
Sensor Replacement Switch.
2. The calibrate LED on the communication module
flashes, indicating it is ready for the zero input.
3. Replace the sensor and set the Sensor Switch
(located on the sensor cell) to zero.
4. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED flashes for
3 seconds while the switch is closed.)
5. The communication module records the
uncalibrated value in position one of the
calibration log and calibrates the zero value. The
calibrate LED stays on steady.
6. Set the Zero Switch on the sensor to the “normal”
position. Apply clean air (20.9% oxygen) to set
the sensor analog span value.
7. The calibrate LED flashes when the input goes
high.
8. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED flashes for
3 seconds while the switch is closed.)
9. The communication module records the
uncalibrated value in the first register of the
calibration log and calibrates the span value.
10. The calibration is complete. The calibrate LED
turns off.
NOTE
Pressing the sensor replacement switch aborts
the calibration.
5-5 95-8533
CALIBRATION ALGORITHM G NOTE
FOR DCUs WITH POINTWATCH Allow at least 10 minutes for the sensor to warm
up.
Routine Calibration
NOTE
1. Apply the zero gas.
Pressing the Sensor Replacement Switch
prevents the communication module from
2. Activate the reed switch for at least 4 seconds.
generating a fault signal when the input drops to
(The red LED flashes for 3 seconds while the
zero.
switch is activated.)
NOTE
3. The calibrate LED flashes, indicating it is ready
The calibration will not be aborted if the
for the zero input.
calibration procedure is not completed within 12
minutes.
4. When a steady zero reading is obtained, the
communication module records the uncalibrated
2. Apply zero gas.
value in the calibration log and calibrates the zero
value during this time. The LED stays on steady.
3. The calibrate LED flashes, indicating that it is
ready for the zero input.
5. Apply calibration gas. (The calibrate LED flashes
when the sensor detects gas.)
4. Continue from step 4 of the PointWatch routine
calibration procedure described above.
6. When the sensor input has been stable for 30
seconds, the communication module records the
uncalibrated value in the calibration log and
calibrates the span value. DEVICE CALIBRATION LOGS AND
RECORDS
7. The calibrate LED stays on steady.
The DCU keeps a calibration log in non-volatile
memory that can be used by the operator to evaluate
8. Remove the calibration gas.
the remaining life of some sensors. This log includes
the zero, span, date and time for each successful
9. The communication module waits until the sensor
calibration. An aborted calibration is indicated by
input drops below 4% full scale.
zeros in the zero and span values. The calibration log
is cleared when the sensor replacement switch is
10. The calibration is complete. (The calibrate LED
pressed and the calibration is successfully
turns off.)
completed.
NOTE
The initial calibration is logged in position one, where
Calibration is aborted if not complete within 12
it remains for the life of the sensor. If more than 8
minutes. If not completed, the detector will revert
calibrations are performed without the sensor
back to the previous calibration values. The red
replacement switch being pressed, the newest
LED will flash and the calibration will be logged
calibration data will replace the second oldest so that
as aborted.
the initial calibration data can be saved. The old
calibration data will be lost. This feature enables
Sensor Replacement sensor sensitivity trending to aid in maintenance or
troubleshooting.
WARNING!
The analog value for the sensor is represented in raw
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior
analog-to-digital counts 0 to 4095, where 0 represents
to removing a junction box cover with power
0 ma and 4095 represents 24 ma.
applied.

1. Remove power from the DCU and PointWatch

unit. Replace the PointWatch unit. Apply power.
Press the Sensor Replacement Switch on the
communication module for approxImately 1
second.

3.1 5-6 95-8533

TROUBLESHOOTING
Tables 5-1 and 5-2 are provided to assist in locating
the source of a system problem.
Table 5-1—System Controller Troubleshooting Guide
Symptom Possible Cause
Controller Power LED/ No Power to Input.
Text Display OFF.
LON Fault – LED lit. LON wiring is shorted or open.
Trouble Relay is Active. Any monitored device in the
system including ground fault
in fault condition.
Digital inputs are not - Bad input switch.
responding. - Faulty input channel.
- Faulty wiring.
- Configuration error.
Relay outputs are not - Bad relay channel.
responding to an output - Faulty output wiring.
command. - User logic.
Serial links are not responding. - Faulty wiring.
- Incorrect serial link
configuration.
- Text display shows
“Invalid Configuration”
Front panel pushbuttons are - Power OFF.
not working. - Controller is faulted.
Text display indicates a Power loss for more than
RTC Fault. 12 hours.
3.1 5-7
Corrective Action
- Measure input voltage (18 to 32 VDC).
- Check that P1 is fully inserted.
If voltage is present and P1 is fully inserted, replace
controller.
- Check that P7 is fully inserted.
- Using the EQ Safety System Software, determine the
location of open or short via LON Diagnostics screen.
- Use a multimeter to determine wiring fault.
- Using the front panel display/controls, view all points
in alarm/fault and identify faulted device.
Repair or replace faulted device as necessary.
- Check that P2 and P3 are fully inserted.
- Using a voltmeter, measure input terminals with contact
closed to the input (measures 0 vdc when input contact
is closed, measures approximately 23 vdc with circuit
open and 24 vdc input at the controller).
- If input does not respond to a contact closure, replace
module (verify response with EQ Safety System
Software/textual display).
- Verify configuration.
- Check that P4 and P5 are fully inserted.
- When output should be energized, measure contact
resistance using an ohm meter.
- Verify that wiring from output is not open.
- Using EQ Safety System Software, verify that logic is
trying to operate the channel.
- Check that P8 and P9 are fully inserted.
- Verify that communication LEDs are flashing.
- Verify that serial link configuration matches the host
device.
- Verify that wiring is not open or shorted.
- Verify that power is present and P1 is fully inserted.
- Cycle power to controller.
- Using the Safety System Software, execute “Set RTC”,
which downloads the current time into the Controller’s
real time clock. Alternatively, use the “Set Time and
Date” menu in the Controller.
95-8533
 Table 5-2—Troubleshooting Guide - DCIO Module

I/O Type Normal (Off) Normal (On) Open (Off) Open (On) Short (Off) Short (On)

Unsupervised Input –15.4 0 –15.4 –15.4 0 0

Supervised Input (EOL Resistor) –14.4 0 –15.4 –15.4 0 0
Supervised Input (EOL/Inline Resistors) –15.4 –15 –15.4 –15.4 0 0
Unsupervised Output –15.4 23.9 –15.4 23.9 0 0
Supervised Output (Agent Release) 0 to 2.1 Note 2 23.9 –15.4 23.9 0 0
Supervised Output (Notification) –14.4 23.9 –15.4 23.9 0 0
Notes:
1. All measurements are in Volts and are measured in reference to the common terminal and 24.0 Vdc is the module’s input.
2. Value is dependent on the resistance of the solenoid attached.

REPLACEMENT PARTS ORDERING INFORMATION

Eagle Quantum Premier devices are not designed to When ordering, please specify:
be repaired in the field. If a problem should develop,
first carefully check for proper wiring, programming
POWER SUPPLIES
and calibration. If it is determined that the problem is
caused by an electronic defect, the device must be Part Number Description
returned to the factory for repair. 006979-001 EQ21xxPSM Power Supply Monitor
000604-013 EQ2110PS Power Supply (10 amps)
NOTE 000604-014 EQ2130PS Power Supply (30 amps)
When replacing a device, be sure that all rocker 000604-015 EQ2175PS Power Supply (75 amps)
switches on the replacement are set the same as 007941-001 EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor
the original device. Consult the settings
documented during system installation and setup LON DEVICES
to determine proper settings for the new device. Part Number Description
Remove power before removing a device or 006608-xxx EQ22xxIDC Initiating Device Circuit
plugging in a replacement unit. When a device is 006943-xxx EQ22xxIDCGF Ground Fault Monitor
replaced, configuration is done automatically. 007257-xxx EQ22xxIDCSC Initiating Device
Circuit Short Circuit
006607-xxx EQ22xxDCU Digital Communication
Unit (specify gas)
DEVICE REPAIR AND RETURN 006733-xxx EQ25xxARM Agent Release Module
006738-xxx EQ25xxSAM Signal Audible Module
Prior to returning devices or components, contact the 006941-xxx EQ24xxNE Network Extender
nearest local Detector Electronics office so that a 008056-001 HART Interface Module
Service Order number can be assigned. A written 008982-001 LON Termination Module
statement describing the malfunction must
accompany the returned device or component to Refer to the OS number matrix on the following page for
expedite finding the cause of the failure. the following devices:
EQ300X EQP Controller
Pack the unit or component properly. Use sufficient
EQ3700DCIO DCIO Module
packing material in addition to an antistatic bag or
EQ3710AIM Analog Input Module
aluminum-backed cardboard as protection from
EQ3720RM Relay Module
electrostatic discharge.
EQ3740IPM Intelligent Protection Module
Return all equipment transportation prepaid to the
factory in Minneapolis.

3.1 5-8 95-8533

Controller Matrix DCIO Module Matrix
MODEL DESCRIPTION MODEL DESCRIPTION
EQ3001 Eagle Quantum Premier Controller EQ3700 8 Channel Direct Current Input/Output (DCIO) Module
TYPE MOUNTING OPTION TYPE MOUNTING OPTION
D Din Rail D Din Rail
P Panel P Panel
TYPE COM Board 1 TYPE APPROVAL AGENCY
N None A FM & CSA
C ControlNet W FM/CSA/CENELEC*/CE
TYPE COM Board 2
N None
S Serial
TYPE APPROVAL AGENCY Relay Module Matrix
W FM/CSA/CENELEC*/CE MODEL DESCRIPTION
EQ3720 8 Channel Relay Module
TYPE MOUNTING OPTION
D Din Rail
P Panel
TYPE APPROVAL AGENCY
Redundancy A FM & CSA
Part No. Description W FM/CSA/CENELEC*/CE

008981-001 Controller to Controller

High-Speed Serial Link Cable (4 ft)
Analog Input Module Matrix
008982-001 LON Termination Module
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EQ3710 8 Channel Analog Input Module
TYPE MOUNTING OPTION
D Din Rail
P Panel
Controller Communication Cables
TYPE APPROVAL AGENCY
Length
W FM/CSA/CENELEC*/CE
Part No. Description 15 ft. 30 ft 50 ft.
(4.57 m) (9.14 m) (15.24 m)

007633-001 Controller RS-232 Cable X Intelligent Protection Module Matrix

(DB9 Female PC Connection)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
007633-002 Controller RS-232 Cable X EQ3740 Intelligent Protection Module
(DB9 Female PC Connection)
TYPE MOUNTING OPTION
007633-003 Controller RS-232 Cable X D Din Rail
(DB9 Female PC Connection) P Panel
TYPE APPROVAL AGENCY
W FM/CSA/CENELEC*/CE

*Component certification

3.1 5-9 95-8533

COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSORS CALIBRATION KITS FOR CATALYTIC
COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSORS
Table 5-3—Combustible Gas Sensors
Part Number Gas
225130-001 Methane (50% LFL)
OS Number Part Number Replaces Threads Wire Length
225130-002 Ethane (50% LFL)
CGSS1A6C2R1X 006824-001 225006-004 3/4 inch 6 inch 225130-003 Ethylene (50% LFL)
225957-002 225130-004 Propane (50% LFL)
226530-003
226531-003 225130-005 Hydrogen (50% LFL)
226931-005 225130-006 Methane (20% LFL)
226931-006
225130-007 Methane (25% LFL)
226999-011
226999-012 225130-008 Methane (35% LFL)
CGSS1A3C2R1X 006824-005 225006-003 3/4 inch 30 inch
226530-005 REPLACEMENT CYLINDERS
226531-004 Part Number Gas
226931-007
226931-008
226166-001 Methane (50% LFL)
226166-002 Ethane (50% LFL)
CGSS1C6C2R1X 006824-003 226999-008 20 mm 6 inch
226999-020 226166-003 Ethylene (50% LFL)
226999-014 226166-004 Propane (50% LFL)
226999-021 226166-005 Hydrogen (50% LFL)
CGSS1C3C2R1X 006824-007 226999-015 20 mm 30 inch 226166-006 Air (0% LFL)
226166-007 Methane (20% LFL)
226166-008 Methane (25% LFL)
H2S SENSOR 226166-009 Methane (35% LFL)
Part Number Description
004539-009 Explosion-Proof H2S Sensor Housing REPLACEMENT PARTS FOR CALIBRATION KIT
005434-001 Electrochemical H2S Sensing Part Number Description
Element Assembly 162552-001 Regulator
101678-007 3 foot hose
NOTE 004976-001 Standard calibration cup
Other toxic gas sensors are available. Consult 225777-001 Calibration cup for sensor separation
the factory for types and availability.
H2S CALIBRATION KIT
GAS SENSOR ACCESSORIES 227115-001 H 2 S Calibration Kit (for electro-
Part Number Description chemical sensors only) includes
102868-001 Silicone Free Grease regulator, hose, calibration cup, and
102740-001 Calibration Magnet two cylinders of calibration gas.
226365-113 Sensor Separation Kit for Catalytic
Sensors REPLACEMENT PARTS — H2S
226365-104 Sensor Separation Kit for Part Number Description
Electrochemical Sensors 005434-001 Electrochemical Sensing Element
006414-001 Sensor Separation Kit for PointWatch Assembly for H2S Sensor
226349-001 Sensor Rain Shield 004532-002 Hydrophobic Filter for H2S Sensor
225312-001 Sensor Dust Cover (Stainless Steel) 107427-034 O-ring (for Hydrophobic Filter)
226190-001 Sensor Dust Cover (Porex) 107427-004 O-ring (for Sensor Housing)
226354-001 Splash Guard 227117-001 Gas Bottle for 227115-001 Calibration
Kit - 50 ppm
NOTE
Other accessories are available. For additional information or for assistance in ordering,
please contact:
Detector Electronics Corporation
6901 West 110th Street
Minneapolis, Minnesota 55438 USA
Operator: (952) 941-5665 or (800) 765-FIRE
Customer Service: (952) 946-6491
Fax: (952) 829-8750
Web site: www.detronics.com
E-mail: detronics@detronics.com

3.1 5-10 95-8533

 Section 6 UNSUPERVISED OUTPUTS—
Dry Contact Rating: 1 ampere at 30 vdc maximum.
Specifications SPDT normally open/normally closed contact,
Configurable for normally energized or de-energized
(de-energized is the default mode).
EQ300X CONTROLLER
UNSUPERVISED INPUTS—
INPUT VOLTAGE— Two State input (on/off).
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will User selectable normally open or normally closed
not cause damage to the equipment. contact (N.O. is the default).

INPUT POWER— TROUBLE OUTPUT—

9 watts nominal, 12 watts maximum. SPDT normally open/normally closed contact,
Non-Configurable, normally energized only.
LON COMMUNICATION—
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 TEMPERATURE RANGE—
kbps). Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
Storage: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
RS-485 COMMUNICATION— Excluding communication port optional modules.
MODBUS Master/Slave capability.
Digital communication, transformer isolated (up to HUMIDITY RANGE—
115 kbps). 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.

RS-232 COMMUNICATION— VIBRATION—

S3 configuration only. FM 3260, FM 6310/6320.
Digital communication, optically isolated.
DIMENSIONS—
CONTROLNET— See Figure 6-1.
Digital communication, transformer isolated (5 Mbps).
SHIPPING WEIGHT—
SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD— 2 pounds (4.4 kilograms).
RS-485 Communication: MODBUS master/slave
capability, ground fault monitored. CERTIFICATION—
Digital communication, transformer isolated (up to FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
230 kbps). Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
Performance verified.
RS-232 Communication: MODBUS master/slave or Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.
S3 configuration capability. Refer to Appendix B for CSA Certification details.
Digital communication, isolated (up to 230 kbps).
RS-232 Communication: MODBUS master/slave CENELEC/CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
capability. Performance verified per EN 61779-4.
Digital communication, isolated (up to 230 kbps). 0539 II 3 G
EEx nC IIC T4
High Speed Serial Link (HSSL): Port used only for DEMKO 02 ATEX 133867U
redundant controller to controller communication. T4 (Tamb = –40°C to +85°C).
Refer to Appendix C for CE Mark details.
Special conditions for safe use:
The device shall be installed in an enclosure that
complies with all relevant requirements of EN 50021:
1999, and provides a degree of ingress protection of
at least IP54. The device may only be installed,
connected or removed when the area is known to be
non-hazardous.

3.1 6-1 95-8533

 10.75
(27.3)
2.45
(6.22)
LON TERMINATION MODULE
7.0
(17.78)
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
DET-TRONICS ®

EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER 5.95

Storage: –-67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
Safety System Controller (15.1)
Fire Alarm Inhibit Power Supervisory

Time & Date

16:38:55
High Gas

Low Gas
Trouble

Acknowledge
Cntrl Flt

Silence
Lon Fault

Output Inhibit
5.5 HUMIDITY RANGE—
JAN 11/2002
(14.0) 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

DIMENSIONS—
PANEL MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
See Figure 6-3.

SHIPPING WEIGHT—
10.75 2.70 0.5 pounds (0.2 kilograms)
(27.3) (6.86)

DET-TRONICS ®

CERTIFICATION—
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
Safety System Controller
Time & Date
Fire Alarm Inhibit Power Supervisory
5.5 FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
(14.0)
High Gas Trouble Cntrl Flt Lon Fault

16:38:55
JAN 11/2002 Low Gas Acknowledge Silence Output Inhibit
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

CENELEC/CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.

0539 II 3 G
DIN RAIL MOUNTING DIMENSIONS EEx nA II T4
DEMKO 04 ATEX 138345U
T4 (Tamb = –40°C to +85°C).
10.75 0.35
(27.3) (0.89)
8.2 2.1
(20.8) (5.3) Special Conditions for Safe Use:
The LON Termination Module shall be installed in an
enclosure that complies with all relevant requirements
DET-TRONICS ®

of EN50021:1999 and provides a degree of ingress

EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
Safety System Controller
5.95
(15.1)
protection of at least IP54.
Fire Alarm Inhibit Power Supervisory

Time & Date

High Gas Trouble Cntrl Flt Lon Fault

6.7
16:38:55
JAN 11/2002 Low Gas Acknowledge Silence Output Inhibit

(17.0) The LON Termination Module may only be installed,

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence
connected, or removed when the area is known to be
non-hazardous.
7.0
(17.78)

0.7
DIMENSIONS OF CONTROLLER
WITH OPTIONAL SERIAL COMMUNICATION BOARD
E2103 (1.75)
2.95
(7.5)

Figure 6-1—Dimensions of EQP Controller in Inches (Centimeters)

2.16
(5.5)
1.87
(4.75)

A2253

Figure 6-3—Dimensions of LON Termination Module

in Inches (Centimeters)

3.1 6-2 95-8533

EQ3700 DIRECT CURRENT IO (DCIO) CENELEC/CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
MODULE 0539 II 3 G
EEx nC IIC T4
POWER REQUIREMENTS— DEMKO 02 ATEX 133864U
3 watts nominal, 7 watts maximum. T4 (Tamb = –40°C to +85°C).
Refer to Appendix C for CE Mark details.
INPUT VOLTAGE— Special conditions for safe use:
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will The device shall be installed in an enclosure that
not cause damage to the equipment. complies with all relevant requirements of EN 50021:
21 to 30 vdc for Pre-action / Deluge application. 1999, and provides a degree of ingress protection of
NOTE: For deluge and pre-action applications, input at least IP54. The device may only be installed,
voltage to the device must be 21 vdc minimum to ensure connected or removed when the area is known to be
proper operation of the connected output device. non-hazardous.

OUTPUT VOLTAGE— INPUT / INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUITS

(Input voltage – 0.5 vdc) @ 2 amperes. UNSUPERVISED INPUT—
Two state input (on/off).
LON COMMUNICATION— Normally open contact.
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5
kbps). SUPERVISED INPUT, CLASS B STYLE B—
Two state input (active/trouble):
TEMPERATURE RANGE— – End of Line Resistor 10 K ohms nominal
Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C). – Open Circuit > 45 K ohms
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C). – Active Circuit < 5 K ohms.

HUMIDITY RANGE— SUPERVISED INPUT, CLASS B STYLE C—

5 to 95% RH, non-condensing. Three State input (active/short/open):
– End of Line Resistor 10 K ohms nominal
DIMENSIONS— – In Line Resistor 3.3 K ohms nominal
Refer to Figure 6-2. – Open Circuit > 45 K ohms
– Short Circuit < 1.4 K ohms
SHIPPING WEIGHT— – Active Circuit 2.5 K ohms to 5 K ohms.
1 pound (0.45 kilograms).
INPUT, TYPES—
CERTIFICATION— Configurable for fixed logic applications:
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4). – Fire Alarm
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4). – Supervisory
Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details. – Trouble
Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details. – High Gas Alarm
– Low Gas Alarm
– Other.
1.3 2.5
(3.4) (6.4)

1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6

5.0
(12.7)
4.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (11.3)

4.5
A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C (11.3) A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C

5.2
5.2 1.8 (13.2) 1.9
C2096 (13.2) (4.6) (4.8)

PANEL MOUNTING DIMENSIONS DIN RAIL MOUNTING DIMENSIONS

Figure 6-2—Dimensions of the DCIO / Relay Module / AIM / IPM in Inches (Centimeters)
3.1 6-3 95-8533
OUTPUT / NOTIFICATION / RELEASING CIRCUITS EQ3720 RELAY MODULE
UNSUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING—
POWER REQUIREMENTS—
Short circuit protected: 2 amperes at 30 Vdc
3 watts nominal, 4 watts maximum.
maximum.
INPUT VOLTAGE—
SUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING—SIGNALING
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
TYPE, CLASS B, STYLE "Y".
not cause damage to the equipment.
MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT—
RELAY CONTACTS—
2 amperes maximum, 15 Amp inrush.
30 VDC, 2 amps resistive.
Automatic short circuit protection provided.
125 VAC, 0.5 amp resistive (FM and CSA only).
SUPERVISORY CURRENT—
LON COMMUNICATION—
Reverse current monitored at 3.0 mA, ± 2.0mA.
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5
kbps).
RESPONSE TIME—
Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
an alarm command message.
Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
EOL RESISTORS—
10 K ohms ±2 K ohms.
HUMIDITY RANGE—
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
SIGNALING OUTPUT, TYPES—
Configurable for device applications:
DIMENSIONS—
– Continuous
Refer to Figure 6-2.
– 60 beats per second
– 120 beats per second
SHIPPING WEIGHT—
– Temporal Pattern.
1 pound (0.45 kilograms).
NOTE
CERTIFICATION—
All eight channels are synchronized when
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
programmed as a signaling output.
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.
SUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING— RELEASING Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details.
TYPE
CENELEC/CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT— 0539 II 3 G
2 amperes maximum, 15 Amp inrush. EEx nC IIC T4
Automatic short circuit protection provided. DEMKO 03 ATEX 135246U
T4 (Tamb = –40°C to +85°C).
SUPERVISORY CURRENT— Vin = 24 vdc ±10%.
Monitored at 3.0 mA ±2.0 mA. Refer to Appendix C for CE Mark details.
Special conditions for safe use:
RESPONSE TIME— The device shall be installed in an enclosure that
Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging complies with all relevant requirements of EN 50021:
an alarm command message. 1999, and provides a degree of ingress protection of
at least IP54. The device may only be installed,
RELEASING OUTPUT, TYPES— connected or removed when the area is known to be
Configurable for device applications: non-hazardous.
– Continuous
– Timed. RESPONSE TIME—
Actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging an
alarm command message.

3.1 6-4 95-8533

EQ3710AIM ANALOG INPUT MODULE HART INTERFACE MODULE (HIM)
POWER REQUIREMENTS— INPUT VOLTAGE—
Module power consumption: 6 watts. 24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
When supplying power to three-wire transmitters: not cause damage to the equipment.
Maximum current at power input: 7.4 amperes.
Output current: 900 mA per channel maximum. INPUT POWER—
1.0 watt maximum.
INPUT/OUTPUT VOLTAGE—
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will INPUT/OUTPUT CURRENT—
not cause damage to the equipment. Operating: 4 -20 mA.
Maximum: 0-30 mA.
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C). TEMPERATURE RANGE—
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C). Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
Storage: –-67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
HUMIDITY RANGE—
0 to 95% RH, non-condensing. HUMIDITY RANGE—
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
CHANNEL ACCURACY—
Zero: ±0.3% full scale from –40°C to +85°C. DIMENSIONS—
Span: ±0.5% full scale from –40°C to +85°C. See Figure 6-3.

RESPONSE TIME— SHIPPING WEIGHT—

1 to 100 LON devices: < 2 seconds 0.5 pounds (0.2 kilograms)
101 to 200 LON devices: < 3 seconds
201 to 246 LON devices: < 4 seconds. CERTIFICATION—

LON COMMUNICATION— FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).

Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
kbps).
CENELEC/CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
DIMENSIONS— 0539 II 3 G
Refer to Figure 6-2. EEx nA II T4
DEMKO 04 ATEX 136507U
SHIPPING WEIGHT— T4 (Tamb = –40°C to +85°C).
1 pound (0.45 kilograms).
Special Conditions for Safe Use:
CERTIFICATION— The HIM shall be installed in an enclosure that
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4). complies with all relevant requirements of
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4). EN50021:1999 and provides a degree of ingress
protection of at least IP54.
CENELEC/CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
0539 II 3 G The HIM may only be installed, connected, or
EEx nC IIC T4 removed when the area is known to be non-
DEMKO 03 ATEX 136207U hazardous.
T4 (Tamb = –40°C to +85°C). 0.7
(1.75)
2.95
Special conditions for safe use: (7.5)

The device shall be installed in an enclosure that

complies with all relevant requirements of EN 50021:
1999, and provides a degree of ingress protection of 2.16
(5.5)
at least IP54. The device may only be installed, 1.87
connected or removed when the area is known to be (4.75)

non-hazardous.
A2253

Figure 6-3—Dimensions of HART Interface Module

in Inches (Centimeters)

3.1 6-5 95-8533

EQ3740IPM INTELLIGENT PROTECTION INPUT / INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUITS - CONTACT
MODULE MONITOR TYPE - CHANNEL 1 - 3
NOTE
POWER REQUIREMENTS—
An input must be active for at least 750
3 watts nominal, 7 watts maximum.
milliseconds in order to be recognized.
INPUT VOLTAGE—
UNSUPERVISED INPUT—
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
Two state input (on/off).
not cause damage to the equipment.
Normally open contact.
No EOL resistor required.
LON COMMUNICATIONS—
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5
SUPERVISED INPUT, CLASS B STYLE B—
kbps).
Two state input (active/trouble):
End of Line Resistor 10 K ohms ±20%
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
Open Circuit > 45 K ohms
Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
Active Circuit < 5 K ohms.
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
SUPERVISED INPUT, CLASS B STYLE C—
HUMIDITY RANGE—
Three State input (active/short/open):
0 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
End of Line Resistor 10 K ohms ±20%
In Line Resistor 3.3 K ohms ±20%
DIMENSIONS—
Open Circuit > 45 K ohms
Refer to Figure 6-2.
Short Circuit < 1.4 K ohms
Active Circuit 2.5 K ohms to 5 K ohms.
SHIPPING WEIGHT—
1 pound (0.45 kilograms).
INPUT CIRCUITS - TWO WIRE SMOKE/HEAT TYPE
CERTIFICATION— - CHANNEL 4 AND 5
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
SUPERVISED INPUT, STYLE B:
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
Up to 15 two wire detectors per circuit.
Maximum line resistance 50 ohms
Special conditions for safe use: Style B, 5K ohm EOL
Electronic assembly must be installed in a suitable NRTL Open circuit fault impedance 22K ohms
labled NEMA rated enclosure.
OUTPUT / NOTIFICATION / RELEASING OR
CENELEC/CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
UNSUPERVISED DEVICE CIRCUITS - CHANNEL 6-8
0539 II 3 G
EEx nC IIC T4 UNSUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING—
DEMKO 03 ATEX 136206U Rating: 2 amperes at 30 Vdc maximum.
T4 (Tamb = –40°C to +85°C). Note: Voltage available at outputs is dependent on
input voltage (Vout ≈ Vin – 1 Vdc).
Special conditions for safe use:
The device shall be installed in an enclosure that OUTPUT STYLE—
complies with all relevant requirements of EN 50021: Form "A" normally off.
1999, and provides a degree of ingress protection of
at least IP54. The device may only be installed, RESPONSE TIME—
connected or removed when the area is known to be Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging
non-hazardous. an alarm command message.
No EOL resistor required.

3.1 6-6 95-8533

SUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING—SIGNALING EQ2110PS, EQ2130PS AND EQ2175PS
TYPE, STYLE "Y" - CHANNEL 6 POWER SUPPLIES
MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT—
INPUT VOLTAGE—
2 amperes at 30 Vdc maximum, 15 Amp inrush.
Selectable for 120, 208 or 240 vac input power,
Automatic short circuit protection provided.
±10%.
SUPERVISORY CURRENT—
INPUT FREQUENCY—
Reverse current monitored at 1.5 mA, ± 0.5 mA.
60 Hz ±5% standard, 50 Hz ±5% optional.
End of Line Resistor 10 K ohms ±20%.
INPUT CURRENT—
RESPONSE TIME—
EQ2110PS: 4 amps at 120 VAC (60 Hz)
Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging
EQ2130PS: 11 / 6 / 6 amps at 120 / 208 / 240 VAC*
an alarm command message.
EQ2175PS: 24 / 15 / 12 amps at 120 / 208 / 240 VAC*.
*Specify 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
SIGNALING OUTPUT, TYPES—
Configurable for device applications:
OUTPUT CURRENT—
EQ2110PS: 10 amperes at 24 VDC
STANDARD “SAM” SELECTIONS—
EQ2130PS: 30 amperes at 24 VDC
Continuous
EQ2175PS: 75 amperes at 24 VDC.
60 beats per minute
120 beats per minute
POWER CONSUMPTION—
Temporal Pattern.
EQ2110PS: 46 Watts
Trouble
EQ2130PS: 140 Watts
Supervisory
EQ2175PS: 349 Watts.

SUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING— RELEASING TEMPERATURE RANGE—

TYPE - CHANNEL 7 AND 8 Operating: +32°F to +122°F (0°C to +50°C)
Storage: -40°F to +185°F (-40°C to +85°C).
MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT—
2 amperes at 30 Vdc maximum, 15 Amp inrush. HUMIDITY RANGE—
Automatic short circuit protection provided. 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.

SUPERVISORY CURRENT— DIMENSIONS—

Monitored at 1.3 mA ±0.2 mA. in Inches (Centimeters)
No EOL resistor required. Width Height Depth
EQ2110PS: 19 (48.3) 7 (17.8) 15 (38.1)
RESPONSE TIME— EQ2130PS: 19 (48.3) 14 (35.6) 15 (38.1)
Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging EQ2175PS: 19 (48.3) 14 (35.6) 15 (38.1)
an alarm command message.
NOTE
RELEASING OUTPUT, TYPES— Power supplies are designed for mounting in a
Configurable for device applications: standard 19 inch rack. Optional mounting
hardware is available for floor or wall mount
– Continuous applications.
– Timed.
CERTIFICATION—
FM / CSA: Ordinary locations.

3.1 6-7 95-8533

EQ21xxPSM POWER SUPPLY MONITOR EQ22xxIDC/IDCGF INITIATING DEVICE
CIRCUIT
INPUT VOLTAGE—
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 Vdc. INPUT VOLTAGE—
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
POWER CONSUMPTION— not cause damage to the equipment.
2.0 watts maximum.
INPUT POWER—
MEASUREMENT RANGE— 4.0 watts maximum.
AC Voltage: 240 vac maximum.
DC Battery Charging Current: 75 amperes maximum. INPUTS—
Two supervised non-incendive digital inputs (sealed
OUTPUT— or unsealed switch or relay contacts). 10 kohm EOL
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 k resistors are required.
bps).
OUTPUTS—
TEMPERATURE RANGE— Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5
Operating: +32°F to +122°F (0°C to +50°C) kbps).
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
HUMIDITY RANGE— Operating: –40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C).
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing. Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).

DIMENSIONS— HUMIDITY RANGE—

See Figure 6-4. 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.

CERTIFICATION— VIBRATION—
FM / CSA: Ordinary locations. FM 3260.

DIMENSIONS—
See Figure 6-5.

9
(22.9)
4.7
0.28 (11.8)
8.5 (0.71) 3.4
(21.6) (8.6)

2.25 6.6
J1 J3 (5.7) (16.8)
4
(10.2)

5.2 2.7
(13.2) (6.8)
B C

1.28
(3.25)

2.5 B2046
(6.4) 0.32 (0.81) OVAL SLOT MOUNTING
(TYPICAL FOUR PLACES)

A2038

Figure 6-4—Dimensions of Power Supply Monitor in Inches Figure 6-5—Dimensions of Tall Cover Junction Box in Inches
(Centimeters) (Centimeters)

3.1 6-8 95-8533

CERTIFICATION—
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D.
Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC.
Class II/III, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G.
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4A).
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
Class II/III, Div. 2, Groups F & G (T4A).
NEMA/Type 4X.
Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.
Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details.
CENELEC/CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
0539 II 2 G
EEx d IIC T4-T6
DEMKO 02 ATEX 131321X
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C).
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C).
T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C).
IP66.
EQ2220GFM GROUND FAULT MONITOR
INPUT VOLTAGE—
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
not cause damage to the equipment.
INPUT POWER—
1.0 watt maximum.
OUTPUT—
Form C NO/NC relay contact rated 1 ampere
(resistive) at 30 Vdc maximum.
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
Storage: –-67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
HUMIDITY RANGE—
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.

Special Conditions for Safe Use (X): DIMENSIONS—

The device has an ambient temperature rating for See Figure 6-6.
performance of –40°C to +75°C.
SHIPPING WEIGHT—
Refer to Appendix C for CE Mark details. 0.5 pounds (0.2 kilograms)

CERTIFICATION—

FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).

Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).

CENELEC/CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.

0539 II 3 G
EEx nC IIC T4
DEMKO 03 ATEX 136222U
T4 (Tamb = –40°C to +85°C).

Special Conditions for Safe Use:

The EQ2220GFM shall be installed in an enclosure
that complies with all relevant requirements of
EN50021:1999 and provides a degree of ingress
protection of at least IP54.

The EQ2220GFM may only be installed, connected,

or removed when the area is known to be non-
hazardous.

2.9 1.2
(7.4) (3.0)

2.1
(5.3)
1.75
(4.4)

A2237

Figure 6-6—Dimensions of Ground Fault Monitor

in Inches (Centimeters)

3.1 6-9 95-8533

EQ22xxDCU AND EQ22xxDCUEX DIGITAL EQ25xxARM AGENT RELEASE MODULE
COMMUNICATION UNIT
RELEASE OUTPUT RATING—
INPUT VOLTAGE— 2 amperes at 30 vdc maximum.
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
not cause damage to the equipment. SUPERVISORY CURRENT—
2.0 ma, ±1.0 ma each circuit.
POWER CONSUMPTION—
DCU with toxic gas sensor/transmitter: INPUT VOLTAGE—
95 ma maximum. 24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
not cause damage to the equipment.
DCU with transmitter and combustible gas sensor: NOTE: For deluge and pre-action applications, input
180 ma maximum during normal operation, 500 ma voltage to the device must be 21 vdc minimum to ensure
during startup. proper operation of the connected output device.

INPUTS— INPUT CURRENT—

4 to 20 ma analog signal. Standby: 75 ma maximum at 24 vdc.
Non-intrusive calibration. Alarm: 120 ma maximum at 24 vdc.

OUTPUTS— STATUS OUTPUTS—

Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 kbps).
kbps).
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
TEMPERATURE RANGE— Operating: –40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C).
Operating: –40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C). Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
HUMIDITY RANGE—
HUMIDITY RANGE— 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
VIBRATION—
VIBRATION— Meets MIL SPEC 810C, method 514.2, curve AW.
FM 6310/6320.
DIMENSIONS—
DIMENSIONS— See Figure 6-5.
See Figure 6-5.
CERTIFICATION—
CERTIFICATION— FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D.
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D. Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC.
Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC. Class II/III, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G.
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4A). Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4A).
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4). Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
Class II/III, Div. 1 & 2 (for use with Model STB). Class II/III, Div. 2, Groups F & G (T4A).
NEMA/Type 4X (for use with Model STB). NEMA/Type 4X.
Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details. Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.
Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details. Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details.

CENELEC/CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant. CENELEC/CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.

0539 II 2 G 0539 II 2 G
EEx d IIC T4-T6 EEx d IIC T4-T6
DEMKO 02 ATEX 131321X DEMKO 02 ATEX 131321X
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C). T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C).
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C). T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C).
T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C). T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C).
IP66. IP66.
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X): Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
The device has an ambient temperature rating for The device has an ambient temperature rating for
performance of –40°C to +75°C. performance of –40°C to +75°C.
Refer to Appendix C for CE Mark details. Refer to Appendix C for CE Mark details.

3.1 6-10 95-8533

EQ25xxSAM SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE CERTIFICATION—
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D.
OUTPUT RATING— Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC.
2 amperes at 30 vdc maximum. Class II/III, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G.
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4A).
RESPONSE TIME— Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
Output relay actuates in <0.1 second after Class II/III, Div. 2, Groups F & G (T4A).
acknowledging an alarm command message. NEMA/Type 4X.
Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.
SUPERVISORY CURRENT— Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details.
3.0 ma ± 2.0ma, each circuit.
CENELEC/CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
EOL RESISTORS — 0539 II 2 G
10 kohm ± 2 kohm. Each circuit must have an EOL EEx d IIC T4-T6
resistor. DEMKO 02 ATEX 131321X
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C).
INPUT VOLTAGE— T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C).
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C).
not cause damage to the equipment. IP66.
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
INPUT CURRENT (Excluding Output Current)— The device has an ambient temperature rating for
Standby: 60 ma maximum at 24 vdc. performance of –40°C to +75°C.
Alarm: 120 ma maximum at 24 vdc.
Refer to Appendix C for CE Mark details.
STATUS OUTPUT—
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5
kbps).
EQ24xxNE NETWORK EXTENDER
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
Operating: –40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C). INPUT VOLTAGE—
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C). 24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
not cause damage to the equipment.
HUMIDITY RANGE—
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing. POWER CONSUMPTION—
2.2 watts nominal at 24 vdc, 2.7 watts maximum.
VIBRATION—
Meets MIL SPEC 810C, method 514.2, curve AW. INPUTS/OUTPUTS—
Digital, transformer isolated (78.5k Baud).
DIMENSIONS—
See Figure 6-5. TEMPERATURE RANGE—
Operating: –40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C)
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).

HUMIDITY—
5 to 95% RH at 70°C.

DIMENSIONS—
See Figure 6-7.

CERTIFICATION—
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D.
Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC.
Class II/III, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G.
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4A).
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
Class II/III, Div. 2, Groups F & G (T4A).
NEMA/Type 4X.

3.1 6-11 95-8533

 0.28 4.66
COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSOR
(0.71) (11.8)

3.39 Refer to the Combustible Gas Sensor Specification

(8.6)
Data sheet, form 90-1041, for specifications.

ELECTROCHEMICAL SENSORS
Refer to the Electrochemical Gas Sensor Specification
Data sheet, form 90-1079, for specifications.
Electrochemical sensors available from Det-Tronics
include Hydrogen Sulfide, Oxygen, Carbon
5.20 2.69 Monoxide, Chlorine, Sulfur Dioxide, and Nitrogen
(13.21) (6.83)
Dioxide.

EQ21XXPS POWER SUPPLY

The EQ21xxPS Rectifier / Power Supply has many
inherent advantages such as voltage regulation, high
efficiency, high power factor and short circuit
protection.
0.32 (0.81) OVAL SLOT MOUNTING
(TYPICAL FOUR PLACES)
These chargers provide separate adjustable voltages
for floating or equalizing lead or nickel-cadmium cells.
An equalize switch is located on the front panel of the
3.7
(9.4)
charger for manual activation or a multi-mode
electronic timer can be used for automatic activation.

Steady state output voltage remains within +/- 1/2% of

the setting from no load to full load and for AC input
1.28
voltages within +/- 10% of the nominal input voltage.
(3.25) The power supply is internally filtered to be no greater
A1883 than 32dBrn (“C” message weighting) and 30
millivolts RMS for all conditions on input voltage and
Figure 6-7—Dimensions of Short Cover Junction Box
in Inches (Centimeters)
output load with or without batteries connected. This
allows the A36D to be used as a battery eliminator.

Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.

Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details.

CENELEC/CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.

0539 II 2 G
EEx d IIC T4-T6
DEMKO 02 ATEX 131321X
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C).
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C).
T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C).
IP66.
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
The device has an ambient temperature rating for
performance of –40°C to +75°C.

Refer to Appendix C for CE Mark details.

3.1 6-12 95-8533

 APPENDIX A
FM APPROVAL DESCRIPTION

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

• Refer to Figure A-1 for System Classification details.

• EQxxxxEM versions rated nonincendive for Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4A).

FIRE DETECTION & RELEASING

• National Fire Alarm Code performance verified per ANSI/NFPA 72-1999. Refer to Table A-1 for supervision
characteristics.
• Refer to the Model X3301, X5200, X2200 and X9800 manuals (see Table 2-4) for further FM flame performance
details. Additional 2 second response time applied for system communication.
• Models EQ3700 Series and EQ22xxARM Series are Approved as agent releasing circuits and are Approved for
use with the following automatic deluge and pre-action solenoids:

FM Solenoid Group Manufacturer Model

B ASCO T8210A107
D ASCO 8210G207
E Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2
F Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2
G Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2
H Viking HV-274-0601

GAS DETECTION

• Combustible Gas Performance verified for 0 to 100% LFL methane-in-air atmospheres per FM 6310/6320.
Accuracy: ±3% LFL from 0 to 50% LFL, ±5% LFL from 51% to 100% LFL. For the Model PIRECL, refer to the
PIRECL manual (form number 95-8526) for further FM gas performance details.

NOTE: Detector Electronics combustible gas detection K factors are not FM verified.

• H2S Toxic Gas Performance verified 0 to 20, 50 or 100 ppm per FM requirements. Accuracy: ±2 ppm from 0 to 20
ppm, ±10% of concentration from 21 to 100 ppm. Models C7064E4012 and C7064E5012 Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S)
Sensors Explosion-proof for Class I, Div. 1, Groups C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615. Model
C7064E5014 Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) Sensors Explosion-proof for Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous
(Classified) Locations per FM 3615. Operating temperature limits are –40°C to +40°C.

NOTE: Sensor cross sensitivity has not been verified by FM.

• Calibration of the above listed sensors has been FM verified using the respective EQ22xxDCU, EQ22xxDCUEX,
and PIRECL with the Det-Tronics 225130-001 (50% LFL methane) and/or 227115-001 H2S Calibration Kits.
• The EQ22xxDCU Series can be used with any FM Approved 4-20 ma device.

NOTE
FM Approval of the 4-20 ma input does not include or imply approval of the gas detection apparatus such as
sensors, transmitters, or devices connected to the system. In order to maintain FM Approval of the system, all
4-20 ma gas detection instruments connected to the input must also be FM Approved.

3.1 A-1 95-8533

 NOTE
FM Approval allows the presence and operation of serial communications software in the Controller (MODBUS,
Allen Bradley protocols, etc.); however, the communications functions are not included in the Approval.

Table A-1—Circuit Classifications

Signaling Path NFPA 72 Supervision

Local Operating Network (LON) Signaling Line Circuit (SLC): Class A, Style 7
Power Distribution Module, Input Power Supervised. Loss of power per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 1-5.8.7.
Power Distribution Module, Controller Power Output Supervised. Loss of power per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 1-5.8.7.
Power Distribution Module, Field Device Power Output Supervised. Single open or ground-fault per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 1-5.8.
Power Distribution Module, Local Field Device Power Output Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 1-5.8, Exception #7 & #8.
Power Supply Monitor, Input Power Supervised. Loss of power per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 1-5.8.7.
Power Supply Monitor, Output Power Supervised (via Controller for opens).
Single open or ground-fault per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 1-5.8.
Power Supply Monitor, Charger Supervised. Loss of charger per NFPA Cl. 1-5.2.9.5.
Power Supply Monitor, Battery Supervised. Loss of battery per NFPA Cl. 1-5.8.7.
Controller, Digital Input Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 1-5.8, Exception #7 & #8.
Controller, Relay Output Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 1-5.8, Exception #7 & #8.
Controller, Trouble Relay Output Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 1-5.8, Exception #7 & #8.
Relay Module, Output Unsupervised, for connection with ancillary equipment only.
Direct Current I/O, Input (software configurable) Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 1-5.8, Exception #7 & #8.
Initiating Device Circuit (IDC): Class B, Style B
Initiating Device Circuit (IDCSC): Class B, Style C
Direct Current I/O, Output (software configurable) Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 1-5.8, Exception #7 & #8.
Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC): Class B, Style Y
Supervised Solenoids:
Single open or ground-fault per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 1-5.8.
Group B: ASCO T8210A107
Group D: ASCO 8210G207
Group E: Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2
Group F: Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2
Group G: Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2
Group H: Viking HV-274-060-7
IDC Input Initiating Device Circuit (IDC): Class B, Style B
IDCGF Input (Channel 2 only) Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 1-5.8, Exception #7 & #8.
SAM Output Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC): Class B, Style Y
ARM Output Supervised Solenoids:
Single open or ground-fault per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 1-5.8.
Group B: ASCO T8210A107
Group D: ASCO 8210G207
Group E: Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2
Group F: Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2
Group G: Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2
Group H: Viking HV-274-060-7

3.1 A-2 95-8533

 DWG NO SH REV

8 7 6 5 4 3 1

3.1
CL I, DIV 1, GRPS B, C & D
CL I, DIV 2 GRPS A, B, C & D (T4) CL I, ZONE 1, GRP IIB + H2 (T4)
CL I, ZONE 2, GRP IIC (T4) CL II, DIV 1, GRPS E, F & G, CL III
CL I, DIV 1, GRPS C & D
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS CL I, DIV 2, GRPS A, B, C & D (T4A)
ORDINARY LOCATIONS CL I, DIV 2, GRPS A,B,C & D (T4A)
(Tamb = -40°C TO +85°C) CL I, ZONE 2, GRP IIC (T4)
(Tamb = 0°C to +50°C) HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXCEPT WHERE SHOWN CL II, DIV 2, GRPS F & G (T4A) (Tamb = -40°C TO +40°C)
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS NEMA/TYPE 4X
(Tamb = -40°C TO +75°C)
EXCEPT WHERE SHOWN
CGS SERIES
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
Safety System Controller COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSOR
D EQ22xxDCUEX SERIES (006888-001) D
F1=50mA F2=50mA
Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr

COMBUSTIBLE DIGITAL

CONTROLLER
1
Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence COMMUNICATION UNIT
1
(CLASS I LOCATIONS ONLY)

DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORPORATION

MINNEAPOLIS, MN, USA
(006684-001)

007390-002 REV. B

S/N:
DATE CODE:

MODEL: EQ3000
Cancel Enter Nex Previous Rese Acknowledge Silence
1

EQ300X SERIES CONTROLLER

006974-001
(007394-001)
CGS SERIES
COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSOR
EQ2100PSM SERIES EQ22xxDCUEX SERIES (006888-001)
POWER SUPPLY MONITOR COMBUSTIBLE DIGITAL C7064E4012 or C7064E5012
(006982-001) EQ2220GFM (CLASS I LOCATIONS ONLY)
4 COMMUNICATION UNIT HYDROGEN SULFIDE
(007947-001) SENSOR TERMINATION BOX
(006684-001) SENSOR
SUITABLE METALLIC NRTL LABELED (006723-001)
EQ2110PS, EQ2130PS OR NEMA RATED ENCLOSURE EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
(006705-001)
POWER DISTRIBUTION
DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORPORATION MODULE
MINNEAPOLIS, MN, USA
EQ2175PS POWER SUPPLY CAUTION:
READ AND UNDERSTAND
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
BEFORE OPERATING
OR SERVICING.

MODEL: EQ3800
(006691-001) S/N:
DATE CODE:
INPUT VOLTAGE: 24 Vdc NOM. 18-30 Vdc
C7064E5014 SERIES
INPUT CURRENT: 20A
OUTPUT VOLTAGE: 27 Vdc NOM.
BATTERY OUTPUT CURRENT: SEE MANUAL
POWER GROUND MUST BE INSTALLED IN
POWER FAULT FAULT SUITABLE NRTL LABELED
NEMA RATED ENCLOSURE HYDROGEN SULFIDE EQ2200DCU SERIES
2 3 + -
INPUT
+ -
CONTROLLER
+ - + -
LOCAL PWR FIELD PWR
+ - + - + - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BACK-UP SENSOR
EQ22xxDCU SERIES DIGITAL
(Tamb -40°C TO +40°C) COMMUNICATION UNIT
EQ3800 PDM DIGITAL (CLASS I, DIV 1 (006705-001)
CL I, DIV 2 GRPS A, B, C & D(T3A) COMMUNICATION UNIT LOCATIONS ONLY) (006684-001)
CL I, ZONE 2, GRP IIC (T3) (006684-001)
(007372-001)
6
LOCAL POWER
PIR9400 SERIES
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER 8 CHANNEL DCIO
MODEL: EQ22xxDCU SERIES INFRARED GAS SENSOR
DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORPORATION S/N:
MINNEAPOLIS, MN, USA
DATE CODE:
(CLASS I (006535-001)
POWER COM 1 COM 2 DIGITAL
FM APPROVED + - S + - S ABS ABS LOCATIONS ONLY, T3C)
COMMUNICATION UNIT OR OTHER
INITIATING DEVICE, NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE FM APPROVED
EQ3700 DCIO ONLY ADDRESS P F
(006684-001)
OR SUPPRESSION ACTUATOR 4-20mA DEVICE 5
C INSTALL PER C
NFPA 70 & 72
HART INTERFACE MODULE C7064E4012 or C7064E5012
P/N 008056-001 FM APPROVED
(007949-001)
HYDROGEN SULFIDE
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE
INSTALL PER SENSOR
(006705-001)
S3 NFPA 70 & 72

EQ3720 RM EQ3710 AIM EQ3740 IPM EQ25xxSAM SERIES C7064E5014 SERIES

EQ3700 DCIO
(007373-001) / (007793-001) / (007943-001) / (007945-001) SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE HYDROGEN SULFIDE SENSOR TERMINATION BOX
4 (006753-001) SENSOR (006723-001)
(CLASS I, DIV 1 (Tamb -40°C TO +40°C)
SUITABLE LOCKED NRTL LABELED (Tamb = -40°C TO +75°C) LOCATIONS ONLY) (006705-001)
NEMA RATED ENCLOSURE FM APPROVED
OPTIONAL OPERATOR SUPPRESSION ACTUATOR
OR
INTERFACE STATION INSTALL PER
ADALET CN4X-201610 OR CN4X-161206 OR
NFPA 70 & 72
TSC4X-141008U-ABCD R6095 OR
TSC4X-141008U-ABCD R6096
CLASS I, DIV 2 GRPS A, B, C & D (T3A) EQ25xxARM SERIES PIR9400 SERIES
CLASS I, ZONE 2, GRP IIC (T3) EQ22EMDCU & EQ22EMDCUEX AGENT RELEASE MODULE SENSOR TERMINATION BOX INFRARED GAS SENSOR
(Tamb = -40°C TO +60°C) DIGITAL COMMUNICATION UNIT (006752-001) (006723-001) (CLASS I (006535-001)
NEMA/TYPE 4X (006684-001, ITEMS 16, 17,18 & 19) LOCATIONS ONLY, T3C)
(007569-001) OR OTHER

A-3
FM APPROVED FM APPROVED
OR INITIATING DEVICE 5
4-20mA DEVICE
KILLARK EXB-12128 N34 (SEALED OR UNSEALED)
WITH OR WITHOUT GLXR27 WINDOW INSTALL PER
CLASS I, DIV 1, GRPS B, C & D (T5); NFPA 70 & 72
CLASS I, ZONE 1, GROUP IIB (T5); EQ25EMSAM
CLASS II, DIV 1, GRPS E, F, G (T5); CLASS III; EQ22xxIDC/EQ22xxIDCGF SERIES
SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUIT
B (Tamb = -40°C TO +60°C) (006753-001, ITEMS 10, 11,12 & 13)
B
NEMA/TYPE 4 (006685-001) CONNECTED IN
OR CONJUNCTION WITH
EAGLE QUANTUM
KILLARK EXB-122412 N34
WITH OR WITHOUT GLXR27 WINDOW FIELD DEVICES
CLASS I, DIV 1, GROUPS C & D;
CLASS II, DIV 1, GROUPS E, F, G; CLASS III EQ24xxNE SERIES
(Tamb = -40°C TO +60°C) EQ25EMARM NETWORK EXTENDER
NEMA/TYPE 4 AGENT RELEASE MODULE (006980-001)
(007568-001) (006752-001, ITEMS 10, 11,12 & 13)

SUITABLE LOCKED NRTL LABELED 4

NEMA RATED ENCLOSURE
PIRECLx4 SERIES
7. PART NUMBERS IN PARENTHESIS DEFINE DESIGN REFERENCE DRAWING
IR GAS DETECTOR
ASSOCIATED WITH A DEVICE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. EQ22EMIDC & EQ22EMIDCGF CL I, DIV 1, GRPS C & D (T4)
INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUIT CL I, DIV 2, GRPS A, B, C & D (T4)
6 WIRING MUST BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI/NFPA 72-1999, (006685-001, ITEMS 10, 11,12 & 13) (007262-001) PIRTB TERMINATION BOX
CL. 1-5.8, EXCEPTIONS #7 & #8. E 7050 ADD C7050B,EQ22xxUVHT & EQ22EM.
(006542-001)
5 WARNING: ENSURE SENSOR HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION D 7142 EQP UPDATE : AIM, IPM, HIM, GFM
RATING IS APPLICABLE FOR THE INTENDED USE. C 7021 COMPLETE MODEL NUMBERS FOR 9/10/03 KAT

4 NO MODIFICATIONS ARE PERMITTED ON FLAME DETECTORS AND EQ300X.

NRTL LABELED NEMA RATED ENCLOSURE(S). C7050B SERIES B 6868 ADD X22\52\98 & EQ3720. 06/03 KAT

EQ24EMNE EQ22xxUVHT SERIES UV FLAME DETECTOR REMOVE C7050B & EQ22XXUVHT.

3 WHERE THE PRIMARY POWER IS SUPPLIED BY A DEDICATED BRANCH UV FLAME DETECTOR Tamb = A 6715 NEW RELEASE 12/17/02 KAT
NETWORK EXTENDER
CIRCUIT OF AN OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH ELECTRONIC MODULE -40°C TO +125°C
(006980-001, ITEMS 11 & 22) REV ECO NO. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED
NFPA 70, NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, ARTICAL 702, WHICH ALSO MEETS (006839-001) DRAWN DATE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
A (007097-001) TOLERANCES ARE : A
THE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OF ARTICAL 700 OR ARTICAL 701, CDS 12/17/02 DIMENSION TOLERANCE
CHECKED DATE INCH (MM) INCH (MM)
A SECONDARY SUPPLY SHALL NOT BE REQUIRED. 0.0 (0) ±.02 ±(0.5)
DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORP.
X3301xxx14 SERIES X2200xxx14 SERIES X9800xxx14 SERIES X5200xxx14 SERIES 0.00 (0.0) ±.01 ±(0.25)
APP'D DATE MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55438
0.000 (0.00) ±.005 ±(0.13)
IR FLAME DETECTOR UV FLAME DETECTOR IR FLAME DETECTOR UVIR FLAME DETECTOR ANGLE ±1'
2 WHERE THE PRIMARY POWER IS SUPPLIED BY A DEDICATED BRANCH APP'D DATE REMOVE ALL BURRS BREAK ALL
EDGES AND SHARP CORNERS
CIRCUIT OF AN EMERGENCY SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70, CL I, DIV 2, GRPS A, B, C & D (T3C) CL I, DIV I, GRP B,C & D(T5); FIRST USED ON THIS DRAWING AND SPECIFICATION CONTAIN PROPRIETARY
EQ22EMUVHT CL II, DIV 2, GRPS F & G (T3C) CL II, DIV I, GRP E,F &G(T5), CL III; INFORMATION AND ANY REPRODUCTION DISCLOSURE OR USE
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, ARTICLE 700, OR A LEGALLY REQUIRED CL I, DIV 2, GRP A,B,C & D (T3); BILL OF MAT'L REQ.
(007264-001) THEREOF IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
STANDBY SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70, NATIONAL ELECTRICAL UV FLAME HIGH TEMPERATURE MODULE CL II/III, DIV 2, GRP F&G (T3); NO PERMISSION OF DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORPORATION.
(007097-001, ITEM 17) (007399-001) SHEET SCALE
CODE, ARTICAL 701, A SECONDARY SUPPLY SHALL NOT BE REQUIRED. 1 OF 1 DO NOT SCALE DRAWING N/A SIZE DRAWING NO. REV

TITLE

1. FM APPROVED DRAWING - NO MODIFICATIONS PERMITTED WITHOUT REFERENCE TO FM. DWG, DESIGN REFERENCE D 007545-001 E
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER SYSTEM "FMA"
CADDS NAME: 7545-01e
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Figure A-1 (Drawing 007545-001)

95-8533
 APPENDIX B
CSA INTERNATIONAL CERTIFICATION DESCRIPTION

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

• Refer to Figure B-1 for System Classification details.

• EQxxxxEM versions rated Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4A).

GAS DETECTION

• Combustible Gas Performance verified for 0 to 100% LFL methane-in-air atmospheres per CSA C22.2 No. 152.
Accuracy: ±3% LFL from 0 to 50% LFL, ±5% LFL from 51% to 100% LFL. For the Model PIRECL, refer to the
PIRECL manual (form number 95-8526) for further CSA gas performance details.

NOTE: Detector Electronics combustible gas detection K factors are not CSA verified.

• Calibration of the devices has been CSA verified using the respective EQ22xxDCU, EQ22xxDCUEX and PIRECL
Series with the Det-Tronics 225130-001 (50% LFL methane) and 227115-001 H2S Calibration Kits.
• The EQ22xxDCU Series can be used with any CSA Certified 4-20 ma device.

NOTE
CSA Certification of the 4-20 ma input does not include or imply approval of the gas detection apparatus such as
sensors, transmitters, or devices connected to the system. In order to maintain CSA Certification of the system,
all 4-20 ma gas detection instruments connected to the input must also be CSA Certified.

NOTE
CSA Certification allows the presence and operation of serial communications software in the Controller
(MODBUS, Allen Bradley protocols, etc.); however, the communications functions are not included in the
Certification.

3.1 B-1 95-8533

 DWG NO SH REV

8 7 6 5 4 3 1

3.1
CL I, DIV 1 GRPS B, C & D
CL I, DIV 2 GRPS A, B, C & D (T4) CL I, ZONE 1, GRP IIB + H2 (T5)
CL I, ZONE 2, GRP IIC (T4) CL II, DIV 1 GRPS E, F & G, CL III
CL I, DIV 1, GRPS C & D
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS CL I, DIV 2 GRPS A, B, C & D (T4A)
ORDINARY LOCATIONS CL I, DIV 2, GRPS A,B,C & D (T4A)
(Tamb = -40°C TO +85°C) CL I, ZONE 2, GRP IIC (T4)
(Tamb = 0°C to +50°C) HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXCEPT WHERE SHOWN CL II, DIV 2 GRPS F & G (T4A) (Tamb = -40°C TO +40°C)
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS NEMA/TYPE 4X
(Tamb = -40°C TO +75°C)
EXCEPT WHERE SHOWN
CGS SERIES
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
Safety System Controller COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSOR
D EQ22xxDCUEX SERIES (006887-001) D
F1=50mA F2=50mA
Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr

COMBUSTIBLE DIGITAL

CONTROLLER
1
Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence COMMUNICATION UNIT
1
(CLASS I LOCATIONS ONLY)

DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORPORATION

MINNEAPOLIS, MN, USA
(006688-001)

007390-002 REV. B

S/N:
DATE CODE:

MODEL: EQ3000
Cancel Enter Nex Previous Rese Acknowledge Silence
1

EQ300X SERIES CONTROLLER

006974-001
(007394-001)
CGS SERIES
COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSOR
EQ2100PSM SERIES EQ22xxDCUEX SERIES (006887-001)
POWER SUPPLY MONITOR COMBUSTIBLE DIGITAL
(006982-001) EQ2220GFM COMMUNICATION UNIT STB SERIES (CLASS I LOCATIONS ONLY)
4
(007947-001) SENSOR TERMINATION BOX C7064E SERIES
(006688-001)
SUITABLE METALLIC NRTL LABELED (006724-001) HYDROGEN SULFIDE
EQ2110PS, EQ2130PS OR NEMA RATED ENCLOSURE EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
POWER DISTRIBUTION SENSOR
DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORPORATION MODULE
MINNEAPOLIS, MN, USA
EQ2175PS POWER SUPPLY CAUTION:
READ AND UNDERSTAND
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
BEFORE OPERATING
OR SERVICING.
(005557-001)
MODEL: EQ3800
(006691-001) S/N:
DATE CODE:
INPUT VOLTAGE: 24 Vdc NOM. 18-30 Vdc
C7064E5014 SERIES
INPUT CURRENT: 20A
OUTPUT VOLTAGE: 27 Vdc NOM.
BATTERY OUTPUT CURRENT: SEE MANUAL
POWER GROUND MUST BE INSTALLED IN
POWER FAULT FAULT SUITABLE NRTL LABELED
2 3 NEMA RATED ENCLOSURE HYDROGEN SULFIDE EQ22xxDCU SERIES OR OR
INPUT CONTROLLER LOCAL PWR FIELD PWR
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BACK-UP SENSOR
EQ22xxDCU SERIES DIGITAL C7065E SERIES C7066E SERIES
(Tamb -40°C TO +40°C) COMMUNICATION UNIT
EQ3800 PDM DIGITAL (CLASS I, DIV 1
(005557-001) OXYGEN SENSOR CARBON MONOXIDE
CL I, DIV 2 GRPS A, B, C & D(T3A) COMMUNICATION UNIT LOCATIONS ONLY) (006688-001)
(005897-001) SENSOR
CL I, ZONE 2, GRP IIC (T3) (006688-001) (005897-001)
(007372-001)
6
OR OR
LOCAL POWER
PIR9400 SERIES C7068E SERIES C7069E SERIES
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER 8 CHANNEL DCIO
MODEL: EQ22xxDCU SERIES INFRARED GAS SENSOR
DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORPORATION S/N: SULFUR DIOXIDE NITROGEN DIOXIDE
MINNEAPOLIS, MN, USA
DATE CODE:
(CLASS I
POWER COM 1 COM 2 DIGITAL LOCATIONS ONLY, T3C) (006367-001) SENSOR SENSOR
FM APPROVED + - S + - S ABS ABS
COMMUNICATION UNIT OR OTHER (005557-001) (005557-001)
INITIATING DEVICE, NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE
EQ3700 DCIO ONLY ADDRESS P F
(006688-001) CSA APPROVED
OR SUPPRESSION ACTUATOR
C INSTALL PER 4-20mA DEVICE 3 C
NFPA 70 & 72
HART INTERFACE MODULE
P/N 008056-001
(007949-001) C7064E SERIES
HYDROGEN SULFIDE
S3 SENSOR
C7050B SERIES
(005557-001)
EQ22xxUVHT SERIES UV FLAME DETECTOR C7064E5014 SERIES
EQ3700 DCIO EQ3720 RM EQ3710 AIM EQ3740 IPM
/ / / UV FLAME DETECTOR Tamb = HYDROGEN SULFIDE STB SERIES OR OR
(007373-001) (007793-001) (007943-001) (007945-001) -40°C TO +125°C
4 EQ22xxUVIR SERIES ELECTRONIC MODULE SENSOR SENSOR
UV/IR FLAME DETECTOR (006862-001) (Tamb -40°C TO +40°C) C7065E SERIES C7066E SERIES
(007088-001) (CLASS I, DIV 1 TERMINATION BOX
(006909-001) (005557-001) OXYGEN SENSOR CARBON MONOXIDE
(Tamb = -40°C TO +75°C) LOCATIONS ONLY) (006724-001)
SUITABLE LOCKED NRTL LABELED (005897-001) SENSOR
OPTIONAL OPERATOR NEMA RATED ENCLOSURE (005897-001)
INTERFACE STATION OR CSA CERTIFIED
ADALET CN4X-201610 OR CN4X-161206 OR NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE OR OR
TSC4X-141008U-ABCD R6095 OR C7068E SERIES C7069E SERIES
TSC4X-141008U-ABCD R6096 PIR9400 SERIES
EQ22EMDCU & EQ22EMDCUEX STB SERIES SULFUR DIOXIDE NITROGEN DIOXIDE
CLASS I, DIV 2 GRPS A, B, C & D (T3A) INFRARED GAS SENSOR
(CLASS I SENSOR SENSOR
CLASS I, ZONE 2, GRP IIC (T3) DIGITAL COMMUNICATION UNIT SENSOR TERMINATION BOX (006367-001)
EQ25xxSAM SERIES LOCATIONS ONLY, T3C) (005557-001) (005557-001)
(Tamb = -40°C TO +60°C) (006688-001, ITEMS 16, 17,18 & 19) (006724-001)
SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE
NEMA/TYPE 4X (006772-001) OR OTHER

B-2
(007569-001) CSA APPROVED
3
4-20mA DEVICE
OR CSA CERTIFIED
KILLARK EXB-12128 N34 SUPPRESSION ACTUATOR
WITH OR WITHOUT GLXR27 WINDOW
CLASS I, DIV 1, GRPS B, C & D (T5); EQ25EMSAM
CLASS I, ZONE 1, GROUP IIB (T5); SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE
B CLASS II, DIV 1, GRPS E, F, G (T5); CLASS III; (006772-001, ITEMS 10, 11,12 & 13)
B
EQ25xxARM SERIES
(Tamb = -40°C TO +60°C)
AGENT RELEASE MODULE
NEMA/TYPE 4 (006771-001)
OR
KILLARK EXB-122412 N34
WITH OR WITHOUT GLXR27 WINDOW CSA CERTIFIED CONNECTED IN
CLASS I, DIV 1, GROUPS C & D; INITIATING DEVICE
EQ25EMARM CONJUNCTION WITH
CLASS II, DIV 1, GROUPS E, F, G; CLASS III (SEALED OR UNSEALED) EAGLE QUANTUM
(Tamb = -40°C TO +60°C) AGENT RELEASE MODULE FIELD DEVICES
NEMA/TYPE 4 (006771-001, ITEMS 10, 11,12 & 13)
(007568-001)
EQ22xxIDC/EQ22xxIDCGF SERIES EQ24xxNE SERIES
INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUIT NETWORK EXTENDER
SUITABLE LOCKED NRTL LABELED 4 (006689-001)
NEMA RATED ENCLOSURE (006981-001)

EQ22EMIDC & EQ22EMIDCGF

INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUIT
(006689-001, ITEMS 10, 11,12 & 13)

EQ22xxUV SERIES
UV FLAME DETECTOR
(006690-001) C 7155 COMPLETE MODEL #S FOR NFP & EQ300X.
ADD AIM, IPM, GFM, HIM.

PIRECLx4 SERIES B 6912 ADD X22,X52,X98 & EQ3720. 8/28/03 KAT

EQ24EMNE
IR GAS DETECTOR A 6715 NEW RELEASE 12/17/02 KAT
NETWORK EXTENDER CL I, DIV 1, GRPS C & D (T4)
(006981-001, ITEMS 11 & 22) REV ECO NO. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED
4 NO MODIFICATIONS ARE PERMITTED ON CL I, DIV 2, GRPS A, B, C & D (T4)
(007227-001) DRAWN DATE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
A NRTL LABELED NEMA RATED ENCLOSURE(S). PIRTB SERIES TOLERANCES ARE : A
CDS 12/17/02 DIMENSION TOLERANCE
TERMINATION BOX CHECKED DATE INCH (MM) INCH (MM)
0.0 (0) ±.02 ±(0.5)
(006559-001) DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORP.
0.00 (0.0) ±.01 ±(0.25)
APP'D DATE MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55438
3 WARNING: ENSURE SENSOR HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION 0.000 (0.00) ±.005 ±(0.13)
ANGLE ±1'
APP'D DATE REMOVE ALL BURRS BREAK ALL
RATING IS APPLICABLE FOR THE INTENDED USE. EDGES AND SHARP CORNERS
X3301xxx14 SERIES X2200xxx14 SERIES X9800xxx14 SERIES X5200xxx14 SERIES
FIRST USED ON THIS DRAWING AND SPECIFICATION CONTAIN PROPRIETARY
IR FLAME DETECTOR UV FLAME DETECTOR IR FLAME DETECTOR UVIR FLAME DETECTOR INFORMATION AND ANY REPRODUCTION DISCLOSURE OR USE
2. PART NUMBERS IN PARENTHESIS DEFINE THE DESIGN REFERENCE EQ22EMUVHT BILL OF MAT'L REQ. THEREOF IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
DRAWING ASSOCIATED WITH A DEVICE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. UV FLAME HIGH TEMPERATURE MODULE CL I, DIV 2, GRPS A, B, C & D (T3C) CL I, DIV I, GRP B,C & D(T5); NO PERMISSION OF DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORPORATION.
CL II, DIV 2, GRPS F & G (T3C) CL II, DIV I, GRP E,F &G(T5), CL III; SHEET SCALE
(007088-001, ITEM 17) 1 OF 1 DO NOT SCALE DRAWING N/A SIZE DRAWING NO. REV
(007264-001) CL I, DIV 2, GRP A,B,C & D (T3);
1. CSA APPROVED DRAWING - NO MODIFICATIONS PERMITTED CL II/III, DIV 2, GRP F&G (T3); TITLE DWG, DESIGN REFERENCE
WITHOUT REFERENCE TO CSA. (007399-001) EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER SYSTEM D 007546-001 C
"CSA"
CADDS NAME: 7546-01c
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Figure B-1 (Drawing 007546-001)

95-8533
 APPENDIX C

CE MARK
EMC DIRECTIVE

The Eagle Quantum Premier Fire and Gas Detection/Releasing System was tested and found to be compliant with
EN50081-2, EN50082-2, EN50130-4, and EN50270. The following considerations must be given for installation of the
Eagle Quantum Premier system.

• For shielded cable installed in conduit, attach the wire shields to the “shield” connections on the terminal blocks, or
to the earth ground on the case.
• For shielded cable without conduit, the shields MUST be terminated at the earth ground on the case.
• For double shielded cable, terminate the outer shield to the earth ground on the case. Terminate the inner shield to
the “shield” connection on the terminal blocks.

ATEX DIRECTIVE

The Eagle Quantum Premier Fire and Gas Detection / Releasing System was tested and certified to hazardous
location and combustible gas performance standards. Refer to Figure C-1 for system classification details.

3.1 C-1 95-8533

3.1
DWG NO SH REV

8 7 6 5 4 3 1

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

COMPONENT CERTIFICATIONS EEx d IIC T4-T6 EEx d IIC T3, T5
DEMKO 02 ATEX 131323X HAZARDOUS LOCATION TESTING
DEMKO 02 ATEX 131321X
EQ3900E ENCLOSURE HAZARDOUS LOCATION TESTING PROJECT REPORT NO. 131323-XX
T6(Tamb = -55°C TO +50°C) PROJECT REPORT NO. 131321-XX T5(Tamb = -40°C TO +75°C) PERFORMANCE TESTING
(KILLARK EXB-12128 N34 OR
KILLARK EXB-122412 WITH OR WITHOUT GLXR27 WINDOW) T5(Tamb = -55°C TO +65°C) EXCEPT WHERE SHOWN T3(Tamb = -55°C TO +125°C) PROJECT NO. 133189-XX
EEx d IIB T5 T4(Tamb = -55°C TO +75°C)
DEMKO O2 ATEX 133187 HAZARDOUS LOCATION TESTING
EXCEPT WHERE SHOWN
T5 (Tamb = -40°C TO +60°C) PROJECT REPORT NO. 133187-XX
(007400-001)
CGS SERIES
OR
EQ3900N ENCLOSURE COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSOR 4 3
EQ22xxDCUEX SERIES (006881-001)
D ADALET CN4X-201610 OR CN4X-161206 OR COMBUSTIBLE DIGITAL
D
TSC4X-141008U-ABCD R6095 OR COMMUNICATION UNIT 3 4
TSC4X-141008U-ABCD R6096 PERFORMANCE TESTING
EEx nC IIC T3 PROJECT NO. 133189-XX
DEMKO O3 ATEX 133754X HAZARDOUS LOCATION TESTING
(006976-001)
T3 (Tamb = -40°C TO +60°C) PROJECT REPORT NO. 133754-XX CGS SERIES
IP66 COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSOR 4 3
STB SERIES
(007570-001) EQ22xxDCUEX SERIES (006881-001)
SENSOR TERMINATION BOX, OPTIONAL 4
COMBUSTIBLE DIGITAL 3 4 DEMKO 02 ATEX 131324
COMMUNICATION UNIT HAZARDOUS LOCATION TESTING
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER PERFORMANCE TESTING PROJECT REPORT NO. 131324-XX
PROJECT NO. 133189-XX

INSTALLED IN SUITABLE NRTL

ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY MUST BE
LABELED NEMA RATED ENCLOSURE
4 (006976-001) PERFOMANCE TESTING
PROJECT REPORT NO. 133189-XX

INPUT VOLTAGE: 24 VDC NOM.

INPUT CURRENT: SEE MANUAL

CONTROLLER
Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr

(007006-001)
Low Gas
CENELEC APPROVED
Lon Fault Ack Silence

DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORPORATION

MINNEAPOLIS, MN, USA
S/N:
DATE CODE:

MODEL:
4-20mA DEVICE 5

REV. A

AUX

MAIN
POWER

POWER
DIGITAL
INPUT 1
EQ22xxDCU SERIES

007390-002
+ - + - + -

TROUBLE

RELAY
OUTPUT 8
2 3 4 5
NO C NC NO C NC
Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence 42 43 44 45 46 47

HART INTERFACE MODULE DIGITAL

HIM COMMUNICATION UNIT 3 4
EQ300X SERIES CONTROLLER
P/N 008056-001 PERFORMANCE TESTING
EEx nC IIC T4 EEX nA II T4 PROJECT NO. 133189-XX
DEMKO O2 ATEX 133867U DEMKO ATEX 03 136507U (006976-001)
T4(Tamb = -40°C TO +85°C) T4(Tamb = -40°C TO +85°C)
HAZARD LOCATION TESTING (007950-001) CENELEC APPROVED
PROJECT REPORT NO. 133867-XX 4-20mA DEVICE
PERFORMANCE TESTING STB SERIES 5
PROJECT REPORT NO. 133189-XX EQ22xxDCU SERIES
3 4 SENSOR TERMINATION BOX, OPTIONAL 4
(007532-001) DIGITAL
DEMKO 02 ATEX 131324
COMMUNICATION UNIT
PERFORMANCE TESTING HAZARDOUS LOCATION TESTING
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER 8 CHANNEL DCIO EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER 8 CHANNEL AIM PROJECT NO. 133189-XX PROJECT REPORT NO. 131324-XX
MODEL: MODEL:
DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORPORATION S/N: DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORPORATION S/N: PERFOMANCE TESTING
MINNEAPOLIS, MN, USA MINNEAPOLIS, MN, USA
DATE CODE: DATE CODE:
(006976-001)
POWER COM 1 COM 2 PROJECT REPORT NO. 133189-XX
+ - S + - S ABS ABS
CENELEC APPROVED (007006-001)
007383-002
C REV. B C
ADDRESS P F
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE
EQ25xxSAM SERIES
SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE
(006976-001)

CENELEC APPROVED
SUPPRESSION ACTUATOR
EQ25xxARM SERIES
EQ3700 SERIES EQ3710 SERIES
AGENT RELEASE MODULE
DIRECT CURRENT I/O ANALOG INPUT MODULE
DCIO AIM (006976-001)
EEx nC IIC T4 EEx nC IIC T4
DEMKO O2 ATEX 133864U DEMKO O3 ATEX 136207U
T4(Tamb = -40°C TO +85°C) T4(Tamb = -40°C TO +85°C) CENELEC APPROVED
HAZARD LOCATION TESTING
PROJECT REPORT NO. 133864-XX (007944-001) INITIATING DEVICE

C-2
(007534-001) (SEALED OR UNSEALED)

EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER 8 CHANNEL RELAY EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER 8 CHANNEL IPM
EQ22xxIDC/IDCSC/IDCGF SERIES
MODEL: INPUT VOLTAGE: 24 Vdc NOM., 18-30 Vdc MODEL:
INPUT CURRENT: 0.12A
DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORPORATION S/N: RELAY RATING: 30 VDC, S/N:
MINNEAPOLIS, MN, USA 2 AMPS RESISITIVE
DATE CODE: ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY MUST BE INSTALLED IN DATE CODE:
SUITABLE NRTL LABELED NEMA RATED ENCLOSURE
INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUIT/SHORT CIRCUIT/GROUND FAULT
POWER COM 1 COM 2
+ - S + - S A B S A B S
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
(006976-001)
007383-003
REV. A
ADDRESS P F

CENELEC APPROVED
MANUAL CALL POINT

EQ22xxMCP SERIES
MANUAL CALL POINT
(006976-001)
B B
CONNECTED IN
EQ3720 SERIES EQ3740 SERIES CONJUNCTION WITH
RELAY MODULE INTELLIGENT PROTECTION MODULE EAGLE QUANTUM
EQ24xxNE SERIES
EEx nC IIC T4 IPM FIELD DEVICES
DEMKO O3 ATEX 135246U EEx nC IIC T4 NETWORK EXTENDER
T4(Tamb = -40°C TO +85°C) DEMKO O3 ATEX 136206U (006976-001)
HAZARD LOCATION TESTING T4(Tamb = -40°C TO +85°C)
PROJECT REPORT NO. 135246-XX C7050B SERIES
(007946-001)
(007804-001)
UV FLAME DETECTOR
EEX d IIC T4-T6 T130∞C
DEMKO 03 ATEX 135866
T6(Tamb = -55°C TO +75°C)
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
POWER DISTRIBUTION
EQ22xxUVHT SERIES
DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORPORATION MODULE T5(Tamb = -55°C TO +90°C)
MINNEAPOLIS, MN, USA

UV FLAME DETECTOR
MODEL: EQ3700
T4(Tamb = -55°C TO +125°C)
S/N: ELECTRONIC MODULE
DATE CODE:
INPUT VOLTAGE: 24 VDC NOM.
INPUT CURRENT:
OUTPUT VOLTAGE:
OUTPUT CURRENT: SEE MANUAL
HAZARDOUS LOCATION TESTING
POWER GROUND

007389-002 REV. A
POWER FAULT FAULT

+ - S + - S + - S + - S + - S + - S
(006976-001) PROJECT REPORT NO. 135866-XX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

(006924-001)
EQ2220GFM SERIES
EQ3800 SERIES GROUND FAULT MONITOR
POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE GFM
PDM
EEx nA II T4
EEx nA II T3
DEMKO O3 ATEX 133222U
DEMKO O2 ATEX 133865U
T4(Tamb = -40°C TO +85°C) PIRECLx4 SERIES PIRTB SERIES
T3(Tamb = -40°C TO +85°C)
TERMINATION BOX
HAZARD LOCATION TESTING (007948-001) GAS DETECTOR
PROJECT REPORT NO. 133865-XX EEx d [ib] IIC T4-T5 EEx d IIC T5-T6
(007372-001) DEMKO 02 ATEX 131326
EEx d e [ib] IIC T4-T5 T6(Tamb = -55°C TO +60°C)
B 7150 ADD AIM, IPM, GFM, HIM.
DEMKO 01 ATEX 129485X 4 T5(Tamb = -55°C TO +75°C)
T5(Tamb = -40°C TO +40°C) A 6718 NEW RELEASE 7/03 KAT
T4(Tamb = -40°C TO +75°C) HAZARDOUS LOCATION TESTING
5 WARNING: ENSURE SENSOR HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION X3301xxx14 SERIES X2200xxx14 SERIES X9800xxx14 SERIES X5200xxx14 SERIES PROJECT REPORT NO. 131326-XX REV ECO NO. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

RATING IS APPLICABLE FOR THE INTENDED USE. HAZARDOUS LOCATION TESTING DRAWN DATE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
A IR FLAME DETECTOR UV FLAME DETECTOR IR FLAME DETECTOR UVIR FLAME DETECTOR PERFORMANCE TESTING TOLERANCES ARE : A
PROJECT REPORT NO. 129485-XX CDS 6/6/03 DIMENSION TOLERANCE
PROJECT REPORT NO. 132113-XX INCH (MM) INCH (MM)
CHECKED DATE
PERFORMANCE TESTING 0.0 (0) ±.02 ±(0.5)
DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORP.
4 CONFORMS TO EN 61779-4 FOR COMBUSTIBLE GAS PERFORMANCE EEx d IIC T4-T6 EEx d IIC T5-T6 T86°C PROJECT REPORT NO. 132370-XX (007007-001) 0.00 (0.0) ±.01 ±(0.25)
APP'D DATE MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55438
EEx de IIC T5-T6 0.000 (0.00) ±.005 ±(0.13)
EEx de IIC T5-T6 T86°C (007263-001) ANGLE ±1'
DEMKO 01 ATEX 130204 DEMKO 02 ATEX 132195 APP'D DATE REMOVE ALL BURRS BREAK ALL
3 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE ('X'): T6(Tamb = -55°C TO +60°C) EDGES AND SHARP CORNERS
T6(Tamb = -55°C TO +60°C)
PERFORMANCE TEMP. RATING -40°C TO +75°C T5(Tamb = -55°C TO +75°C) FIRST USED ON THIS DRAWING AND SPECIFICATION CONTAIN PROPRIETARY
T5(Tamb = -55°C TO +75°C)
T4(Tamb = -55°C TO +125°C) INFORMATION AND ANY REPRODUCTION DISCLOSURE OR USE
HAZARDOUS LOCATION TESTING BILL OF MAT'L REQ. THEREOF IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
2. PART NUMBERS IN PARENTHESIS DEFINE THE DESIGN REFERENCE DRAWING HAZARDOUS LOCATION TESTING PROJECT REPORT NO. 132195-XX NO PERMISSION OF DETECTOR ELECTRONICS CORPORATION.
ASSOCIATED WITH A DEVICE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. PROJECT REPORT NO. 130204-XX (007380-001) SHEET SCALE
1 OF 1 DO NOT SCALE DRAWING N/A SIZE DRAWING NO. REV
(007288-001)
1. DEMKO APPROVED DRAWING - NO MODIFICATIONS PERMITTED TITLE DWG, DESIGN REFERENCE
WITHOUT REFERENCE TO DEMKO. EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER SYSTEM D 007547-001 B
"DEMKO"
CADDS NAME: 7547-01b
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

95-8533
Figure C-1 (Drawing 007547-001)
APPENDIX D

3.1 D-1 95-8533

 Rocker Switch Table
Node Rocker Switch Node Rocker Switch
Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 X O O O O O O O 71 X X X O O O X O
2 O X O O O O O O 72 O O O X O O X O
3 X X O O O O O O 73 X O O X O O X O
4 O O X O O O O O 74 O X O X O O X O
5 X O X O O O O O 75 X X O X O O X O
6 O X X O O O O O 76 O O X X O O X O
7 X X X O O O O O 77 X O X X O O X O
8 O O O X O O O O 78 O X X X O O X O
9 X O O X O O O O 79 X X X X O O X O
10 O X O X O O O O 80 O O O O X O X O

11 X X O X O O O O 81 X O O O X O X O
12 O O X X O O O O 82 O X O O X O X O
13 X O X X O O O O 83 X X O O X O X O
14 O X X X O O O O 84 O O X O X O X O
15 X X X X O O O O 85 X O X O X O X O
16 O O O O X O O O 86 O X X O X O X O
17 X O O O X O O O 87 X X X O X O X O
18 O X O O X O O O 88 O O O X X O X O
19 X X O O X O O O 89 X O O X X O X O
20 O O X O X O O O 90 O X O X X O X O

21 X O X O X O O O 91 X X O X X O X O
22 O X X O X O O O 92 O O X X X O X O
23 X X X O X O O O 93 X O X X X O X O
24 O O O X X O O O 94 O X X X X O X O
25 X O O X X O O O 95 X X X X X O X O
26 O X O X X O O O 96 O O O O O X X O
27 X X O X X O O O 97 X O O O O X X O
28 O O X X X O O O 98 O X O O O X X O
29 X O X X X O O O 99 X X O O O X X O
30 O X X X X O O O 100 O O X O O X X O

31 X X X X X O O O 101 X O X O O X X O
32 O O O O O X O O 102 O X X O O X X O
33 X O O O O X O O 103 X X X O O X X O
34 O X O O O X O O 104 O O O X O X X O
35 X X O O O X O O 105 X O O X O X X O
36 O O X O O X O O 106 O X O X O X X O
37 X O X O O X O O 107 X X O X O X X O
38 O X X O O X O O 108 O O X X O X X O
39 X X X O O X O O 109 X O X X O X X O
40 O O O X O X O O 110 O X X X O X X O

41 X O O X O X O O 111 X X X X O X X O
42 O X O X O X O O 112 O O O O X X X O
43 X X O X O X O O 113 X O O O X X X O
44 O O X X O X O O 114 O X O O X X X O
45 X O X X O X O O 115 X X O O X X X O
46 O X X X O X O O 116 O O X O X X X O
47 X X X X O X O O 117 X O X O X X X O
48 O O O O X X O O 118 O X X O X X X O
49 X O O O X X O O 119 X X X O X X X O
50 O X O O X X O O 120 O O O X X X X O

51 X X O O X X O O 121 X O O X X X X O
52 O O X O X X O O 122 O X O X X X X O
53 X O X O X X O O 123 X X O X X X X O
54 O X X O X X O O 124 O O X X X X X O
55 X X X O X X O O 125 X O X X X X X O
56 O O O X X X O O 126 O X X X X X X O
57 X O O X X X O O 127 X X X X X X X O
58 O X O X X X O O 128 O O O O O O O X
59 X X O X X X O O 129 X O O O O O O X
60 O O X X X X O O 130 O X O O O O O X

61 X O X X X X O O 131 X X O O O O O X
62 O X X X X X O O 132 O O X O O O O X
63 X X X X X X O O 133 X O X O O O O X
64 O O O O O O X O 134 O X X O O O O X
65 X O O O O O X O 135 X X X O O O O X
66 O X O O O O X O 136 O O O X O O O X
67 X X O O O O X O 137 X O O X O O O X
68 O O X O O O X O 138 O X O X O O O X
69 X O X O O O X O 139 X X O X O O O X
70 O X X O O O X O 140 O O X X O O O X
3.1 D-2 95-8533
 Rocker Switch Table
Node Rocker Switch Node Rocker Switch
Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

141 X O X X O O O X 211 X X O O X O X X
142 O X X X O O O X 212 O O X O X O X X
143 X X X X O O O X 213 X O X O X O X X
144 O O O O X O O X 214 O X X O X O X X
145 X O O O X O O X 215 X X X O X O X X
146 O X O O X O O X 216 O O O X X O X X
147 X X O O X O O X 217 X O O X X O X X
148 O O X O X O O X 218 O X O X X O X X
149 X O X O X O O X 219 X X O X X O X X
150 O X X O X O O X 220 O O X X X O X X

151 X X X O X O O X 221 X O X X X O X X
152 O O O X X O O X 222 O X X X X O X X
153 X O O X X O O X 223 X X X X X O X X
154 O X O X X O O X 224 O O O O O X X X
155 X X O X X O O X 225 X O O O O X X X
156 O O X X X O O X 226 O X O O O X X X
157 X O X X X O O X 227 X X O O O X X X
158 O X X X X O O X 228 O O X O O X X X
159 X X X X X O O X 229 X O X O O X X X
160 O O O O O X O X 230 O X X O O X X X

161 X O O O O X O X 231 X X X O O X X X
162 O X O O O X O X 232 O O O X O X X X
163 X X O O O X O X 233 X O O X O X X X
164 O O X O O X O X 234 O X O X O X X X
165 X O X O O X O X 235 X X O X O X X X
166 O X X O O X O X 236 O O X X O X X X
167 X X X O O X O X 237 X O X X O X X X
168 O O O X O X O X 238 O X X X O X X X
169 X O O X O X O X 239 X X X X O X X X
170 O X O X O X O X 240 O O O O X X X X

171 X X O X O X O X 241 X O O O X X X X
172 O O X X O X O X 242 O X O O X X X X
173 X O X X O X O X 243 X X O O X X X X
174 O X X X O X O X 244 O O X O X X X X
175 X X X X O X O X 245 X O X O X X X X
176 O O O O X X O X 246 O X X O X X X X
177 X O O O X X O X 247 X X X O X X X X
178 O X O O X X O X 248 O O O X X X X X
179 X X O O X X O X 249 X O O X X X X X
180 O O X O X X O X 250 O X O X X X X X

181 X O X O X X O X
182 O X X O X X O X
183 X X X O X X O X O = OPEN
184 O O O X X X O X X = CLOSED
185 X O O X X X O X
186 O X O X X X O X
187 X X O X X X O X
188 O O X X X X O X
189 X O X X X X O X
190 O X X X X X O X

191 X X X X X X O X
192 O O O O O O X X
193 X O O O O O X X
194 O X O O O O X X
195 X X O O O O X X
196 O O X O O O X X
197 X O X O O O X X
198 O X X O O O X X
199 X X X O O O X X
200 O O O X O O X X

201 X O O X O O X X
202 O X O X O O X X
203 X X O X O O X X
204 O O X X O O X X
205 X O X X O O X X
206 O X X X O O X X
207 X X X X O O X X
208 O O O O X O X X
209 X O O O X O X X
210 O X O O X O X X
3.1 D-3 95-8533
Printed in USA

Detector Electronics Corporation

6901 West 110th Street • Minneapolis, Minnesota 55438 USA
Tel: 952.941.5665 or 800.765.3473 • Fax: 952.829.8750
 Safety Manual 95-8599
Eagle Quantum Premier®
SIL 2 Rated Fire & Gas System

1.6 8/07 95-8599

 Table Of Contents
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Document Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

PRODUCT OVERVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
EQP System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
EQP Safety System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
EQP Safety Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
EQP Safety Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
EQPSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
X3301-SIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Eclipse-SIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
EDIO-SIL Enhanced Digital Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
S3 Configuration Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

PROOF TESTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
EDIO Input Channel Proof Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
EDIO Output Channel Proof Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
X3301 Visual Field Inspection Proof Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
X3301 Magnetic Oi Proof Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PIRECL Visual Field Inspection Proof Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PIRECL Gas Response Proof Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
EQP User Logic Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

SUITABLE APPLICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
General Application Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

APPENDIX A – SUMMARY OF SAFETY RELATED DATA. . . . . . . . . . . 16

Appendix B – logic instruction table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17


Note
Where a definition of the term or abbreviation is
given in IEC61508-4 “Definitions and Abbreviations”,
the definition from the standard is given first in
quotation marks, followed by further explanation if
this is necessary.
INTRODUCTION
This Safety Manual describes the actions that must be
taken to use the Det-Tronics Eagle Quantum Premier®
(EQP) Safety System in safety-related applications.
The actions that are described can be either technical or
procedural. For example, a procedural action would be
the need to maintain password protection of configuration
programs, so that non-approved staff cannot modify
these.
This document is limited to those actions that are
required to ensure compliance with the relevant safety
certifications and standards. Other documents such
as Manuals and Data Sheets must be referred to for
information outside the scope of this document. These
documents can be found on the Det-Tronics website
www.det-tronics.com.
The Safety Manual is approved and certified by TÜV-
Nord as part of the overall EQP Safety System. Satisfying
the requirements it describes is a necessary part of using
the EQP Safety System in safety-related applications.
Failure to complete the actions described in this document
would contravene the certification requirements.
Completing the actions described in this document
will only satisfy some of the requirements defined by
IEC 61508 for safety-related applications. It will be
necessary to satisfy the full requirements of IEC 61508,
and for Process Industry applications, the requirements
1.6
1.6 ©Detector Electronics Corporation 2007 
safety manual
Eagle Quantum Premier®
SIL 2 Rated Fire & Gas System
of IEC61511, in order to use the Det-Tronics EQP Safety
System in safety-related applications.
Further, it is the responsibility of the user to ensure
that the EQP Safety System is suitable for the chosen
application and complies with the appropriate application
standards.
SCOPE
The Det-Tronics EQP Safety System is intended for use as
part of a programmable electronic system as defined by
IEC61508. It is suitable for low demand safety functions
up to safety integrity level 2 (SIL 2).
The safety critical functions for the EQP Safety System
include the following:
– Fire input from X3301 and/or EDIO
– Gas alarm from PIRECL and/or EDIO
– Annunciation/Release from EDIO
– System logic for processing and mapping inputs and
outputs.
The safety related functions of the EQP Safety System
include the following:
– Trouble annunciation for compromised safety function
by de-energizing the Controller’s Trouble relay
– Digital input for lockout of inhibits.
The EQP Safety System employs a 1oo1D (i.e. 1 out of
1 with diagnostics) architecture to achieve SIL 2. EQP
Safety Controllers may be used in redundant mode to
increase system availability, but this is not required for
the safety-related performance of the system.
Configuring and programming the EQP Safety System
must be via a software program known as Safety System
Software (S3).
8/07 95-8599
95-8599
In addition to completing the actions specifically related PRODUCT OVERVIEW
to the EQP Safety System, it is necessary to satisfy the
wider requirements of IEC 61508. This includes such
EQP SYSTEM
elements within the framework of the safety lifecycle,
such as hazard and risk analysis and defining the safety The EQP System (on which the Det-Tronics EQP Safety
instrumented function. This work must be carried out System is based) was originally developed to meet the
through appropriate and competent Safety Management requirements of industrial fire and gas detection and
procedures and staff. mitigation. The system comprises (see Figure 1):

DOCUMENT STRUCTURE • Input / output modules

This Safety Manual describes the actions that must • Field devices for fire and gas detection
be taken to use the Det-Tronics EQP Safety System in • Controllers which can be programmed to carry out the
safety-related applications. The main sections are as control of the fire and gas system
follows: • Power supplies and other miscellaneous hardware
• S3 software which is used to configure the system and
Introduction to generate the logic programs which will be run by
Product Overview gives an overview of the Det-Tronics the Controllers
product range in general and the EQP Safety products in • A proprietary protocol known as Eagle Quantum
particular. Premier Safety Loop (EQPSL), which provides
communication between field devices and the
Proof Testing describes the proof testing that is Controllers.
necessary.
NOTE
Suitable Applications describes the use of the For additional information regarding set-up and
Det‑Tronics EQP Safety System in practical applications. installation of the EQP system, refer to the EQP
Included are failure rate data and PFDavg calculations. system manual, form number 95-8533.

Appendix A provides a summary of the essential data

for safety applications for the Det-Tronics EQP Safety
System.

Appendix B gives logic instructions and their restrictions

for low demand SIL 2 applications.

Smoke Detector
Heat Detector

Catalytic Combustible Gas Sensor

Manual Call Station

Beacon

Cylinder

9. UV Flame Detector (X2200) 10. Multispectrum IR

6. Multispectrum IR
Flame Detector (X3301)
5. Digital Communication Unit (DCUEX)
8. UV/IR Flame Detector (X5200) Flame Detector (X3302) 11. Initiating Device Circuit (IDC)
7. Single Frequency IR
Flame Detector (X9800) 12. Enhanced Discrete Input/Output Module (EDIO)
13. Agent Release Module (ARM)

4. PointWatch Eclipse IR Combustible Gas Detector

14. Signal Audible Module (SAM)

1. Eagle Quantum Premier Controller (EQP) Beacon
3. Local Operating Network/Signaling Line Circuit (LON/SLC)
16. Analog Input Module (AIM) 15. Relay Output Module (RM)
17. Intelligent Protection Module
(IPM)
Sounder

2. Safety System Software (S3)

Figure 1—Basic Components of a Det-Tronics EQP System

1.6  95-8599
EQP SAFETY SYSTEM
The Det-Tronics EQP Safety System uses the following
specifically developed components (see Figure 2):
• EQ300X – EQP Controller
• EQ3730EDIO – Enhanced Discrete Input/Output
(EDIO) Module
• X3301 – Multispectrum IR Flame Detector
• PIRECL – Eclipse Infrared Gas Detector
• EQ2500ARM – Agent Release Module
• EQ2500SAM – Signal Audible Module
• EQ2100PSM – Power Supply Monitor
• EQ2220GFM – Ground Fault Monitor
• 008056-001 – HART Interface Module
Configuration Software

The data required to establish the suitability of the EQP • Det-Tronics Safety System Software (S3)
Safety System for safety-related applications is given in
Appendix A of this Safety Manual.

EQP Safet y System components and standard

components can be used together. The non-safety
certified components are classed as non-interfering. A
list of all the devices available for the EQP system is
maintained at www.det-tronics.com and is shown below.

Non-Interfering Modules

• EQ2400NE – Network Extender

• EQ2400PLR – Physical Layer Repeater
• 008982-001 Lon Termination Module (Redundant
Controllers Only)
• 008981-001 Controller to Controller High Speed Serial
Cable (Redundant Controllers Only)
• EQPSL Network Cables – Refer to cable specification
information in the EQP system manual (form 95-8533).
• EQ3700DCIO – Discrete Input/Output Module
• EQ3710AIM – Analog Input Module
• EQ3720RM – Relay Module
• EQ3740IPM – Intelligent Protection Module
• X2200UV – Ultraviolet Flame Detector
• X5200UVIR – Ultraviolet/Infrared Flame Detector
• X9800IR – Infrared Flame Detector
• EQ2200UV – Ultraviolet Flame Detector
• EQ2200UVHT – High Temperature Ultraviolet Flame
Detector
• EQ2200UVIR – Ultraviolet/Infrared Flame Detector
• EQ2200DCU – Digital Communication Unit
• EQ2200DCUEX – Discrete Control Unit with Catalytic
Gas Sensor
• EQ2200IDC – Initiating Device Circuit
• EQ2200IDCSC – Initiating Device Circuit Short Circuit

1.6  95-8599
EQP Safety System Component Overview
Figure 2 gives an overview of the role that each element
of the EQP Safety System has in implementing the safety
function.

X3301 MULTISPECTRUM IR FLAME
DETECTOR IS A SINGLE INPUT DEVICE
SUITABLE IN LOW DEMAND SIL 2
SAFETY INSTRUMENTED SYSTEMS.
MODEL PIRECL IR COMBUSTIBLE GAS
DETECTOR IS A SINGLE INPUT DEVICE
SUITABLE IN LOW DEMAND SIL 2
SAFETY INSTRUMENTED SYSTEMS.
EDIO SAFETY MODULE CONFIGURED
FOR DIGITAL INPUTS. MONITORS THE
INPUTS AND ALSO CHECKS FOR LINE
FAULTS. INTERNAL DIAGNOSTICS
CHECK THAT THE MODULE IS
OPERATING CORRECTLY.
EDIO SAFETY MODULE CONFIGURED
FOR DIGITAL OUTPUTS. OBEYS
COMMANDS TO SET THE OUTPUTS
SENT BY THE CONTROLLER. INTERNAL
DIAGNOSTICS CHECK THAT THE
MODULE IS OPERATING CORRECTLY.
IF A FAULT IS DETECTED, OUTPUTS
WILL BE SET TO THEIR SAFE STATE
OF HOLD LAST STATE.

EQP SAFETY CONTROLLER – RUNS THE

SAFETY APPLICATION PROGRAM AND
CARRIES OUT DIAGNOSTIC CHECKS TO
ENSURE IT IS OPERATING CORRECTLY.
IF A FAULT IS DETECTED, IT WILL BE
INDICATED BY DE-ENERGIZING THE C2343
TROUBLE RELAY.

Figure 2—Det-Tronics EQP Safety System Component Overview

1.6  95-8599
EQP SAFETY CONTROLLERS
The EQP Safety Controllers share a common hardware
and software platform with standard EQP Controllers.
The SIL rated version of the Controller conducts
additional diagnostic checks and annunciates additional
fault conditions.
Safety compliance is assured by additional diagnostics,
which detect failures and take appropriate action should
errors be detected.
If the EQP Safety Controller detects a “dangerous”
fault in itself (i.e. one that would prevent the EQP
Safety System from carrying out its safety function) it
will de‑energize the trouble relay. The fault causing
the Controller’s trouble relay to de-energize must be
investigated and corrected within the time period
determined by SIF verification calculations for the
particular application.
Run Mode
Run Mode is the state in which the Det-Tronics EQP
Safety System is acting as a safety-related system and
carrying out its safety function. When the system is in
this state, it is not possible to make modifications to
configuration parameters or control logic.
Program Mode
The system enters Program Mode when configuration
parameters are downloaded to the system. The
Controller trouble relay is de-energized while in this
mode as an indication. When the EQP System is in
Program Mode, the user is responsible for maintaining a
safe state.
NOTE
When there is a change of configuration, the user is
required to perform a validation test of the change.
Safe and Non-interfering Data
An EQP application program can read data from
safety‑related and non-interfering sources. Data from
non‑interfering sources must not be used in logic to
block or disable safety-related signals in the safety
loop. For example, data coming into the system from
a non‑interfering field device should not be used to
block or disable an alarm output, but It could be used to
activate a common alarm used by safety-related logic.
1.6
Communication with Remote Modbus Devices
EQP Safety Controllers can read or write data to Remote
Modbus devices. Any data read from such devices
is not safety-related and shall not be used to block or
disable safety-related logic.
EQP Controller Inhibit Lockout
Device inhibits allow input and output signals to be
blocked to allow the user to perform maintenance and
testing without affecting system outputs. Example: If a
flame detector is inhibited, a flame can be presented to
the detector and the fire alarm will not be registered by
the controller. Subsequently, no action will be performed
by the controller. Therefore inhibits are classified as a
safety related issue. If a device is inhibited, it will no
longer perform its safety function. For this reason, there
is a global inhibit lockout feature.
Input channel four of the safety controller is designated
as the inhibit lockout channel. The channel must be
configured as “Inhibit Enabled” via the EQP controller
configuration screen in the S3 software. A normally open
switch must be wired to channel four to perform the
inhibit enable function. When the switch is open, inhibits
are not allowed. When the switch is closed, inhibits can
be activated from the controller via user configured logic
or from the individual device point displays on the S 3
software.
When the inhibit lockout switch changes state, it is
logged in the EQP controller. Additionally, individual
devices are logged when they are put into the inhibit
state.
It is the user’s responsibility to create and enforce an
appropriate lockout policy for the site.
 95-8599
EQP Safety Controller Diagnostic Checks
The EQP Safety Controller automatically carries out a
number of diagnostic checks on a continuous basis. A
number of other diagnostic tests are also conducted
to ensure the integrity of the EQPSL communication
network and proper operation of the user’s logic
program.
All checks conducted by the Controller are completed at
least once an hour. This period is called the diagnostic
test interval.
Note
Other devices have different diagnostic test
intervals. See EQP Safety Device Diagnostics. Be
sure to account for this in calculations.
The certifying authority that has granted the Det‑Tronics
EQP Safety System approval for use in low demand
SIL 2 safety-related applications has confirmed the
completeness of the diagnostic tests. The user program
requires no additional on-line diagnostic tests. Proof
testing, which is the responsibility of the user, is
discussed in the “Proof Testing” section of this manual.
Redundant EQP Safety Controllers
Using Det-Tronics EQP Safety Controllers in redundant
mode will increase their availability, but will have no
effect on their ability to perform a safety-related function.
The redundant controller system is certified for use as
part of a SIL 2 system.
When a second Controller is added for redundancy, the
firmware versions must match. Controllers configured
for redundant operation operate in either Master or
Standby mode. Refer to the EQP system manual
(number 95‑8533) for more details regarding controller
redundancy set-up.
1.6
EQP SAFETY DEVICES
EQP Safety rated field devices share many of the same
attributes as standard EQP devices. They have the same
physical form factor and are connected to the system in
the same manner as standard devices. However, SIL
versions of field devices are not directly interchangeable
with the standard versions. Each version has a unique
ID. Each field device must be configured for the
proper type of device or a trouble is annunciated. SIL
rated devices differ from the standard modules in that
they perform additional software diagnostic checks
specifically designed for safety‑related applications. SIL
rated Controllers and EDIOs have red labels for easy
identification. A mixture of SIL and non‑SIL rated field
devices can be used on the system at the same time,
however, non‑SIL rated devices shall not block or inhibit
the safety function in user logic.
Self‑detected failures of the diagnostics will result in
a fault state where the condition is reported to the
controller and annunciated to the user. Depending on
the type of fault, the field device may restart and attempt
to re-establish communication with the controller.
EQPSL
The EQP controller and associated field devices are
connected via the EQPSL communication loop. Only
EQP system approved devices can be connected to
EQPSL network (closed network). Devices from other
manufacturers shall not be connected to the EQPSL.
Special test pattern messages are periodically sent end
to end on the EQPSL to detect faults in the transceivers
and memory buffers.
Extensive diagnostics are implemented in the EQPSL
to detect degraded conditions and ensure that reliable
communications are available when needed to respond
to a demand. This is especially important as Fire and
Gas systems are traditionally energize to trip and it is,
therefore, unacceptable for them to trip based on loss of
power or network communications.
The EQPSL physical network topology is limited to a
single loop which starts and ends at the Controller. The
system is automatically configured to utilize less than
50% of the available bandwidth in normal operation.
The additional bandwidth may be utilized by the system
in transient situations involving heavy message traffic.
Safety communications were evaluated in terms of
probability of failure on demand consistent with an
IEC61508 low demand application.
 95-8599
EQP Safety Device Diagnostics EDIO-SIL Enhanced Digital Input/Output
Module
The EQP Safety devices (EDIO/X3301/Eclipse)
automatically carry out a number of diagnostic checks The SIL EDIO module provides eight channels of
on a continuous basis. All checks are completed at configurable digital input or output. The EDIO Module
least once every two hours (diagnostic test interval). is specially designed to meet the requirements of
IEC‑61508 and expands the input and output capability
Failure of any field device diagnostic will cause the of the Det-Tronics Eagle Quantum Premier System.
trouble relay on the Controller to open. It is the user’s The EQP Controller continuously monitors the status
responsibility to determine what course of action is of the EDIO and controls the outputs with EQPSL
appropriate for their situation when the Controller’s communications.
trouble relay opens.
Each channel of the EDIO safety module can be
The internal diagnostic tests carried out by EQP Safety configured as an input to accept fire detection devices
devices are sufficient to meet the requirements for use in such as manual alarm stations, or as an output for
a low demand SIL 2 safety function. Proof testing, which signaling or releasing. Both input and output circuits
is the responsibility of the user, is discussed in the “Proof can be configured for supervised (line monitoring) or
Testing” section of this manual. unsupervised operation. Channels are only SIL rated
when configured for the supervised mode of operation.
Unsupervised channels can be used for non-safety
X3301-SIL
related uses and are considered non-interfering. It is
The SIL EQP Model X3301 flame detectors are the responsibility of the user to select suitable SIL rated
configured with the use of S3 software and the device is I/O devices to connect to the EDIO.
safety rated at all available sensitivity settings. The fire
alarm status should be used as the safety input signal for This table indicates which EDIO channel configurations
user logic. System “Proof Testing” should be conducted are IEC-61508 SIL rated.
after any change in configuration is made.
Definition SIL Rated
ECLIPSE-SIL Unsupervised Input No
The SIL EQP Model PIRECL combustible gas detectors Unsupervised Output No
are configured via S3 software and the device is safety Smoke Detector No
rated. High and low alarm status should be used as the
safety input signal for user logic. The floating point gas Class A Output Yes
concentration value is available for information, but is not Class A Input Yes
safety rated and should not be used as part of the safety Solenoid Output Yes
function. System “Proof Testing” should be conducted
after any change in configuration is made. Class A Solenoid Output Yes
Class A Smoke Detector Input No
warning Class B Output with Monitoring Yes
The Safety Certification of the PIRECL PointWatch
Eclipse does not include the external HART Class B Input with Monitoring Yes
communication port. HART communication cannot
be used while operating in the Safety operation Detailed information regarding the use of the EQP
mode. EDIO Safety Module is given in the appropriate data
sheets and user documentation (EQP instruction manual
number 95-8533). The information given here only refers
to the safety-related aspects of the module.

Outputs from the EQP Safety EDIO Module are normally

de-energized and are energized on command by the
Controller (for example to release an extinguishant by
opening a normally closed solenoid valve). Outputs
will hold last state on loss of communications with the
controller.

Det-Tronics S3 Safety System Software is used for device

configuration.

1.6  95-8599
EDIO Digital Input Channel
A change in input state is only recognized if the new
input state is held for a filter time interval to ensure that
noise is not incorrectly interpreted as a change in the
input state. The input must be active for at least 750
milliseconds in order to be recognized.
For descriptions and examples of how to provide open,
and open/short circuit monitoring, and Class A or Class
B wiring on EDIO inputs, refer to the Installation section
of the EQP Instruction Manual, 95-8533. Refer to
Appendix A for the different lDU values for open versus
open and short circuit monitoring.
EDIO Digital Output Channel
The EDIO output channel is normally de-energized and
must employ line supervision to be safety rated.
For descriptions and examples of how to provide open,
and open/short circuit monitoring, and Class A or
Class B wiring on EDIO outputs, refer to the Installation
section of the EQP Instruction Manual, 95-8533. Refer
to Appendix A for the lDU value for open and open and
short circuit monitoring.
POWER SUPPLIES
The power supply selected must provide over-voltage
protection to the EQP System. The over-voltage
protection must be set for a maximum of 33 Vdc.
The EQP Safety System is NFPA-72 certified for use
with Det-Tronics EQP Power Supplies, power supply
monitoring, and ground fault monitoring.
Redundant power supplies can be implemented by
“pairing” supplies. This is not required for the certified
safety integrity level, but will improve availability.
The EQPSL devices must be operated between 18 and
30 Vdc. A 10% overvoltage will not damage the devices.
1.6
S3 CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE
S 3 Software is an engineering tool for configuring
parameters and writing control programs (known as
Projects) that are downloaded to EQP Controllers. The
creation of the Project is the responsibility of the user
and must conform with the restrictions in this manual.
This Section describes the features of S 3 Software
applicable to the EQP Safety System. More general
information regarding the operation and use of S 3 can
be found in the S3 manual (number 95-8560).
A summary of S 3 Software features specific to its use
with EQP Safety Systems is given below.
• Only input data from safety approved field devices
(X3301-SIL/Eclipse-SIL/EDIO-SIL) can be used as
safety data in EQP Safety Logic.
• Safety-related inputs and outputs are colored red to
distinguish them from non-safety related I/O.
• User function blocks that are suitable for safety-related
data are colored red to distinguish them from functions
that are not suitable for safety-related data.
• Floating point values are not safety rated and must not
be used in the safety-related logic.
• Numeric calculations are not error checked for overflow
or underflow and the results of such calculations are
not defined. It is the user’s responsibility to bound
inputs so such a condition cannot happen.
• Change control logging and event recording are
available within S3 and EQP Safety Controllers.
While S3 is acceptable for configuring a low demand SIL
2 EQP System, it shall not be part of the safety function.
 95-8599
S3 Password Protection
The user must define what measures are to be applied to
protect against project changes. S3 provides safeguards
described in the following paragraphs.
Access to the S 3 software program is restricted by
password protection. Passwords can be changed at
any time by the user with correct privileges.
S 3 supports up to 63 unique user accounts, each
capable of having a different password and access
privileges. These user accounts are controlled by the S3
system administrator.
Configuring User Accounts
There are five parameters that are used to configure the
users account.
User Level
A user level between 0 and 65535 is used to determine
what a user can do. Each command or button that a
user can interact with in S3 has a user level assigned to
it. The higher the number, the higher the “privileges” for
that user. A user level of “0” would allow “browsing” only
with no command capability.
Configure System Enabled
When selected, this option allows the user access to
the engineering and configuration aspects of the S 3
software suite. This includes the ability to make, move,
configure and delete ports and the ability to create or
modify points like fire detectors, gas detectors, analog
transmitters, digital inputs, etc. attached to one or more
of the available ports.
Quit “Online” Operations Enabled
When selected, the user is able to quit online operations
and return to the S 3 main screen for access to the
various engineering and maintenance utilities.
Port Diagnostics Viewing Enabled
When selected, when online the user can access
the port diagnostics screen. This screen allows the
user to view details about the operation of all active
communication ports, whether serial or ethernet. This
would typically be used by a technician responsible for
troubleshooting connectivity between the S3 station and
any attached systems.
1.6
Restricted Access Enabled
This feature is intended to give limited access of the
EQP port configurations for viewing and documentation
purposes.
User accounts can be created with only the “restricted
access” checkbox selected, or combined with the
other checkboxes — configure system, quit online, port
diagnostics.
S3 Change Control Log
S3 maintains a Configuration Log that records changes
in the master project file. The log can be viewed from
S3.
A record is made in the Configuration Log when:
• IO Modules are added, deleted, or moved
• Tags are added to, removed from, or moved within an
IO Module
• IO Configuration parameters are saved
• External node numbers are entered or modified
• Serial communications parameters are entered or
modified
• A successful download is made to a Controller
• A project is removed.
S3 Function Block Logic
The S 3 software allows users to customize application
software with the use of function block logic. For SIL
certified systems, SIL rated function blocks must be
used to comply with the SIL-2 certification.
The SIL rated function blocks and associated input and
output links are color coded red to help the user identify
quickly if there are any non-compliant blocks. Refer to
Appendix B for a list of available function blocks.
Clearly separate safety-related function logic from
non‑interfering logic. Place all safety functions on their
own logic pages, and place all non-interfering functions
on their own logic pages.
NOTE
It is the user’s responsibility to test, verify and
validate all safety related custom logic for
conformance to the code.
 95-8599
PROOF TESTING
After installation and start-up have been completed,
Proof Tests must be performed for the Det-Tronics EQP
Safety System.
Personnel performing Proof Test procedures must be
competent to perform the task. All Proof Test results
must be recorded, analyzed, and any errors in the safety
functionality must be corrected. The Proof Tests must
be performed at a frequency as shown in the following
table.
WARNING
To prevent undesired actuation of alarm equipment,
systems or signaling devices, be sure to secure
these devices prior to performing the test.
EDIO INPUT CHANNEL PROOF TEST
Tools Required: None
Initiate the input channel via the connected contact
closure device. Verify correct operation at the EDIO
by the local channel LED turning red. If the input is
classified as a flame or gas device, verify correct alarm
display at the EQP controller.
EDIO OUTPUT CHANNEL PROOF TEST
Tools Required: None
Initiate the EDIO output channel by the user logic or
activate the associated input devices (EDIO input, flame
detectors, gas detectors, etc.). Verify correct operation
at the EDIO by the local channel LED turning red. Verify
that the end device connected to the EDIO channel is
activated.
X3301 VISUAL FIELD INSPECTION PROOF TEST
Visual inspection of all Safety- Certified X33 01
Multispectrum IR Flame Detectors shall be conducted
Proof Test Name
EDIO Input Channel Proof Test
EDIO Output Channel Proof Test
X3301 Visual Field Inspection Proof Test
X3301 Mag oi Proof Test
PIRECL Visual Field Inspection Proof Test
PIRECL Gas Response Proof Test
EQP User Logic Verification
1.6
weekly to confirm that there are no obstructions in
the optical field of view. Corrective action will include
removal of such impediments should they exist.
X3301 MAGNETIC Oi PROOF TEST
Tools Required:
• Magnetic oi test tool (part number 102740-002)
All flame detectors must be performance tested using
the Magnetic oi Procedure and inspected to ensure that
they are capable of providing expected performance
and protection. Note that the Magnetic oi Procedure
and Manual oi Tests are not interference free. During
these tests the unit is not performing normal flame
detection functions. Model X3301 provides an onboard
status LED, which indicates Green color when internal
operational parameters are normal. Upon successful
completion of the Magnetic oi test, the LED changes
to a Red color and an alarm status is sent to the EQP
controller. In the event the proof test is unsuccessful, the
LED remains Green and the controller does not indicate
a fire alarm.
PIRECL VISUAL FIELD INSPECTION PROOF TEST
Tools Required: None
Visual inspection of all Safety-Certified PIRECL Gas
Detectors shall be conducted weekly to confirm that no
external blockage of gas/vapor path into the sensing
chamber exists, e.g. debris, trash, snow, mud, external
equipment, etc. Corrective action shall include removal
of such impediments should they exist. All gas detectors
must be inspected to ensure that they are capable of
providing expected performance and protection. Model
PIRECL provides an onboard status LED that indicates
Green color upon inspection when internal operational
parameters are normal. Abnormal operating parameters
are indicated by Amber color (Fault) or Red color (Gas
Alarm).
Commissioning Frequency per Year
Yes 1
Yes 1
Yes 52
Yes 1
Yes 52
Yes 1
Yes —
10 95-8599
PIRECL GAS RESPONSE PROOF TEST INSTALLATION
Tools Required:
General installation instructions are found in the
• Compressed Calibration Gas Kit (part number instruction manual for the EQP system, form number
006468‑001) available from Det-Tronics 95‑8533.

This proof test, commonly referred to as a “gas bump
test”, requires application of high accuracy compressed
calibration gas to the detector while in NORMAL
operational mode and inspecting the signal output level
to ensure that the signal output is accurately indicative of
the applied test gas concentration.
When test gas is flowing into the detector, inspection
of proper gas response can be made by reading the
output displayed on the controller. Criteria for inspection
pass is a response signal within ±3% of applied gas
concentration (50% LEL test concentration applied).
If response test is not within acceptable limits, then a
Full Calibration procedure must be performed and Gas
Response Proof Test re-performed.
EQP USER LOGIC VERIFICATION
Like other Det-Tronics EQP products, the ingress
protection rating of the EQP Safety Controller and EDIO
is IP20. It will be necessary to mount the EQP Safety
Controller and EDIO in a suitable enclosure to provide
mechanical and ingress protection appropriate to the
particular application. X3301 is IP66 minimum and
PIRECL is IP67 minimum.
Access can be restricted by mounting the EQP controller
in a locked enclosure.
SUITABLE APPLICATIONS
The EQP Safety System can be used to provide safety
functions up to Safety Integrity Level 2 (SIL 2). It can be
used in low demand applications only.

All user Safety Logic needs to be fully tested and Typical low demand applications are:
verified using the safety inputs and outputs. This is a
• Fire and Gas protection systems, which monitor for the
commissioning activity, however, if logic is modified
presence of fire or a release of gas, and annunciate/
in the future, proof testing must be repeated. If the
release when demanded upon.
Controller is replaced, project information must be
loaded into the new Controller and verified. The CRC
In this case, the process safety time must be greater
of project related data is calculated and saved by the
than the response time of the EQP Safety System.
controller after each project download. The project CRC
can be viewed on the Controller’s display under User
Logic/General Info/Logic CRC. The project CRC should
be recorded and saved when proof testing is completed.
The project CRC from the Controller must be compared
to the saved value when a Controller is replaced to avoid
complete proof testing of the system.

1.6 11 95-8599
GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
System Application Restrictions
The following application level restrictions have been
assumed:
• The EQP system is only used for safety applications
that are low demand according to IEC-61508
definitions.
• Only Det-Tronics EQP system devices may be
connected to EQPSL network (closed network).
• Physical EQPSL network topology is limited to a single
loop.
• Indication of degraded conditions through opening of
the EQP controller’s fault relay must be investigated
and corrected within time period determined by SIF
verification calculations for the particular application.
• Periodic proof testing of trip signals through
EQPSL network at least once per 5 years (1 year
recommended).
• Periodic proof test of input sensors at least once per 3
years (1 year recommended).
• Product life limited to 20 years.
• The EQP System is operated within the environmental
conditions described in the Specifications section of
EQP Instruction Manual (number 95-8533).
Application Standards
The EQP Safety System is certified to meet the
requirements of a number of application standards that
are listed in this Safety Manual and on the TÜV-Nord
certificate. Users must ensure that they comply with
all the requirements of the standard, not just those that
apply to the EQP Safety System.
Operator Interface
The EQP Safety System may be connected to an
operator interface, matrix panels, mimic panels and
switches.
These interfaces allow the operator to monitor the
operation of the system and diagnose system faults.
The EQP Safety System will allow detected faults (from
line supervision monitoring, internal diagnostics etc.) to
be displayed or indicated.
1.6
S3 Safety System Software
Programming, downloading safety-related parameters
and programs and switching between operating states
is carried out via an engineering workstation using S 3
Software.
Access to the Programming Interface shall only be
permitted for authorized and suitably qualified personnel.
Access must be restricted by the use of passwords (and
the options to do this are provided for within S3 Software)
and/or some other forms of restricting access.
The Programming Interface may be used as the Operator
Interface, but use of the Programming Interface must be
restricted to authorized and qualified personnel.
Instructions for using S 3 and typical application
examples are provided in the S 3 Instruction Manual
(number 95‑8560).
Hardware Fault Tolerance, Safe Failure Fraction
and Sub-System Type
The EQP Safety System is a Type B system, with a
hardware fault tolerance of 0 and a safe failure fraction
of >90%. It is, therefore, suitable for use in safety
functions requiring a safety integrity level of 2.
Calculating PFD for Low Demand Applications
This Section gives a basic introduction to calculating the
average probability of failure on demand (PFDavg) for a
safety function incorporating the EQP Safety System.
For the purpose of this example, the following
assumptions have been made:
• All components are certified as suitable for use in SIL
2 safety-related applications.
• All elements are used in 1oo1 arrangements.
• Any Mean Time To Restore (MTTR) less than 48 hours
is negligible.
• The approximation PFDavg = 1/2 T1 lDU is valid for
the proof test interval considered.
PFDavg for a particular safety function is the sum of the
probabilities of the average failure on demand of each
element of the system, taking into account the proof test
interval of each element.
12 95-8599
Table 1 provides the low demand EQP SIL 2 Safety Example 2 (Figure 3B)
Function model and recommendations for complex
Gas alarm from a PIRECL and output to an EDIO.
modeling (see Note 3).
PFDavg = 0.58 x 10 -3 + (0.38 x 10 -3 + 0.1 x 10 -3) +
PFDavg for each element is calculated according to the
0.1 x 10 -3 + valve & supply = 1.16 x 10 -3 + valve & supply
equation above, where lDU is the undetected dangerous
failure rate per 109 hours and T1 is the proof test interval.
(In this example, T1 is chosen as 1 year (8760 hours) for Example 3 (Figure 3C)
all components of the safety function).
Input from an EDIO and output to the same EDIO.
The value of PFDavg for the system is the sum of
PFDavg = 0.003 x 10 -3 + (0.38 x 10 -3 + 0.1 x 10 -3) +
PFDavg for the individual elements.
0.1 x 10 -3 + valve & supply = 0.58 x 10 -3 + valve & supply
note
Using the table given in the standard, this value would
The EQP system is an energize to trip system.
be suitable for a low demand SIL 2 safety function.
The power supply to the output device should be
Other conditions (hardware fault tolerance and safe
monitored and annunciated when lost. This is
failure fraction) also allow its use in a SIL 2 application.
counted as a Dangerous Detected (DD) fault. If the
power supply is not monitored, it must be counted
See IEC 61508-6 for a more comprehensive guide to the
as a Dangerous Undetected (DU) fault.
calculation of PFDavg.

Example 1 (Figure 3A)

Fire input from an X3301 and output to an EDIO.

PFDavg = 0.58 x 10 -3 + (0.38 x 10 -3 + 0.1 x 10 -3) +

0.1 x 10 -3 + valve & supply = 1.16 x 10 -3 + valve & supply

Table 1—EQP SIL 2 SAFETY FUNCTION MODEL

Safety Safety Function Total DU (failure SU (false DD (detected

SFF
Function INPUT OUTPUT Failure Rate to trip) trip) fault)

EDIO OUTPUT
X3301 Fire Input 96.6% 7,070 FIT 242 FIT 226 FIT 2,980 FIT
(OPEN MONITORING)

EDIO Fire Input

EDIO OUTPUT
(OPEN & SHORT 96.9% 3,580 FIT 110 FIT 130 FIT 2,020 FIT
(OPEN MONITORING)
MONITORING)

PIRECL Gas EDIO OUTPUT

96.2% 6,420 FIT 242 FIT 316 FIT 3,920 FIT
Input (OPEN MONITORING)

EDIO Gas Input

EDIO OUTPUT
(OPEN & SHORT 96.9% 3,580 FIT 110 FIT 130 FIT 2,020 FIT
(OPEN MONITORING)
MONITORING)

NOTE 1: The table includes consideration to a 246 node system with 6 Network Extenders, 14 Physical Layer Repeaters, maximum
cable distance, and a 1-year Proof Test Interval (NFPA 72 requirement) with usage of less than 65% of the SIL 2 budget.

NOTE 2: One EDIO provides both the input channel and the output channel.

NOTE 3: For complex modeling of the EQP System, reference the Exida tool at www.exida.com.

1.6 13 95-8599
 X3301 Simplex EQ300x EQ3730EDIO
IR FLAME EQP SAFETY EQP SAFETY VALVE
DETECTOR CONTROLLER* EDIO**

λDU = 87.5 + 22.8

λDU = 133 T1 = 1 YEAR λDU = 21.8 λDU Valve***
T1 = 1 YEAR PFDavg = (0.38 x 10-3 T1 = 1 YEAR and
PFDavg = 0.58 x 10-3 + 0.1 x 10-3) PFDavg = 0.1 x 10-3 Power Supply

λDU IS FAILURE RATE PER 109 HOURS, TP OF 1 YEAR = 8760 HOURS, PFDavg IS THE PROBABILITY OF FAILURE ON DEMAND.

*Includes Worst Case Safety Communication

(λDU = 22.8, PFDavg = 0.1 x 10-3)
PFDavg = Σ (1/2 • T1 • λDU) **Single Output Configuration, Monitored for Opens
***See note in Calculating PFD for Low Demand Applications

Figure 3A—X3301 Input in a Typical Low Demand Application

PIRECL Simplex EQ300x EQ3730EDIO

ECLIPSE GAS EQP SAFETY EQP SAFETY VALVE
DETECTOR CONTROLLER* EDIO**

λDU = 132 λDU = 87.5 + 22.8 λDU = 21.8 λDU Valve***

T1 = 1 YEAR
T1 = 1 YEAR T1 = 1 YEAR and
PFDavg = (0.38 x 10-3
PFDavg = 0.58 x 10-3 PFDavg = 0.1 x 10-3 Power Supply
+ 0.1 x 10-3)

λDU IS FAILURE RATE PER 109 HOURS, TP OF 1 YEAR = 8760 HOURS, PFDavg IS THE PROBABILITY OF FAILURE ON DEMAND.

*Includes Worst Case Safety Communication

(λDU = 22.8, PFDavg = 0.1 x 10-3)
PFDavg = Σ (1/2 • T1 • λDU) **Single Output Configuration, Monitored for Opens
***See note in Calculating PFD for Low Demand Applications

Figure 3B—PIRECL Input in a Typical Low Demand Application

EQ3730EDIO Simplex EQ300x EQ3730EDIO

SWITCH EQP SAFETY EQP SAFETY EQP SAFETY VALVE
EDIO* CONTROLLER** EDIO***

λDU = 87.5 + 22.8

λDU = 0.68 T1 = 1 YEAR
λDU = 21.8 λDU Valve****
λDU Switch T1 = 1 YEAR
PFDavg = (0.38 x 10-3
T1 = 1 YEAR and
PFDavg = 0.003 x 10-3 PFDavg = 0.1 x 10-3 Power Supply
+ 0.1 x 10-3)

λDU IS FAILURE RATE PER 109 HOURS, TP OF 1 YEAR = 8760 HOURS, PFDavg IS THE PROBABILITY OF FAILURE ON DEMAND.
* Single Input Configuration with Open & Short Monitoring.
λDU for Components Common to both Inputs
and Outputs Contained in EDIO and Output
Calculation
PFDavg = Σ (1/2 • T1 • λDU) ** Includes Worst Case Safety Communication
(λDU = 22.8, PFDavg = 0.1 x 10-3)
***Single Output Configuration, Monitored for Opens
****See note in Calculating PFD for Low Demand Applications

Figure 3C—EDIO Input in a Typical Low Demand Application

1.6 14 95-8599
System Response Time
The EQP Safety System will have a typical response
time of less than 1 second, to which must be added
the response time of the final elements to give the total
response time.
The worst case theoretical response time of the EQP
Safety System, the time taken from an input transition
being detected to an output being asserted, is estimated
by the following:
Applicable Standards
• IEC 61508:2002. “Functional Safety of Electrical/
Electronic/Programmable Electronic Safety-related
Systems”.
• IEC 61511:2003. “Functional Safety - Safety
Instrumented Systems for the Process Sector”.
• EN 54-2:1998. “Fire Detection and Fire Alarm Systems
Part 2: Control and indicating equipment”.
• NFPA 72: 2002. “National Fire Alarm Code”.

• Detection at field device to the Controller over EQPSL
network
– Small system <100 field devices < 3.2 seconds
(user logic constrained to 0.5 seconds)
– Large system >100 field devices < 9.1 seconds
(user logic constrained to 1.5 seconds).
• Worst case response times assume user logic
execution time is constrained to
– Small system < 0.5 seconds
– Large system < 1.5 seconds.
• EN 50270:1999. “Electromagnetic Compatibility
- Electrical apparatus for the detection and
measurement of combustible gases, toxic gases or
oxygen”.
• EN 50130-4:1996 Re-affirmed 2004. “Electromagnetic
compatibility- Product family standard: Immunity
requirements for components of fire, intruder and
social alarm systems”.
• ANSI/FM 3260 (Flame perf.)
• FM 6310/6320 (Gas Perf.)/ISA-12.13.01.
• CSA C22.2 #152 (Gas Perf.)
• EN 61779-1 & -4 (Gas Perf.)

• Worst case Controller to EDIO output < 6.3 seconds. • IEC 61779-1 & -4 (Gas Perf.)
• ANSI/ISA 12.13.01. “Performance Requirements for
• Worst case response times assume a high level of Combustible Gas Detectors”.
lost messages due to internal or external influences,
and three subsequent retries.

note
The worst case theoretical response time, as
required by IEC 61508, will only occur once per
1,000,000 trips. It must occur during the worst
case degraded communication conditions possible
without generating a communication fault.

NOTE
The process safety time must be compared with
the response time of the entire safety function. In
addition to the response time of the EQP Safety
System, the response time of the input sensors and
output actuators must be included.

1.6 15 95-8599
 APPENDIX A
SUMMARY OF SAFETY RELATED DATA

SUMMARY OF DATA FOR SAFETY-RELATED APPLICATIONS

Certified for use up to SIL 2 Configuration 1oo1D

Architecture Type B Hardware Fault Tolerance 0

Safe Failure Fraction > 90%

Failure Rate Data

Part Model lDU (dangerous undetected failure rate per 109 hours)

EQP Safety Controller EQ3xxx 87.5

Common = 20.9
EDIO Safety Module -
EQ3730EDIO Input Monitored for Opens = 6.6
Configured as Input*
Input Monitored for Opens & Shorts = 0.68

EDIO Safety Module - Common = 20.9

EQ3730EDIO
Configured as Output* Output Monitored for Opens, Opens & Shorts = 0.92

X3301 IR Flame Detector X3301 133

Eclipse IR Gas Detector Model PIRECL 132

EQP Safety Communications 22.8

* “Common” are components common to both inputs and outputs. For lDU calculation:
Example 1: Input and output on same EDIO
lDU = Common + Input + Output
lDU = 20.9 + 0.68 + 0.92 = 22.5
Example 2: Input and output on different EDIOs
lDU = lDU EDIO #1 + lDU EDIO #2
= (Common + Input) + (Common + Output)
= (20.9 + 0.68) + (20.9 + 0.92) = 43.4

1.6 16 95-8599
 Appendix B

logic instruction table

The “SIL” column indicates if the instruction is suitable for use with alarm processing with a 61508 approved system.
Instructions that utilize stored values which are not duplicated, or instructions that depend on the floating-point or
string libraries are not safety rated.

Mnemonic Description SIL

ABS d Absolute. The values on the stack can be integer, double or float. Yes for all but
The result will be of the same type as the stack value –23 = 23. The floating-point
instruction is followed by the data type. values
AccessAlarm (Read an Alarm List Entry): This function is used to provide an interface No
to the controllers alarm list. This can be used to read out alarm
information from the controllers alarm list. When the first, next or
previous inputs are activated the output information is updated from the
controllers internal alarm list (info displayed on the controllers faceplate).
Inputs are activated on a rising edge input signal. If multiple inputs are
activated at the same time the priority is first, next then previous.
ADD d, ADD d n The values on the stack can be Boolean, integer, double or float. All Yes for all but
items will be of the same type. The first form, ADD, reads all the values floating-point
from the stack, decrements the stack pointer, performs an ADD function values
and writes the result into the new accumulator location. ADD n reads the
top n values and performs the same operation. If the inputs are Boolean
then result will be an integer else then result is of the same type as the
inputs. The instruction is followed by the data type and then the count, if
present. i.e. ADD 3 4 or ADD 3
AND, AND n The first form, AND, reads all the values from the stack, decrements Yes
the stack pointer, performs a logical AND function and writes the result
into the new accumulator location. AND n reads the top n values and
performs the same operation. 0 = False, Non-0 values = True.
ANDW d, ANDW Logical AND. The values on the stack can be integer or double. All Yes
dn values will be of the same type and the result will be of the same type.
The values are popped from the stack and the result is placed on the
stack. The first form, ANDW, reads all the values from the stack, ANDW
n reads the top n values. All of the bits of the word are operated on. The
instruction is followed by the data type and then the count, if present. i.e.
ANDW 3 4 or ANDW 3
AlarmTrigger (Add an Alarm to the Alarm List): This function is used to add an alarm No
to the controllers alarm list. This can be used to trigger, log and display
alarms that are initiated by user logic. When the enable input is activated
the alarm information defined in this function along with the current time
and date is entered into the controllers alarm list. If alarms such as fire
or gas are initiated the Controller alarm outputs will be automatically
triggered. Like other alarms these will be logged only once (until reset)
and latched in the list until the controller reset is activated. The alarm
on/off state on the controller display will mirror the enable input. Must be
in the normal program, must not be in the first scan or moves programs.

1.6 17 95-8599
 AVG d, AVG d n Average. The first form reads all the values from the stack. The second Yes for all but
form reads n values. The values on the stack can be integer, double or floating-point
float. All values will be of the same type and the result will be of the same values
type. The values are popped from the stack and the result is placed on
the stack. Average is the value obtained by dividing the sum of the value
on the stack by the number of values. (8.0 + 7.0 + 8.0) / 3 = 17.6. The
instruction is followed by the data type and then the count, if present. i.e.
AVG 3 4 or AVG 3
BINT Boolean to Integer. The value on stack is a Boolean. The result will be a Yes
“0” or a “1”.
BRA X Branch. If the accumulator is a one then branch the number of lines Not supported
equal to X. X will always be greater than zero. If X is greater than the yet
number of lines remaining in –the program/section then jump to the
beginning of the next program/section.
BRZ X Branch on zero. Same as BRA but branches on a zero in the Not supported
accumulator. yet
BTW d Between. The values on the stack can be integer, double or float. All Yes for all but
items will be of the same type. The stack has three items on it. The first floating-point
two are the comparison values and the third is the compare item. All values
items are removed from the stack and the third item is compared against
the first two items. If the third item is <= the first item and >= the second
item a one is placed in the accumulator else a zero is placed in the
accumulator. The result is a Boolean. Ex.: I1 = 50 I2 = 25 I3= 40 then a
one is place in the accumulator. The instruction is followed by the data
type.
BTWT Time compare. The BTWT instruction is followed by three time/date No
memory locations. The high time, followed by the in value, followed by
the low time. The result, a Boolean, is placed on the stack. The output is
true if the in value is between or equal to the high and low.
CEIL Ceiling. The value on the stack is a float. The result will be a double. No
Round up. –2.8 = -2, 2.8 = 3, -1 = -1
CST Clear stack. The stack pointer is set to the top of the stack Yes
CTD Down Counter. Three items are pushed onto the stack. The “count down No
(CD)” a Boolean, the “Load (LD)” a Boolean and the “Present (PR)” a
double. All items are removed from the stack.

Then the CTD instruction followed by the current value location, a double
and the CD prior state, a Boolean. Ex. “CTD 12.24.0 10.89” When the
CD input is true and the LD input is false the counter counts down. The
current value is then placed on the stack.

The Boolean result is true if the current value is less than or equal to zero
and is placed on the stack. The counter stops counting when the current
value reaches –2,147,483,648. When the LD is true the PR is loaded
into the current value to initialize the counter and the counter does not
increment.
CTD-SIL SIL Down Counter. The SIL Down Counter operates the same as the Yes
standard CTD but provides duplicate storage for the persistent values.
Then the CTD-SIL instruction followed by two current value locations,
doubles and two locations for the CD prior state, Booleans.

Example: “CTD-SIL 12.24.0 12.25.0 10.89 10.90”

1.6 18 95-8599
 CTU Up Counter. Three items are pushed onto the stack. The “count up (CU)” No
a Boolean, the “Reset (R)” a Boolean, and the “Present (PR)” a double.
All items are removed from the stack. Then the CTU instruction followed
by the current value location, a double and the CU prior state, a Boolean.
Ex. “CTU 12.25.0 10.15” When the CU input is true and the R input is
false the counter counts up. The current value is then placed on the
stack. The Boolean result is true if the current value is greater than or
equal to the PR and is placed on the stack. The counter stops counting
when the current value reaches 2,147,483,647. When the R is true the
current value is set to zero.
CTU-SIL SIL Up Counter. The SIL Up Counter operates the same as the standard Yes
CTU but provides duplicate storage for the persistent values. Then the
CTU instruction followed by two current value locations, doubles and two
locations for the CU prior state, Booleans. Example: “CTU-SIL 12.25.0
12.26.0 10.15 10.16”
CTUD Up/Down Counter. Five items are pushed onto the stack. The “count up No
(CU)” a Boolean, the “count Down (CD)” a Boolean, the “Reset (R)” a
Boolean, the “Load (LD)” a Boolean and the “Present (PR)” a double. All
items are removed from the stack.

Then the CTUD instruction followed by the current value location, a

double, the CU prior state, a Boolean and the CD prior state, a Boolean.
Ex. “CTUD 12.25.0 10.48 10.49” When the CU input is true and the R
input is false the counter counts up and when the CD input is true and
the LD input is false the counter counts down. If both the CU and CD
inputs are true the counter will count up. The current value is then placed
on the stack.

If the current value is greater than or equal to the PR, a Boolean true is
placed on the stack else a Boolean false is placed on the stack. This is
the QU result.

If the current value is less than or equal to zero, a Boolean true is placed
on the stack else a Boolean false is placed on the stack. This is the QD
result.

The counter stops counting when the current value reaches

2,147,483,647 or –2,147,483,648. When the R is true the current value is
set to zero. When the LD is true the PR is loaded into the current value to
initialize the counter.
CTUD-SIL SILUp/Down Counter. The SIL Up Counter operates the same as the Yes
standard CTU but provides duplicate storage for the persistent values.

Then the CTUD instruction is followed by two locations for the current
value, doubles, two locations for the CU prior state, Booleans and two
locations for the CD prior state, Booleans.

Example: “CTUD-SIL 12.25.0 12.26.0 10.48 10.49 10.50 10.51”

DBLFLT Double to float. The value on the stack is a double. The result will be a No
float.
DBLINT Double to integer. The value on the stack is a double. The result will be Yes
an integer.

1.6 19 95-8599
 DIV d Divide. The values on the stack can be integer, double or float. The first Yes for all but
item is the dividend followed by the divisor is pushed on the stack. The floating-point
items are removed from the stack. The result type is the same as the two values
inputs.
(X / Y) Y is pushed on the stack and then X. The instruction is followed
by the data type.
DBLTOSTR When the enable input is high the 32-bit double input value is converted No
to a string. The input value can come from any valid double source. The
instruction is followed by the enable (boolean), last enable (boolean),
source and destination reference.
DTTOINT Date/Time to integers. The conversion is executed and the seconds, No
minutes, hour, day, month and year are placed in local memory locations.
The instruction is followed by the address of the date/time structure and
the starting address in the local memory integer area. The results are
placed in the first location and subsequent 5 locations
END This instruction shall be placed as the very last instruction of the Yes
program. Logic execution will loop back to the beginning when this
instruction is seen.
ET d Equal To. The values on the stack can be integer, double or float. Pop Yes for all but
the values from the stack, the instruction is executed and the results are floating-point
stored on the stack. The result is a Boolean. The instruction is followed values
by the data type.
EventTrigger (Add an Event to the Controller Alarm List): No
This function is used to add an event to the controllers alarm list. This
can be used to trigger, log and display events that are initiated by user
logic. When the enable input is activated the event information defined
in this function is entered into the controllers alarm list (info displayed on
the controllers faceplate). This function also provides an input to control
if the event is self-clearing or latched until the controller reset is activated.
The word “Event” will be displayed in the screen position that normally
displays the type of alarm. Must be in the normal program, must not be
in the first scan or moves programs.
FLOOR Floor. The value on the stack is a float. The result will be a double. No
Round down. –2.8 = -3, 2.8 = 2, -1 = -1
FRAC Fraction. The value on the stack is a float. The result will be a float. No
123.456 = 0.456.
GT d Greater Than. The values on the stack can be integer, double or float. Yes for all but
Pop the values from the stack, the instruction is executed and the results floating-point
are stored on the stack. The result is a Boolean. (X > Y) Y is pushed on values
the stack and then X. The instruction is followed by the data type.
GTE d Greater Than / Equal To. The values on the stack can be integer, double Yes for all but
or float. Pop the values from the stack, the instruction is executed and floating-point
the results are stored on the stack. The result is a Boolean. (X >= Y) Y is values
pushed on the stack and then X. The instruction is followed by the data
type.
IF d The first value can be Boolean, integer, double, string or float. It will be No
of the same type as the output address referenced. The second value
on the stack is a Boolean. The items are popped from the stack. If the
second input is false nothing is done. If the second input is true the
value on the stack is stored in the address referenced. The instruction is
followed by the data type and the address to store the result.

1.6 20 95-8599
 FLTTOSTR When the enable input is high the floating-point input value is converted No
to a string. The input value can come from any valid floating point source.
The precision number determines the number of decimal digits. The
instruction is followed by the enable (boolean), last enable (boolean),
source, precision (integer) and destination references. Valid values for
precision are 0 to 6, if the value is out of range 6 is used.
IN Load the value of the item referenced into the accumulator. The item Yes for all but
referenced must be from local memory. In the case of stings the floating-point
reference is place on the stack. and string
values
INN This instruction is the same as IN except the value is NOT’d before it is Yes for all but
placed into the accumulator. floating-point
and string
values
INTBOOL Integer to Boolean. The value on the stack is an integer. The result will Yes
be a Boolean. If the integer is non-zero then the Boolean will be true.
INTDBL Integer to double. The value on the stack is an integer. The result will be Yes
a double.
INTTODT Integer(s) to Date/Time. The INTTODT is followed by the memory No
references to the seconds, minutes, hour, day, month and year and the
result memory location. The conversion is done. The result, Date/Time, is
stored in the referenced location.
INTFLT Integer to float. The value on the stack is an integer. The result will be a No
float.
INTTOSTR When the enable input is high the 16-bit integer input value is converted No
to a string. The input value can come from any valid integer source. The
instruction is followed by the enable, last enable, source and destination
reference.
LIMIT d Limit. The values on the stack can be integer, double or float The high Yes for all but
limit, the value and the low limit are pushed on the stack. The values are floating-point
removed and the result is placed on the stack. The result will be between values
the high and low values. If the value is 102 and the high is 100 and the
low is 0 then the result will be 100. The instruction is followed by the data
type.
LT d Less Than. The values on the stack can be integer, double or float. Pop Yes for all but
the values from the stack, the instruction is executed and the results are floating-point
stored on the stack. The result is a Boolean. (X < Y) Y is pushed on the values
stack and then X. The instruction is followed by the data type.
LTE d Less Than / Equal To. The values on the stack can be integer, double or Yes for all but
float. Pop the values from the stack, the instruction is executed and the floating-point
results are stored on the stack. The result is a Boolean. (X <= Y) Y is values
pushed on the stack and then X. The instruction is followed by the data
type.
MAX d, input Maximum Select. The values can be integer, double or float. Same as Yes for all but
count, inputs minimum except the maximum values is selected. The result will be of floating-point
the same type as the inputs. The result is placed on the stack. The data values
type, input count and the inputs follow the MAX instruction.

1.6 21 95-8599
 MEDIAN d, input Median. The values can be integer, double or float. All values will be Yes for all but
count, inputs of the same type and the result will be of the same type. The result is floating-point
placed on the stack. Median is the value midway between the values. values
Definition: a) designating the middle number in a series containing an
odd number of items (Ex.: 7 in the series 1, 4, 7, 16, 43) b) designating
the middle number midway between the two middle numbers in a series
containing an even number of items (Ex.: 10 in the series 3, 4, 8, 12, 46,
72) The maximum number of inputs is 32. The instruction is followed by
the data type, input count and the inputs.
MIN d, input Minimum select. The can be integer, double or float. All inputs will be Yes for all but
count, inputs of the same type. The result will be of the same type as the inputs. The floating-point
result is placed on the stack. The data type, input count and the inputs values
follow the MIN instruction.
MOD d Modulo. The values on the stack can be integer or double. The Y and Yes
then the X are pushed on the stack. The items are removed and the
operation is executed The result, the same type as the inputs, is placed
on the stack. The mod operator returns the remainder obtained by
dividing its operands. In other words, x mod y = x – (x div y) * y. For
example: 9/4 is 2.25, but 4 goes into 9 twice with one left over, so 9 mod
4 is 1. The instruction is followed by the data type.
MODBUS Modbus. The Modbus instruction has 9 inputs and 4 outputs. No

Inputs
Enable Boolean, Port # integer (1..4), slave ID integer (0-247), function
code integer (see supported Modbus functions), source register integer
(zero based), count integer, destination register integer (zero based),
timeout integer (1000 to 2000 ms.) and clear error Boolean.

Outputs.
Pending Boolean is set when a read is pending in the queue, Done
Boolean output is true when the read response is received. It is set to
false on error and when the enable input goes from false to true, error
Boolean output is true when an error is detected. It is cleared when the
Clear Error input is true, and error code integer fault (see error codes in
the Modbus section).

“Enabled” and “Clear Error” are pushed on the stack. All other inputs are
constants and are resolved at compile time.

All outputs are referenced addresses and are part of the instruction.
Since the function is asynchronous the outputs values are resolved when
the function is handled.

A download error will be returned if the referenced data is outside the

user defined Modbus memory. Logic download error (5) and the following
number will be the last tracer number.

The port # must be a valid port configured for Modbus Master protocol.

Instruction Example:
MODBUS port #, slave id, function code, source register, count,
destination register, timeout, pending, done, error, error code

1.6 22 95-8599
 MODMOVF Used to move a floating-point value to Modbus memory. A floating-point No
value is moved from memory to two adjacent Modbus holding registers.
Example: MODMOVF 13.1.0 (src) 5.3.1.0 (dest)
This example will move the first floating-point value from local memory to
the first and second holding registers.
MOFN M of N. Up to 31 (Boolean) values, followed by the MOFN instruction, the Yes
PR (integer) and the number of inputs (integer). All values are removed
from the stack. The instruction counts the number of inputs (NOI) that are
true. All or the results are Boolean. Then it does three comparisons using
the PR and the NOI. A NOI < PR is done and the result is placed on the
stack. A NOI = PR is done and the result is placed on the stack. And
finally a NOI > PR is done and the result is placed on the stack.
MOV This is used to move data from one location another location. Data can Yes for all but
not be moved to or from the stack and constants can not be used with floating-point
this instruction. and string
Example: MOV 10.0.0 (src) 10.4.0 (dest) values
MOVC This instruction is a compile time instruction. It’s used to move constant Yes for all but
data into local memory area. It has the same format as the MOV floating-point
instruction. The constant value and the destination local memory and string
reference follow the MOVC. The MOVC instruction is not executed as values
part of logic, it’s done at compile time.
Example: MOVC &I123456 11.34
MOVMODF Used to move a floating-point value from Modbus memory to global No
memory. A floating-point value is moved from two adjacent Modbus
holding registers to a global floating-point memory location.
Example: MOVMODF 5.3.1.0 (src) 23.1.0 (dest)
This example will move a floating-point value from the first and second
holding registers to the first global memory location.
MUL d Multiply. The values on the stack can be integer, double or float. The first Yes for all but
item is the multiplicand followed by the multiplier. The items are removed floating-point
from the stack. The result type is the same as the two inputs. The values
instruction is followed by the data type.
MUX selector, Multiplex. X values of Boolean, integer, double, string or float, all values Yes for all but
input count, are the same type. The item indexed by the selector index is placed on floating-point
inputs the stack. The output will be the same type as the inputs. If the selector and string
is out of range a “zero” is placed on the stack. If the selector is zero then values
the output is zero. The legal range for the selector is 1 to 31. The input
count, selector, and the inputs follow the MUX instruction.
NOT Read the value of the accumulator, logically negate the value and write Yes
the result into the accumulator overwriting the original value. Boolean
value only.
NOTX Read the value of the accumulator performs a 16 bit logical complement Yes
of the value and writes the result into the accumulator overwriting the
original value.
ODD d ODD. The value on the stack can be integer or double. The result is a Yes
Boolean.
OR, OR n The first form, OR, reads all the values from the stack, decrements the Yes
stack pointer, performs a logical OR function and writes the result into
the new accumulator location. OR n reads the top n values and performs
the same operation. 0 = False, Non-0 values = True.

1.6 23 95-8599
 ORW d, ORW Logical OR. The values on the stack can be integer or double. All values Yes
d, n will be of the same type and the result will be of the same type. Values
are popped from the stack and the result is placed on the stack. The
first form, ORW, reads all the values from the stack, ORW n reads the
top n values. All of the bits of the word are operated on. The instruction is
followed by the data type and the count if included
OSP One shot pulse. The value of the input, a Boolean, is placed on the stack. No
The instruction followed by the local storage, a Boolean, of the last state.
The result, a Boolean, is placed on the stack overwriting the input value.
OSP-SIL One shot pulse SIL. The value of the input, a Boolean, is placed on the Yes
stack. The instruction followed by two local storage locations, a Boolean,
of the last state. The result, a Boolean, is placed on the stack overwriting
the input value.
OUT The value of the accumulator is moved to the item referenced. The stack Yes for all but
is not decremented. floating-point
and string
values
PCK Bit Packing. 16 values are put on the stack via the IN or PUSH instruction Yes
The sixteen values are popped off the stack and the bit weighted result is
placed into the accumulator.
POP Pop the stack. Pop pops the last value off the stack and discards it. The Yes
stack pointer decrements to point to the next item on the stack.
PUSH Push constant data onto the stack. The item is placed on the top of the Yes
stack and the stack pointer is incremented by one.
ROUND Bankers rounding. The value on the stack is a float. The result will be a No
double.
RS Reset/Set instruction. Same as the SR with the following exception: This No
instruction is Reset dominant bistable. If the reset input is true then the
output is false regardless of the set input.
RS-SIL SIL Reset/Set instruction. The SIL Reset/Set instruction operates Yes
the same as the standard RS but provides duplicate storage for the
persistent value.
Example: RS-SIL 10.19.0 10.20.0
RTM Retentive Timer. The timer has three inputs and two outputs. The inputs No
are pushed on the stack in the following order. Enabled a Boolean, timer
preset a double, reset a Boolean, RTM instruction and timer number. All
of the items are removed from the stack and the timer is executed. The
timer complete status, a Boolean and the timer elapsed time, a double,
are placed on the stack in that order. The accumulator is not cleared
unless the reset input is true.
RTM-SIL SIL Retentive Timer. The SIL Retentive Timer operates the same as 15.17 15.18
the standard Retentive Timer but provides duplicate storage for the
persistent values.
Example: RTM-SIL
SCALE d Scale. The values on the stack can be integer, double or float. All the No
values will be of the same type. The output will be of the same type. The
first value is the input. The second value is the low range for the input.
The third value is the high range for the input. The fourth value is the low
range for the output and the fifth value is the high range for the output. All
values are removed from the stack. The instruction is executed and the
result is placed on the stack. The instruction is followed by the data type.

1.6 24 95-8599
 SEL d Selector. The first two values can be Boolean, integer, double, string or Yes for all but
float. They will be of the same type and the output will be of this type. floating-point
The third value on the stack is a Boolean. The items are popped from the and string
stack. If the third input is false then the first value is placed on the stack values
and if the third input is true the second value is placed on the stack. The
instruction is followed by the data type.
SQR Square. The value on the stack is a float. The result will be a float. No
SQRT Square Root. The value on the stack is a float. The result will be a float. No
SR Set/Reset instruction. The three items on the stack are the set address, No
reset address the instruction SR followed by the result address. The
items are removed from the stack, the instruction is executed, and the
result is stored in the result location and is pushed onto the stack. This
instruction is the set dominant bistable. If the set input is true then the
output is true, regardless of the reset input.
SR-SIL SIL Set/Reset instruction. The SIL Set/Reset instruction operates the Yes
same as the standard Set/Reset instruction, but provides duplicate
storage for the persistent value.
Example: SR-SIL 10.19.0 10.20.0
STORE Remove and store the value of the accumulator to the memory location Yes for all but
referenced. The location will be a local or global memory. floating-point
and string
values
STRAPD When the enable input is high source string 2 is appended to the end of No
source string 1 and placed in the destination string. If the resulting string
exceeds the maximum string length it will be trimmed. The instruction is
followed by the enable (boolean), last enable (boolean), source 1, source
2 and destination references.
STRCPY When the enable input is high the source string is copied to the No
destination string. The instruction is followed by the enable (boolean),
last enable (boolean), source reference and destination reference.
STRNCPY This function is used to extract parts from a string. When the enable is No
high not more then ‘Count’ characters starting with character ‘Index’ are
copied to the destination string. A null termination will be applied to the
destination string. The instruction is followed by the enable (boolean),
last enable (boolean), count (int), index (int), source and destination
references.
STRTOMB Source string (including the null terminator) is copied to Modbus holding No
registers. The string will be packed into Modbus memory with two
characters per holding register. The first character of the string is placed
in the high order 8-bits of the lowest numbered register. The source
string can be from local memory or from a device item. The destination
must be a Modbus holding register. The instruction is followed by the
source and destination references.
SUB d Subtract. The values on the stack can be integer, double or float. The Yes for all but
first item is the subtrahend followed by then minuend. The items are floating-point
removed from the stack. The result type is the same as the two inputs.
(I had to look up that in 5-3 5 is the minuend and 3 is subtrahend. ;) The
instruction is followed by the data type.

1.6 25 95-8599
 TIMEDATE- (TimeDate to String): No
TOSTR When the enable input is high the timedate value is converted to a string.
The input value can come from any valid timedate source. The output
format is selectable. The instruction is followed by the enable (boolean),
last enable (boolean), source (time/Date), format (integer), destination
references. See the format table below.
TOF Off Timer. The timer has two inputs and outputs. The inputs are pushed No
on the stack in the following order. Enabled a Boolean, timer preset a
double, TOFF instruction and timer number. All of the items are removed
from the stack and the timer is executed. The timer complete status, a
Boolean and the timer elapsed time, a double, are placed on the stack in
that order.
TOF-SIL The SIL version of the Off Timer is the same as the normal TOF function Yes
with the addition of duplicate storage for elapsed time variable.
TON On Timer. The timer has two inputs and outputs. The inputs are pushed No
on the stack in the following order. Enabled a Boolean, timer preset a
double, TON instruction and timer number. All of the items are removed
from the stack and the timer is executed. The timer complete status, a
Boolean and the timer elapsed time, a double, are placed on the stack in
that order.
TON-SIL The SIL version of the On Timer is the same as the normal TON function Yes
with the addition of duplicate storage for elapsed time variable.
TRUNC The value on the stack is a float. The result will be a double. 123.456 = No
123
UPCK Bit unpacking the reverse of the pack instruction (PCK). An integer value Yes
is place on the stack. The UPCK instruction is followed by a starting
address in the local Boolean memory area. The resulting bits are placed,
beginning at the starting address and the following fifteen sequential
memory locations.
XOR, XOR n Exclusive OR. The first form reads all the values from the stack. The Yes
second form reads n values. The output is high when the number of high
inputs is odd.

1.6 26 95-8599
 ­Detector Electronics Corporation
6901 West 110th Street
Minneapolis, MN 55438 USA

T: 952.941.5665 or 800.765.3473
F: 952.829.8750
W: http://www.det-tronics.com
X3301 Multispectrum PointWatch Eclipse® Eagle Quantum Premier® Eagle Logic Solver
IR Flame Detector IR Combustible Gas Detector Safety System Safety System E: detronics@detronics.com

Det-Tronics, the DET-TRONICS logo, Eagle Quantum Premier, and Eclipse are registered trademarks or trademarks of Detector Electronics
Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.

© Copyright Detector Electronics Corporation 2007. All rights reserved.